Panasonic | Camera Accessories AJ-P2C064AG | User manual | Panasonic Camera Accessories AJ-P2C064AG User manual

Panasonic Camera Accessories AJ-P2C064AG User manual
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 1 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
This product is eligible for the P2HD
5 Year Warranty Repair Program. For
details, see page 7.
Operating Instructions
Memory Card Camera-Recorder
Model No.
AJ-HPX3700G
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.
F1008T0 -F [D]
Printed in Japan
ENGLISH
VQT1V68
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 2 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Read this first!
Declaration of Conformity
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER TO SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (service) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK
HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK
HAZARD, KEEP THIS EQUIPMENT AWAY
FROM ALL LIQUIDS. USE AND STORE ONLY
IN LOCATIONS WHICH ARE NOT EXPOSED
TO THE RISK OF DRIPPING OR SPLASHING
LIQUIDS, AND DO NOT PLACE ANY LIQUID
CONTAINERS ON TOP OF THE EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION:
In order to maintain adequate ventilation, do not
install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in
cabinet or any other confined space. To prevent risk
of electric shock or fire hazard due to overheating,
ensure that curtains and any other materials do not
obstruct the ventilation.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK
HAZARD, REFER MOUNTING OF OPTIONAL
INTERFACE BOARDS TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK
HAZARD AND ANNOYING INTERFERENCE,
USE THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES
ONLY.
CAUTION:
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones cause hearing loss.
indicates safety information.
2
Model Number:
AJ-HPX3700G
Trade Name:
PANASONIC
Responsible Party: Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ
07094
Support contact:
Panasonic Broadcast & Television
Systems Company 1-800-524-1448
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
The user may find the booklet “Something About
Interference” available from FCC local regional offices
helpful.
Warning:
To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance, follow the
attached installation instructions and the user must use only
shielded interface cables when connecting to host computer or
peripheral devices. Also any unauthorized changes or
modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority
to operate this device.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the unit in direct contact with the skin
for long periods of time when in use.
Low temperature burn injuries may be suffered if
the high temperature parts of this unit are in direct
contact with the skin for long periods of time.
When using the equipment for long periods of time,
make use of the tripod.
CAUTION:
Do not lift the unit by its handle while the tripod is
attached. When the tripod is attached, its weight will
also affect the unit’s handle, possibly causing the
handle to break and hurting the user. To carry the
unit while the tripod is attached, take hold of the
tripod.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 3 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
A rechargeable battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased.
<For USA-California Only>
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca/gov/hazardouswaste.perchlorate.
Caution regarding laser beams
The CCD may be damaged if it is subjected to light from a laser beam.
When using the camera-recorder in locations where laser irradiation equipment is used, be careful not to allow the laser
beam to shine directly on the lens.
EU
To remove the battery
Main Power Battery (Ni-Cd / Ni-MH / Li-ion Battery)
To detach the battery, please proceed in the reverse order of the installation method described in this manual.
(Refer to page 113 for the detail.)
If a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used, check the Operating Instructions accompanying the battery.
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)
For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end of its service life, please consult your dealer.
PLEASE NOTE:
When preparing to record important images, always shoot some advance test footage, to verify that both pictures and
sound are being recorded normally.
Should video or audio recording fail due to a malfunction of this camera-recorder or the P2 cards used, we will not
assume liability for such failure.
If the unit is operated continuously with the fan stopped due to a failure, camera images may not be output, recorded, or
played back properly.
What to remember when throwing memory cards away or transferring them to others
Formatting memory cards or deleting data using the functions of the unit or a computer will merely change the file
management information: it will not completely erase the data on the cards. When throwing these cards away or
transferring them to others, either physically destroy them or use a data deletion program for computers (commercially
available) to completely erase the data. Users are responsible for managing the data on their memory cards.
3
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 4 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
EMC NOTICE FOR THE PURCHASER/USER OF THE APPARATUS
1. Applicable standards and operating environment
The apparatus is compliant with:
standards EN55103-1 and EN550103-2 1996.and
electromagnetic environments E1, E2, E3, E4 and E5.
2. Pre-requisite conditions to achieving compliance with the above standards
<1> Peripheral equipment to be connected to the apparatus and special connecting cables
The purchaser/user is urged to use only equipment which has been recommended by us as peripheral
equipment to be connected to the apparatus.
The purchaser/user is urged to use only the connecting cables described below.
<2> For the connecting cables, use shielded cables which suit the intended purpose of the apparatus.
Video signal connecting cables
Use double shielded coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, for SDI
(Serial Digital Interface).
Coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, are recommended for analog
video signals.
Audio signal connecting cables
If your apparatus supports AES/EBU serial digital audio signals, use cables designed for AES/EBU.
Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency transmission applications, for analog
audio signals.
Other connecting cables (IEEE1394, USB)
Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency applications, as connecting cables.
If your apparatus is supplied with ferrite core(s), they must be attached on cable(s) following instructions in this
manual.
3. Performance level
The performance level of the apparatus is equivalent to or better than the performance level required by these
standards.
However, the apparatus may be adversely affected by interference if it is being used in an EMC environment, such as an
area where strong electromagnetic fields are generated (by the presence of signal transmission towers, cellular phones,
etc.). In order to minimize the adverse effects of the interference on the apparatus in cases like this, it is recommended
that the following steps be taken with the apparatus being affected and with its operating environment:
1. Place the apparatus at a distance from the source of the interference.
2. Change the direction of the apparatus.
3. Change the connection method used for the apparatus.
4. Connect the apparatus to another power outlet where the power is not shared by any other appliances.
4
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 5 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Contents
Read this first! .......................................................................................... 2
General
Features of Camera unit .......................................................................... 9
Features of Recorder/Player unit ........................................................... 10
Features of the Input/Output unit ........................................................... 12
Other features ........................................................................................ 12
Dimensions drawing............................................................................... 13
Color TV Standard Settings (Settings for frame frequency)................... 14
System Configuration ............................................................................ 15
Parts and their Functions
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section ................................... 16
Audio (input) Function Section............................................................... 17
Audio (output) Function Section ............................................................ 18
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section ........................... 19
Menu Operation Section ........................................................................ 24
Time Code Section ................................................................................ 25
Warning and Status Display Functions .................................................. 26
Display Window Functions..................................................................... 27
LCD Monitor........................................................................................... 28
Viewfinder .............................................................................................. 29
Recording and Playback
P2 Cards ................................................................................................ 31
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards............................................. 33
Basic Procedures................................................................................... 34
Normal Recording .................................................................................. 36
PRE RECORDING function ................................................................... 37
Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function ................................... 38
Loop Recording ..................................................................................... 43
Interval Recording.................................................................................. 44
Recording Review Function ................................................................... 46
Normal and Variable Speed Playback.................................................... 47
Text Memo Function .............................................................................. 47
Shot Mark Function................................................................................ 48
Recording Setting and Operation Mode................................................. 48
Adjustments and Settings for
Recording
Multi Format ........................................................................................... 49
5
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 6 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance.................................... 52
Setting the Electronic Shutter ................................................................ 56
Assigning Functions to User Buttons ..................................................... 59
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels............. 61
Setting Time Data .................................................................................. 63
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays ........................................................ 76
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor .................................................. 88
Selection of video output signals ........................................................... 89
Handling data......................................................................................... 91
Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)........................................ 105
Cinematograph Settings ...................................................................... 109
RGB 4:4:4 Output and P-10LOG Settings ............................................ 112
Preparation
Power Supply........................................................................................ 113
Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and
White Shading Adjustments.................................................................. 117
Preparing for Audio Input ..................................................................... 120
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod ....................................................... 121
Attaching the Shoulder Strap ............................................................... 122
Attaching the Rain Cover ..................................................................... 122
Connection of the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G) ............................. 123
Attaching the Front Audio Level Control Knob..................................... 124
Connection of the DC OUT connector and
External REC start/stop switch ............................................................ 125
Manipulating Clips with
Thumbnails
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview ..................................................... 126
Thumbnail Screen................................................................................ 127
Selecting Thumbnails........................................................................... 129
Playing back Clips................................................................................ 129
Switching the Thumbnail Display ......................................................... 130
Shot Mark............................................................................................. 132
Text Memo ........................................................................................... 132
Deleting Clips....................................................................................... 134
Restoring Clips..................................................................................... 135
Reconnection of Incomplete Clips ....................................................... 135
Copying Clips....................................................................................... 136
Setting of Clip Meta Data ..................................................................... 137
Setting of Proxy (optional).................................................................... 140
6
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 7 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Formatting a P2 Card .......................................................................... 140
Formatting SD memory cards .............................................................. 141
Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode ................................................... 142
Properties ............................................................................................ 143
Connection with external
device
Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port ................... 147
Maintenance and Inspections
Inspections Before Shooting ................................................................ 153
Maintenance ........................................................................................ 155
Warning System................................................................................... 160
Menu
Menu Configuration ............................................................................. 166
Menu Description Tables...................................................................... 170
Updating the firmware incorporated into the unit................................................................. 207
Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 208
P2HD 5 Year Warranty Repair Program*1
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic P2HD device.
Register as a user for this device to receive a special service warranty up to five years of free warranty repairs.
Customers who register as users on the website will receive an extended warranty repair valid for up to
five years.
1st year
P2HD device*2
2nd year
Basic warranty*3
3rd year
4th year
5th year*5
Extended warranty repair*4
*1: Please note that this extended warranty is not available in some countries/regions. *2: Not all models eligible for extended warranty coverage.
*3: The basic warranty period may vary depending on the country/region. *4: Not all repair work is covered by this extended warranty.
*5: The maximum warranty period may be adjusted depending on the number of hours the device has been used.
Free 5 years of Warranty Repairs
Purchase
P2 product
Register online
within 1 month
“Registration Notice”
e-mail sent
Details about user registration and the extended warranty:
Make sure to save the “Registration Notice” e-mail
during the warranty period.
http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e
Please note, this is a site that is not maintained by Panasonic Canada Inc. The Panasonic Canada Inc. privacy policy does not apply and is not applicable in relation to any
information submitted. This link is provided to you for convenience.
7
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 8 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
General
Attention
Adjust the following 2 settings when using the unit for the first time.
Adjust the black-balance setting when using the unit for the first time. (Refer to page 55)
The unit is delivered from the factory with the color TV standard not yet specified. To revise the settings for frame
frequency according to the TV standard, refer to the procedures described on page 14.
This unit is a CCD camcorder with a camera unit equipped with 2.2 Megapixel 2/3 inch 3 CCD, and record/playback unit that
is compatible with the AVC-Intra100, AVC-Intra50, and DVCPRO HD compression formats, all in one body.
The unit supports the HD methods shown in the following table. The unit is equipped with Dual Link (RGB 4:4:4) output, P10LOG (Refer to page 112) output suitable for film production, 2D-CMS that will enhance the color rendering properties, and
variable frame rate function (VFR hereafter) that can range from 1 to 30 frames for 1080/59.94i / 1080/23.98PsF / 1080/
24PsF, and 1 to 25 frames for 1080/50i, etc., as a camcorder for production purposes.
For recording, the compression and recording methods are selectable among AVC-Intra100, AVC-Intra50, and DVCPRO HD.
Since minimal image deterioration occurs when recording with AVC-Intra100 compression in particular, high image quality can
be retained.
Supported formats
SYSTEM MODE
Shooting/Recording method
AVC-Intra100
AVC-Intra50
1080-59.94i
DVCPRO HD
VFR
Variable range of VFR
59.94i
29.97PN
23.98PN
Possible
1 - 30FRAME
59.94i
Possible
1 - 30FRAME
29.97P
23.98P
23.98PA
Not possible
–
1080-23.98PsF
AVC-Intra100
AVC-Intra50
23.98PN
Possible
1080-24PsF
AVC-Intra100
AVC-Intra50
24PN
Possible
1 - 24/25 - 30FRAME*
(Possible to switch from
menu)
AVC-Intra100
AVC-Intra50
50i
25PN
Possible
1 - 25FRAME
50i
Possible
1 - 25FRAME
25P
Not possible
–
1080-50i
DVCPRO HD
* There is a missing image in HD SDI signal for 25 to 30 frames.
For more details, refer to [Selecting a recording signal and method] (page 49) and [Recording formats and output connector
signal formats] (page 50).
8
General:
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 9 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Features of Camera unit
Multi-format
Various image formats are realized by switching the 2.2
Megapixel 2/3 inch 3 CCD between the interlace drive and
the progressive drive.
Chromatic Aberration Compensation function
Scan Reverse function
The Scan Reverse function, as standard configuration,
cancels the image inversion that occurs when a lens adapter
from Canon or Angenieux is used, and it can be switched
through the menu settings. (Refer to page 171)
Film-REC Gamma function
To facilitate acquisition of pictures with a film-like tone, the
unit is equipped with a film-like gamma function of the type
developed for the Varicam (AJ-HDC27 series). (Refer to
page 184)
2-disk 4-type configuration optical filters
The unit is equipped with CC filters for 3200 K, 4300 K,
5600 K, and 1/2 ND. The 5600 K CC filter setting, often
selected for shooting outdoors, and the 1/2 ND setting to
allow finer adjustments to the lens aperture are provided as
standard. (Refer to page 19)
14-bit A/D conversion digital signal processing
Analog video signals are processed into digital data by a 14bit A/D converter with sampling frequencies of 74 MHz. It is
possible to reproduce images that are more finely detailed.
DRS (Dynamic Range Stretcher) function
With this function, the dynamic range of high brightness
areas that may be skipped with white blanks in an ordinary
recording method can be expanded by compressing images
and maintaining the contrast. (Refer to page 59)
Focus assist function
The unit will display a marker to help with focusing when
shooting videos. This function provides a visual cue for
focusing. (Refer to page 59)
General
The unit is equipped with a function to correct the
magnification ratio chromatic aberration of lenses caused by
the fact that the refractive index in lenses varies with the
wavelength of light (hereinafter referred to as chromatic
aberration). By using this function, chromatic aberration
around the lens can be corrected and high definition images
can be obtained. However, a lens supporting chromatic
aberration compensation is must be used. (Refer to
page 105)
Lens file function
The unit has 64 lens files.
By using an SD memory card, 64 lens files can be stored.
(Refer to page 100)
Data management function
Within the unit, one user data file and 16 sets of scene file
data can be saved.
By using an SD memory card as the setup card, up to 8 sets
of setup data can be stored. (Refer to page 91)
Color bar
The unit employs the SMPTE color bar, Split color bar for
SNG (Satellite News Gathering) as well as the conventional
color bar, which is useful for adjusting the color monitor.
(Refer to page 193)
VFR
This unit has a VFR function which allows overcrank and
undercrank shooting. (Refer to page 38)
Monitor Gamma
When the gamma setting is set to “FILM-REC”, images with
FILM-REC gamma characteristics (Nega look images) are
output to the HD SDI A · B outputs, the monitor, the
viewfinder, the remote control unit and the LCD, and
recorded to the P2 card.
It is possible to convert the monitor output image, viewfinder
output image, remote control output image, and LCD output
image, out of different output images, to a higher contrast
image (POSI LOOK image) by operating this function.
P-10LOG
It is possible to select the image signal data format suitable
for workflow of film production DI (DIGITAL
INTERMEDIATE). Color rendering properties are enhanced
by the 2D-CMS (2 dimensional color management system).
It is valid against the output signals of the Dual Link (RGB
4:4:4).
But, it will not be reflected to a recording onto the P2 card.
Cinematographer settings
Only the menu items that are used often for a film production
are collected, and registered in USER MENU. Also, each
menu item is set to a value suitable for film production.
General: Features of Camera unit
9
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 10 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Features of Recorder/Player unit
Multiple Slots
The unit is equipped with 5 slots for P2 cards. Up to 5 cards
may be inserted in these slots for continuous recording.
They also provide new recording capabilities specific to
memory cards.
Hot-Swap recording
The Hot-Swap capability allows cards not in use to be
replaced without interrupting recording. This facilitates
continuous recording.
LOOP REC function
The unit can retain a certain amount of previously
recorded material by continuously loop-recording data into
a specified recording area.
INTERVAL REC/ONE SHOT REC function
The unit features interval recording at minimum one-frame
intervals. This function is particularly suited to shooting
science and nature programs. Frame-by-frame shooting is
simple with the one-shot recording function.
PRE RECORDING function
In standby status, the unit always stores video and sound
input to the camera for up to 8 seconds. This means that
the PRE RECORDING function, when turned on, records
the video and sound for a preceding duration preset by the
user. This feature recovers critical moments that you might
have missed.
Proxy recording (when AJ-YAX800G attached)
By installing the optional video encoder card (AJYAX800G), MPEG4 format video and real-time metadata
such as time code data can be recorded simultaneously
on the P2 card and the SD memory card, together with the
video and sound recorded by the camera. This function is
useful for confirmation or editing of clips. For more
information about the approximate duration for proxy
recording on SD memory cards, see [Approximate Proxy
Recording Time (optional) on SD memory cards]
(page 12). Please also see <Cautions in using SD
memory cards> (page 23)
Data protection
Data on P2 cards will not be lost due to overwriting unless
the files are deleted or the cards are initialized.
Recordings are written only to free space.
10
General: Features of Recorder/Player unit
AVC-Intra100/AVC-Intra50/DVCPRO HD
switchable
Recorded video is compressed through a component digital
recording method that uses a state-of-the-art compression
technology, and sound is recorded using the noncompression PCM recording method, which excels in such
areas as S/N ratio, frequency bands, waveform properties
and reproducibility of fine areas. These methods further
enhance the quality of images and sound.
It is also possible to select DVCPRO HD in addition to AVCIntra100/AVC-Intra50. The unit performs the in-frame
compression.
Note
When the clip is played back in the format not selected on
the menu, the picture may be disturbed until the format is
detected. This is not a failure.
4-channel Digital Audio Recording (all formats)
All formats except VFR native recording support 4-channel
digital audio recording.
Clip Thumbnailing
Automatic generation of thumbnails
The unit automatically generates a thumbnail for each
recording cut (clip). It is possible to make use of this on the
unit as well as for non-linear editing purposes, and after
uploading to a server.
Thumbnail display on the LCD monitor
The 3.5-inch color LCD side of the unit can provide a
multi-screen view of 12 clip thumbnails. Alternatively, the
LCD can provide a view of 6 enlarged thumbnails. You can
choose a desired clip to playback instantly.
Seamless playback of selected clips
You can select more than one clip from the thumbnail view
for continuous playback and output of seamless video.
Note
During continuous playback of clips in different
recording formats, seamless playback is not available.
Display of clip information
By selecting clips, information added to clips, such as the
recording time, text memo, shot marks and metadata can
be checked.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 11 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Text memos & Shot marks
Each clip can incorporate comments, in the form of text
memo added to the thumbnail associated with the time
code, together with shot marks which, for example, can help
you distinguish OK cuts from reject cuts.
Both text memos and shot marks can be added to selected
clips during and after a recording. This is helpful for editing
recorded video.
In addition, you can use the copy function for each text
memo block to take only the necessary portions out of a clip.
Support for Built-in Unislot Wireless Receive
The unit is designed to support an optional slot-in wireless
receiver. (Refer to pages 120 and 199) The unit also
supports 2-channel wireless receivers.
Recording Review Capability
This capability automatically plays back the last 2 to 10
seconds of recorded video, allowing you to quickly check the
recorded contents.
Built-in Time Code Generator/reader
A special-purpose subcode track can be used to record and
reproduce time code information.
Support for Metadata
The unit is capable of recording positional information
(latitudes, longitudes and altitudes), as UMID information
(metadata), from the GPS unit AJ-GPS910G (optional).
Names/titles can also be recorded, e.g. the camera person,
the reporter, or the program which was registered on the SD
memory card in advance. This information is also useful in
managing information on clips. Regarding SD memory
cards, please also see <Cautions in using SD memory
cards> (page 23).
Recording Time on P2 Cards: When one 32 GB card is used;
Image system
Recording method and Recording time
DVCPRO HD AVC-Intra100
AVC-Intra50
Approx.
32 min
Approx.
32 min
Approx.
64 min
1080/30PN /
25PN (Native)
–
Approx.
32 min
Approx.
64 min
1080/24PN
(Native)
–
Approx.
40 min
Approx.
80 min
1080/59.94i / 50i
General
Front-mounted Sound Level Control Mechanism
The unit features a front-mounted control for fine adjustment
of the sound recording level. This control is particularly
effective for adjusting the sound level when you are shooting
without a sound recordist. The control can be disabled.
(Refer to page 17)
Recording Time
Operation of the following P2 cards with the unit has been
verified:
AJ-P2C004HG (4 GB)
AJ-P2C008HG (8 GB)
AJ-P2C016RG (16 GB)
AJ-P2C032RG (32 GB)
AJ-P2C064AG (64 GB)
(The model numbers and capacities are accurate as of
November 2008 but may change to expand capacity.)
The AJ-P2C002SG (2 GB) is disabled.
Notes
The values for 8 GB and 16 GB P2 cards are 1/4 and 1/2
those of 32 GB cards shown above.
If the one-time continuous recording exceeds the duration
which is given in the table below when a P2 card with a
memory capacity of 8 GB or more is used in the unit, the
recording is automatically continued on a separate clip.
When performing thumbnail operations (such as display,
delete, repair or copy) for these kinds of clips using a P2
device, it is possible to perform the operations for the
entire recording as a single clip. However, with nonlinear
editing software or a PC, the recording may be displayed
as separate clips.
Recording method (except for
native)
DVCPRO HD
AVC-Intra100
AVC-Intra50
Continuous recording time
Approx. 5 min
Approx. 10 min
General: Features of Recorder/Player unit
11
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 12 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Approximate Proxy Recording Time (optional) on SD memory
cards
(Except for 24P native mode)
Card No.
(Card Capacity)
MPEG4 recording rate
(Reference values when Panasonic bland SD memory cards
or SDHC memory cards are used for continuous recording.
Actual recording time depends on the kind of scenes and the
number of clips.)
192 kbps
768 kbps
1500 kbps
RP-SDH256
(256 MB)
Approx.
2 h 17 min
Approx.
35 min
Approx.
19 min
RP-SDH512
RP-SDK512
(512 MB)
Approx.
4 h 27 min
Approx.
69 min
Approx.
38 min
RP-SDQ01G
RP-SDK01G
(1 GB)
For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards
not available in the operating instructions, visit the P2
Support Desk at the following Web site.
Approx.
8 h 56 min
Approx.
2 h 19 min
Approx.
77 min
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
RP-SDQ02G
RP-SDK02G
(2 GB)
Approx.
18 h 11 min
Approx.
4 h 44 min
Approx.
2 h 37 min
RP-SDV024G
(SDHC 4 GB)
Approx.
35 h 42 min
Approx.
9 h 18 min
Approx.
5 h 12 min
The values for 8 GB and 16 GB SDHC memory cards are
double and four times the values for the 4 GB card.
Features of the Input/Output unit
Independent 3 system HD SDI output provided
as standard configuration
HD SDI signals output from the HD SDI A · B connectors
and MON OUT connector are independent to each other.
HD SDI output includes embedded audio etc.
Dual Link compatible
The unit can be compatible to Dual Link using the HD SDI A
connector and the HD SDI B connector. Link A will be output
from the HD SDI A connector, and Link B from the HD SDI B
connector.
Recording to the P2 card will be YPBPR 4:2:2 signal, and
Dual Link signal format will be RGB 4:4:4.
Features USB 2.0 port (HOST/DEVICE)
By connecting with a PC via USB 2.0, a P2 card inserted in
the unit can be used as a bulk storage device.
Also, since this unit has a USB HOST capability, it is
possible to store P2 card data on an external hard disk
connected using USB 2.0, to view clips stored on the hard
disk and to write clips stored on the hard disk to the P2 card.
Down converter output provided as a standard
configuration
The MON OUT connector outputs down converter (analog
composite) signals.
Also, output signal from the MON OUT connector can be
switched between an HD SDI signal and a VBS signal.
Remote control connector
By connecting the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G), which is
available as an optional accessory, the unit can be controlled
remotely. (Refer to page 123)
Confirmation of return video signals
It is possible to confirm the return video signals (analog
HD Y signals) supplied to the GENLOCK IN connector of the
unit in the viewfinder to confirm programs.
Only video signals from the same record format can be
confirmed. Note also that the 23.98PsF and 24PsF signals
cannot be confirmed. (Refer to page 193)
DC OUT connector
The DC OUT connector of the unit produces 1.5 A of
electrical current.
By connecting an external switch to this connector, it is
possible to control recording start/stop.
Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting the LED to this
connector, it is useful for shooting video when fixing the
camera on a crane. (Refer to page 125)
Other features
Viewfinder connection
From the viewfinder connector of the unit, 1080/59.94i,
1080/50i signals are output.
Confirm images in multi formats by connecting the
viewfinder (AJ-HVF21G), which is available as an optional
accessory. (Refer to page 29)
12
General: Features of the Input/Output unit
User button
On the side panel of the unit, 5 user buttons (USER MAIN/
USER 1/USER 2/MARKER SELECT/TEXT MEMO) are
available.
Each user button can be assigned the on/off function for any
frequently used feature among the many features of the unit,
such as SLOT SEL and Y GET. (Refer to page 59)
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 13 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Dimensions drawing
Unit: mm (inch)
137 (5- 3 / 8 )
318 (12- 1 / 2)
270.5 (10- 5 / 8)
102 (4- 1 /16 )
209 (8- 1 / 4 )
General
General: Dimensions drawing
13
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 14 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Color TV Standard Settings
(Settings for frame frequency)
The unit is delivered with the color TV standard not yet specified. To revise the settings for frame frequency according to the
preferred standard, refer to the procedures described below.
1
2
After connecting the unit to the power supply and then
turning on the power, press the MENU button while
pressing the LIGHT button to open OPTION MENU.
Turn the jog dial button to move the cursor (arrow) to the
AREA SELECT item on the <AREA SETTING> screen
in OPTION MENU page, and then press the jog dial
button.


 
Notes
The settings are not saved unless AREA SET is executed
even if NTSC, NTSC (J), or PAL is selected in the AREA
SELECT.
When AREA SELECT is revised, the “„ AREA SET”
blinks.
When these items are set when the unit is used for the first
time, only the following 8 items are revised. When the
other settings of the unit are set in MAIN MENU, the menu
setting values for items other than the following 8 are ones
that were set at the factory.
Factory
settings
3
Select the area among NTSC, NTSC (J), and PAL. After
selecting the area by turning the jog dial button, press
the jog dial button.

 

4
Move the cursor (arrow) to „ AREA SET by turning the
jog dial button, and then press the jog dial button. The
following window appears.
6
14
NTSC(J)
PAL
SYSTEM
MODE
108059.94i
108059.94i
108059.94i
1080-50i
REC
FORMAT
AVC-I 100
/24PN
AVC-I 100
/24PN
AVC-I 100
/24PN
AVC-I 100
/25PN
FRAME
RATE
24FRAME
24FRAME
24FRAME
25FRAME
USR SW
F.RATE
24FRAME
24FRAME
24FRAME
25FRAME
REAR LINE
IN LVL
+4dB
+4dB
+4dB
0dB
AUDIO OUT
LVL
+4dB
+4dB
+4dB
0dB
HEADROOM 20dB
20dB
20dB
18dB
GUI metadata
American
language
English
indication
American
English
Japanese/
For Japan
American
English
LANGUAGE
Not
displayed
Not
displayed
ENGLISH Not
JAPANESE displayed
DATE
FORMAT*1
M-D-Y
M-D-Y
Y-M-D
D-M-Y
*1 Select THUMBNAIL SETUP DATE FORMAT from the
thumbnail menu. For details refer to [Setting the Thumbnail
Display Mode] (page 142).


 
5
NTSC
Move the arrow () to YES and press the jog dial
button. The settings selected in step 3 above are
reflected in FACTORY and CURRENT data.
Turn off the power supply once and then turn on it again.
General: Color TV Standard Settings (Settings for frame frequency)
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 15 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
System Configuration
Video encoder card:
AJ-YAX800G
Remote control cable:
AJ-C10050G
Unislot wireless microphone
receiver:
Sennheiser EK3041
DIONIC90/160
HYTRON50/140
PROPAC14, TRIMPAC14
Microphone holder:
AJ-MH800G
2-inch electronic HD view
finder:
AJ-HVF21G
Lens (Bayonet type):
Fujinon, Canon
GPS unit:
AJ-GPS910G
Tripod adapter:
SHAN-TM700
Rain cover:
SHAN-RC700
General
Stereo microphone:
AJ-MC900G
Remote control
unit:
AJ-RC10G
V mount type Battery
plate
ENDURA7/10
BP-GL65/95
NP-1 type Battery case
NP-L7
External DC power
supply
Memory Card
Camera-Recorder
AJ-HPX3700G
P2 Cards*:
AJ-P2C016RG
AJ-P2C032RG
AJ-P2C064AG
SD Memory cards*
Soft carrying case:
AJ-SC900
Hard carrying case:
AJ-HT901G
* For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the operating instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk at the
following Web site.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
Note
All of the devices and accessories other than the unit, which are shown in this system configuration, are optionally available.
To use these devices and accessories, refer to the respective operation manuals.
General: System Configuration
15
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 16 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Parts and their Functions
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section
5
11
16
6
7
6
2
9
8
10
1
4
3
15
1. POWER switch
Used to turn on/off the power.
2. Battery mount
A battery pack from Anton/Bauer is mounted here.
14
12
13
10. Lens mount cap
To remove the cap, raise the 9. Lens lever.
When the lens is not mounted, replace the cap.
11. Light cable clamp
Secures the light cable.
3. DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4P)
The unit is connected to an external DC power supply.
12. Lens cable/microphone cable clamp
This clamp secures the lens and microphone cables.
4. BREAKER switch
When an excessive amount of current is fed through the
unit, due to any abnormal event, the breaker
automatically turns off the power in order to protect the
device.
After the interior of the unit has been checked and/or
repaired, this button must be depressed. If there is no
unusual reaction, the unit can be powered-up.
5. GPS connector
This connects the optional GPS unit AJ-GPS910G.
6. Shoulder strap fittings
The shoulder strap is attached here.
7. Light shoe
A video light or similar accessory can be attached here.
8. Lens mount (bayonet 2/3-type)
The lens is attached here.
9. Lens lever
Lower this lever to lock the lens to the lens mount.
13. Tripod mount
When you want to mount unit on a tripod, the optional
tripod adapter (SHAN-TM700) is attached here.
14. LENS jack (12-pin)
The lens connection cord is connected here. For a
detailed description of your lens, see the relevant
manufacturer’s instruction manual.
15. DC OUT (DC power supply output) socket
This output socket is designed for 12 V DC. It provides a
maximum current of 1.5 A.
Connect an external switch to this socket to control
recording starts and stops or an LED for use as a tally
lamp. For more information, see [Connection of the DC
OUT connector and External REC start/stop switch]
(page 125).
Note
Make sure the total of current output from DC OUT,
REMOTE, VF, and LENS connector do not exceed 2.5
A.
16. Accessory mounting holes (handle)
Use these holes to mount accessories. These holes
should not be used for any other purpose.
16
Parts and their Functions: Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 17 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Audio (input) Function Section
13
12
14
11
10
3
7
6
1
1. MIC IN (microphone input) jack (XLR, 5-pin)
A microphone (optional) is connected here. Power can
be supplied via this jack to allow use of a phantom
microphone. Note that the FRONT MIC POWER menu
option must be set to “ON” when using a phantom
microphone.
These options are found in the <MIC/AUDIO2> screen
on the MAIN OPERATION page.
2. AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2
recording level adjustment) controls
With the 3. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch positioned
to [MAN], these controls can be used to adjust the
recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2.
Note that the controls are designed to be locked. For
adjustment, each control must be depressed while
turning.
3. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2
automatic/manual level adjustment selector)
switch
Use this switch to select recording level control mode for
audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO:
MAN:
Recording level automatically controlled.
Recording level manually controlled.
4. AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch
Use this switch to select the signals recorded through
audio channels 1 - 4.
FRONT: Signal from the microphone connected to the
1. MIC IN jack is recorded.
W.L. (WIRELESS):
Signal from the slot-in wireless receiver is
recorded.
REAR: Signal from the audio device connected to the
5. AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connector is recorded.
8
15
4
Parts and their Functions
2
5 9
5. AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio input channel 1 & 2)
connectors (XLR, 3-pin)
Audio devices or a microphone may be connected here.
6. LINE/MIC/+48V (line input/mic input/mic input
+48 V) selector switch
Used to select the audio signal input from the 5. AUDIO
IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
LINE:
MIC:
+48V:
Audio signal line-input from the audio device
is input.
Audio signal from a self-powered (active)
microphone is input. (Power for a phantom
microphone is not supplied to the microphone
from the unit.)
Audio signal from a passive microphone is
input. (Power for a phantom microphone is
supplied to the microphone from the unit.)
7. Wireless slot
A Unislot wireless receiver (optional) may be attached
here.
8. FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (audio recording level
adjustment) control
This control adjusts the recording levels for audio
channels 1 and 2.
However, when the 3. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch
is set to [AUTO], the level will adjust automatically and
the 2. AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 knob and this knob will
not be active.
The control can be enabled or disabled through the
menu options FRONT VR CH1 or FRONT VR CH2.
These options can be found in the <MIC/AUDIO1>
screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
Note
When you use stereo microphone (AJ-MC900G,
optional), set both CH1 and CH2 to [FRONT]. The
signal from L CH is recorded to CH1 and that from R CH
to CH2.
Parts and their Functions: Audio (input) Function Section
17
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 18 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Audio (output) Function Section
9. AUDIO OUT connector (XLR, 5-pin)
This connector outputs audio signals recorded on
Channels 1/2 or 3/4.
Output signals are selected with the 10. MONITOR
SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4 selector switch.
10. MONITOR SELECT (audio channel selection)
CH1/2 / CH3/4 selector switch
Use this switch to select the audio channel whose
signals are output to the speakers, earphones or AUDIO
OUT connector.
CH1/2:
CH3/4:
Signals on audio channels 1 and 2 are output.
Signals on audio channels 3 and 4 are output.
The channel indications on the display window and on
the audio level meter in the viewfinder are synchronized
with this selector switch.
11. MONITOR (audio selection) CH1/3 / ST / CH2/4
selector switch
Use this switch in combination with the MONITOR
SELECT switch to select the audio channels whose
signals are output to the speakers, earphones, or
AUDIO OUT connector.
CH1/3:
ST:
CH2/4:
MONITOR
switch
CH1/3
ST
CH2/4
Signal on audio channel 1 or 3 is output.
Stereo audio signals on audio channels 1 and
2 or audio channels 3 or 4 are output. The
stereo signals can be changed to mixed
signals using a menu option.
Signal on audio channel 2 or 4 is output.
MONITOR SELECT switch
CH1/2
CH3/4
Audio channel 1
Audio channel 3
Stereo signals from
audio channels
1 and 2*
Stereo signals from
audio channels
3 and 4*
Audio channel 2
Audio channel 4
* You can select between stereo and mixed signal types using
the menu option MONITOR SELECT. This menu option can
be found in the <MIC/AUDIO2> screen on the MAIN
OPERATION page.
12. MONITOR (volume) control
Used to control the volume of sound output from the
monitor speakers and earphones.
13. ALARM (warning alarm volume adjustment)
control
Used to control the volume of the warning sound
emitted from 14. Speakers or earphones connected to
the 15. PHONES jack.
If the control is minimized, no alarm is audible.
18
Parts and their Functions: Audio (output) Function Section
14. Speakers
The speakers output EE sound during recording, and
reproduced sound during playback.
The speakers emit an alarm sound when the warning
lamp blinks and/or the indicator activates.
When the 15. PHONES jack is connected with
earphones, sound from the speaker is automatically
muted.
15. PHONES (earphones) jack (mini jack)
This connector is designed for audio monitoring (stereo)
earphones. When earphones are connected, sound
from the speakers is automatically muted.
Both the front and rear connectors output the same
sound.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 19 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
Section
10 9 8
31
20 21 22 23
1
24
15
25
2
26
27
3
11
17
30
4
12
14
5
6
7
13
16
19
1. CC/ND FILTER (filter switching) controls
These are used to select the filter in accordance with the
subject’s brightness and color temperature.
CC FILTER knob (outside, large diameter)
A: 3200 K
B: 4300 K
C: 5600 K
D: 1/2 ND
ND FILTER knob (inside, small diameter)
1: CLEAR (transparent)
2: 1/4 ND
3: 1/16 ND
4: 1/64 ND
When D (1/2 ND) is selected on CC FILTER, it is
possible to select any of 1/2 ND to 1/128 ND in
combination with ND FILTER.
Shooting conditions
CC FILTER
ND FILTER
Sunrise, sunset, inside a
studio
A (3200 K)
1 (CLEAR)
Outdoors under a clear
sky
B (4300 K) or
C (5600 K)
2 (1/4 ND) or
3 (1/16 ND)
Outdoors under cloudy or
rainy skies
C (5600 K)
1 (CLEAR) or
2 (1/4 ND)
Snowscapes, high
mountains, seashores or
other perfectly clear
scenery
B (4300 K) or
C (5600 K)
3 (1/16 ND) or
4 (1/64 ND)
2. USER MAIN, USER 1 and USER 2 buttons
These buttons can be assigned user-selected functions,
using a menu option. Each button, when pressed,
performs the assigned function.
For more information, see [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] (page 59).
Parts and their Functions
33
32
18 29 28
3. SHUTTER switch
Used to enable or disable the electronic shutter.
OFF:
ON:
SEL:
Electronic shutter disabled.
Electronic shutter enabled.
Used to change the speed of the electronic
shutter.
This dial switch returns to its original position. Each turn
of the switch alters the shutter speed.
For more information, see [Setting the Electronic
Shutter] (page 56).
4. AUTO W/B (white/black) BAL switch
AWB:
ABB:
White balance is automatically adjusted.
When the WHITE BAL switch on the side is
positioned at [A] or [B], the adjusted value is
stored in the memory.
Note that when the WHITE BAL switch is
positioned at [PRST] this function does not
work.
Black balance is automatically adjusted.
Note
To stop automatic adjustment of the white or black
balance in progress, set the switch to either ([AWB] or
[ABB]).
If automatic adjustment is canceled, the value in effect
before automatic adjustment will be used.
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
19
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 20 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
5. GAIN selector switch
Use this switch to select video amplifier gain, according
to lighting conditions under which you are shooting.
The values for [L], [M], and [H] can be preset using
menu options.
These are factory-set to “0 dB” for [L], “3 dB” for [M], and
“6 dB” for [H].
6. OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch
Used to select the video signals sent from the camera
unit to the memory, viewfinder and video monitor.
CAM/AUTO KNEE ON:
Video being recorded through the camera is
sent with the auto knee circuit activated.
It is also possible to assign the DRS (Dynamic
Range Stretcher) function instead of the
AUTO KNEE function.
CAM/AUTO KNEE OFF:
Video being recorded through the camera is
sent in manual knee mode.
BARS: Color bar signal is output. The auto knee
circuit does not work.
You can select between 3 types of color bar
signal. For more information, see [SW MODE]
(page 193).
AUTO KNEE function
Usually, when you adjust levels to shoot people or scenery
against a strongly lit background, the background will be
totally whited-out, with buildings and other objects blurred.
In this case, the auto knee function reproduces the
background clearly. This function is effective when:
The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a
clear sky.
The subject is a person inside a car or building, and you
also want to capture the background visible through a
window.
The subject is a high-contrast scene.
7. WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector)
switch
Used to select the white balance adjustment method.
PRST:
A or B:
20
Use this when you have no time to adjust the
white balance.
The value for the white balance is factory-set
to 3200 K.
It can be changed to any color temperature
using a menu option. For more information,
see [Setting Color Temperature Manually]
(page 54).
Pressing the 4. AUTO W/B BAL switch toward
[AWB] automatically adjusts the white
balance, saving the adjusted value in memory
A or B. For more information, see [Adjusting
the White Balance] (page 52).
8. MODE CHECK button
Each press of this button changes the screen type in the
viewfinder in the following order: STATUS, !LED,
FUNCTION, AUDIO, CAC, USER SW.
This does not affect the signal output from the camera.
Display will disappear in about 5 seconds.
It will continue to display while pressing this button with
selected screen displayed.
9. MARKER SELECT button
This button selects the marker information indicated on
the viewfinder screen. It switches between two marker
information indications, which can be selected using a
menu option. Pressing this button once switches the
indicated marker information from A (Marker A) to B
(Marker B), and pressing again switches B to off (no
marker). When the power is turned on, the last selected
indication before power-down appears.
For more information, see [Marker Check Screen
Displays (MARKER SELECT button function)]
(page 87).
Also, with appropriate menu settings, the MARKER
SELECT button can be used as a USER 3 button. For
more information on user buttons, refer to [Assigning
Functions to User Buttons] (page 59).
10. SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment buttons
These buttons are enabled when the 3. SHUTTER
switch is positioned at [ON] and synchro scan is
selected.
They are used to adjust the speed of the synchro scan.
The – button decreases shutter speed; the + button
increases shutter speed.
If you shoot a PC monitor, for example, you should
adjust shutter speed so that the horizontal bars in the
viewfinder will produce less noise.
This button can be used for changing the frame rate
during the VFR.
11. REC START button
Pressing this button starts recording, pressing again
stops recording.
This button has the same function as the VTR button at
the lens.
12. SHOT MARKER/MENU CANCEL button
Pressing this button while recording adds a shot mark to
the thumbnail of that clip. This button also adds a shot
mark to any thumbnail selected on the LCD monitor.
For more information on shot marks, see [Shot Mark
Function] (page 48).
This button cancels the revised set value when the
menu is displayed.
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 21 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
10 9 8
31
20 21 22 23
33
32
1
24
15
25
26
27
3
11
17
30
4
12
14
5
6
7
13
16
19
13. TEXT MEMO button
16. MON OUT CHARACTER switch
Records a text memo if pressed during recording or
playback or when playback is paused.
Also, with appropriate menu settings, the TEXT MEMO
button can be used as a USER 4 button. For more
information on user buttons, refer to [Assigning
Functions to User Buttons] (page 59)
14. SAVE ON/OFF switch
Used to select the power supply method for each output
section.
ON:
OFF:
18 29 28
The output selected through the menu option
SAVE SW is power-saved. This option can be
found on the <OPTION MODE> screen on the
SYSTEM SETTING page.
Power saving is canceled.
Note
The ON/OFF switch does not function during recording.
The ON/OFF status changes after recording is
completed.
15. HD SDI A · B (output signal selector) switch
Changes the mode of the signals output through the HD
SDI A · B connector.
MEM:
Video from the camera is output during
recording and when recording is paused.
Playback signals are output from the P2 card
during playback.
CAM:
Video from the camera is output constantly.
OFF:
Video is not output, and the unit operates in
power-saving mode.
This switch controls the superimposition of characters
onto the video output from the MON OUT connector.
ON:
OFF:
Parts and their Functions
2
Characters are superimposed.
Characters are not superimposed.
For types of characters, see [Settings of signals output
from MON OUT connector] (page 90).
17. HD SDI A connector
This connector is for outputting video. A video signal
based on the setting of the 15. HD SDI A · B switch is
output. LinK A signal is output while in Dual Link output.
Note
Camera image is output from the HD SDI A connector
even during playback while in Dual Link (RGB 4:4:4)
output.
18. MON OUT (monitor output) connector
The MON OUT connector is used for outputting video
for the monitor. The output signal can be switched
between a down-converted (analog composite) signal
and an HD SDI signal. This connector outputs video
based on the setting of the 19. MON OUT SEL (output
signal selection) switch. Through an internal menu
option, the characters can be superimposed
independently of the HD SDI A · B connector. For more
information, refer to [Settings of signals output from
MON OUT connector] (page 90).
Note that the audio output is synchronized with the
video.
For types of video outputs, refer to [Settings of signals
output from HD SDI A · B connector] (page 89) and
[Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector]
(page 90).
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
21
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 22 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
19. MON OUT SEL (output signal selection) switch
Used to switch the signals output from the MON OUT
connector.
MEM:
CAM:
OFF:
Video from the camera is output during
recording or when recording is paused or
playback signals are output from the P2 card
during playback.
Video from the camera is output constantly.
Video is not output, and the unit operates in
power-saving mode.
Note that the audio output is synchronized with the
video.
For types of video outputs, see [Settings of signals
output from HD SDI A · B connector] (page 89) or
[Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector]
(page 90).
Notes
During recording, this switch does not switch output
signals before stopping the recording operation.
Only a brightness signal is output in 1080/24PsF
when MONITOR OUT is set to “VBS”. MONITOR
OUT can be selected from the screen <OUTPUT
SEL> in the SYSTEM SETTING page.
20. REW (rewind) button and lamp
During stop, this button performs a fast-reverse
playback with the lamp lights on.
During playback, it performs an approximately 4 fastreverse playback with the PLAY and REW lamps lights
on.
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the
start of the clip being played back is located in pause
mode.
21. STOP button
This button stops playback.
22. FF (fast forward) button and lamp
During stop, this button is used to perform fast playback
with the lamp lights on.
During playback, it performs an approximately 4 fast
playback with the PLAY and FF lamps lights on.
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the
start of the next clip is located in pause mode.
23. PLAY/PAUSE button
This button is used to view playback using the
viewfinder screen or a color video monitor. The lamp
comes on when playback starts.
In playback mode, this button pauses (PLAY/PAUSE)
playback with the lamp blinking.
22
24. P2 card access LED
This LED indicates the recording and playback status of
each card.
25. Slide lock button
Used to open the slide-out door for inserting P2 cards.
While depressing this button, slide the door to the left.
26. USB 2.0 connector (DEVICE)
27. USB 2.0 connector (HOST)
A USB 2.0 cable is connected here.
When the menu option PC MODE is set to “ON”, data
can be transferred via USB 2.0. During such data
transfer, recording, playback or operations of clips is
limited.
The menu option PC MODE is found in the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page. For
more information, see [Connection with external devices
using the USB 2.0 port] (page 147).
28. GENLOCK IN connector
Used to input an HD Y signal when GENLOCKing the
camera or externally locking the time code. Alternatively,
a composite signal can be input as the reference signal.
Note that the subcarriers for the down-converter
(composite signal) output from the unit cannot be
externally locked.
Note
When HD Y signal is input and the menu option RET
SW is set to “CAM RET”, you can check return video on
the viewfinder screen. The menu option RET SW can be
found in the <SW MODE> screen on the CAM
OPERATION page.
29. HD SDI B connector
This connector is for outputting video. A video signal
based on the setting of the 15. HD SDI A · B switch is
output. LinK B signal is output while in Dual Link output.
Note
Camera image is output from the HD SDI B connector
even during playback while in Dual Link (RGB 4:4:4)
output.
30. REMOTE (remote control) connector
The remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional) is
connected here.
31. Option slot
Attach the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional).
For information about the installation and proxy
recording, see the AJ-YAX800G instruction manual.
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 23 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
32. SD memory card insertion slot
An SD memory card (optional) is inserted here. SD
memory cards are used for recording and accessing the
menu settings of cameras and the lens files, uploading
metadata, and proxy recording (optional).
SD memory card
8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB,
128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB,
2 GB
SDHC memory card
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
Parts and their Functions
<Cautions in using SD memory cards>
Use the unit by inserting an SD memory card that is
compliant with the SD standard or the SDHC standard.
MultiMediaCards cannot be used. (Bear in mind that
recording may no longer be possible if you do use
them.)
If you intend to use miniSD cards in unit, always install
the adapter specially designed for miniSD cards. (The
unit will not work properly if only the miniSD card
adapter is installed. Make sure that the card has been
installed in the adapter before using it.)
Use of Panasonic’s SD memory cards and miniSD
cards is recommended. Be sure to format cards using
unit.
Any SD memory card and SDHC memory card with the
following capacities can be used with the unit.
To record proxy (optional), use an SD memory card with
a capacity of 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, or 2 GB labeled
“High Speed” or use an SDHC memory card.
For the latest information not available in the operating
instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk at the following
Web site.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
The SDHC card conforms to a new standard for memory
cards with a large capacity of more than 2 GB which
was established by the SD Association in 2006.
The SD card logo is a registered trademark.
MMC (MultiMediaCard) is a registered trademark of
Infineon Technologies AG.
33. Busy (operation mode display) lamp
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory
card.
It stays illuminated when the card is active.
Note
While the lamp is on, do not insert or remove the card.
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
23
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 24 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Menu Operation Section
1. MENU button
Used to turn on/off the menu.
2. SELECT (Jog dial) button
With the menu open, this button is used to navigate
through menu pages, select options and specify values.
For directions on manipulating the menu, see [Menu
Configuration] (page 166).
4
3
3. SD memory card insertion slot
5
4. Busy (operation mode display) lamp
An SD memory card (optional) is inserted here. It is
used when writing or saving menu data or lens files on
an SD memory card.
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory
card.
It stays illuminated when the card is active.
2
1
Note
While the lamp is on, do not insert or remove the card.
5. SHOT MARKER/MENU CANCEL button
Undoes any changes to the menu option settings if
pressed during the changes.
24
Parts and their Functions: Menu Operation Section
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 25 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Time Code Section
4
5
6
1
3
2
1. GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)
This connector is used to input a reference signal before
the camera unit is gen-locked, or before the time code is
externally locked.
2. TC IN connector (BNC)
This connector is used to input a reference time code
when you externally lock the time code.
3. TC OUT connector (BNC)
When you inter-lock the time code of unit with that of an
external device this must be connected with the time
code input (TC IN) connector of the external device.
Note
The time code must be input in the same format as the
system mode of the unit.
4. HOLD button
Pressing this button freezes the time data indication on
the counter. Note that time code generation continues.
Pressing the button again reactivates the counter.
This function is used to ascertain the time code or CTL
count of a particular recorded scene.
5. RESET button
This button resets the time data (CTL) on the counter to
“00:00:00:00”.
If this button is pressed when with the 7. TCG switch
positioned at [SET], time code and user bits data are
reset to 0, and real-time data is reset to the initial value.
Parts and their Functions
7
8
6. DISPLAY (counter display selector) switch
Indications of the time code, CTL and user bits on the
counter of the display window depend on the positions
of this switch and the 7. TCG switch.
Pressing the 4. HOLD button also displays Date/Time/
Time Zone.
UB:
User bits, DATE, TIME or Time zone
indicated.
Time code indicated.
CTL indicated.
TC:
CTL:
7. TCG (time code selector) switch
This switch is used to specify the stepping mode for the
built-in time code generator.
F-RUN: Select this position to continuously advance
the time code independently of the P2 card
recording status.
Use this mode to synchronize the time code
with the time of day, or to externally lock the
time code.
SET:
Select this position to set the time code and/or
user bits.
R-RUN: Select this position to advance the time code
only during recording.
For spliced scenes recorded on P2 cards, the
sequence of time codes is unbroken.
Note
When VFR is used during native recording, VFR is
carried out with fixed R-RUN even when F-RUN has
been set.
8. Cursor and SET buttons
Use these buttons to set the time code and user bits.
The 4 triangular buttons are the cursor buttons, and the
center rectangular one is the SET button.
For guidance in setting the time code and user bits, see
[Setting Time Data] (page 63).
Parts and their Functions: Time Code Section
25
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 26 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Warning and Status Display Functions
7. Display window
This window displays warnings, battery-remaining level,
sound volume, time data, and other information.
1
2
Note
6
7
When the battery is installed, the unit indicates the data
even if the power is turned off. To turn off the data
indications to keep the battery from being discharged,
specify “OFF” for the menu option P. OFF LCD
DISPLAY found in the <TC/UB> screen on the MAIN
OPERATION page.
3
4
5
8. Rear tally lamp
When the 2. BACK TALLY switch is set on [ON], the rear
tally lamp behaves in the same way as the back tally
lamp.
8
1. Back tally lamp
When the 2. BACK TALLY switch is set to [ON], the
lamp behaves in the same way as the front tally lamp at
the viewfinder.
2. BACK TALLY switch
This switch controls the action of the 1. Back and
8. Rear tally lamps.
ON:
OFF:
Back and rear tally lamps enabled.
Back and rear tally lamps disabled.
3. WARNING lamp
This lamp starts blinking or lights up if something
unusual occurs in the memory.
4. USB lamp
Stays on when the unit is in USB mode.
5. ACCESS lamp
Blinks when the unit is in recording or playback mode or
when a P2 card is being accessed, or stays on when a
recordable P2 card is inserted.
6. LIGHT button
Use this button to control illumination of the display
window.
Alternately pressing this button toggles illumination of
the 7. Display window on or off.
26
Parts and their Functions: Warning and Status Display Functions
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 27 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Display Window Functions
P2 card/battery-remaining level and audio level
indications
f
NDF SLAVE HOLD HD GPS
CTL VTCG TIME DATE P-iREC
OVER
OVER
0
g
10
NDF SLAVE HOLD HD GPS
CTL VTCG TIME DATE P-iREC
OVER
OVER
0
h Y
10
a
b
MEDIA
BATT
minM
s D
frm
c
20
E
F
E
F
30
40
OO
LOOP
13
OP-SLOT
-dB
24
a. Media-remaining space indication bar
The bar indicates the remaining free space on each P2 card,
using a 7-segment display.
Each segment can represent either 3 or 5 minutes of remaining
free space, depending on the value set through the menu option
CARD REMAIN/„. According to the set value, the segments
disappear one-by-one. The menu option CARD REMAIN/„ can
be found in the <BATTERY/P2CARD> screen on the MAIN
OPERATION page.
b. Battery-remaining level indication bar
For a battery with a digital indicator (percentage indication), if the
remaining level of the battery is higher than 70%, all 7 segments
up to the “F” position are lit.
When the remaining level falls below 70%, the segments go out
one-by-one for each drop of 10%. All 7 segments can be set to
light up when the battery-remaining balance is 100%. To do so
select “100%” for the menu option BATT REMAIN FULL in the
<BATTERY/P2CARD> screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.
c. Audio channel level meter
When the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4 switch is set to
[CH1/2], the meter indicates 1 and 2 as the audio channel
numbers, together with their audio levels. When the switch is set
to [CH3/4], the meter indicates 3 and 4 as the audio channel
numbers, together with their audio levels.
Memory action status indication
NDF SLAVE HOLD HD GPS
CTL VTCG TIME DATE P-iREC
OVER
OVER
0
10
d
h Y
MEDIA
BATT
minM
s D
frm
20
E
F
E
F
30
40
OO
e
LOOP
OP-SLOT
13
-dB
24
d. Error Code Indication (for more information, see [Warning
System] (page 160))
e. Information indication
LOOP:
Stays illuminated in LOOP REC mode. For
information about the LOOP REC mode, see [Loop
Recording] (page 43).
OP-SLOT: Remains illuminated when a video encoder card is
operated in the optional slot.
s D
frm
20
F
E
F
30
40
OO
LOOP
OP-SLOT
13
-dB
24
f. Mode indication
HD:
Stays illuminated when the unit is in HD mode.
GPS:
Stays illuminated when radio waves are not received
during GPS operation.
GPS :
Stays illuminated when radio waves are received
during GPS operation.
P-REC:
Stays illuminated when the PRE REC MODE is set to
“ON”, and blinks when recording is continued after
the recording tally lamp has gone out.
iREC:
Remains illuminated during INTERVAL REC mode
recording, and blinks during a pause.
i:
Blinks when INTERVAL REC mode is selected.
Parts and their Functions
h Y
MEDIA
BATT
minM
E
g. Time code indication
NDF:
Stays illuminated when the time code is in non-drop
frame mode.
DF:
Stays illuminated when the time code is in drop frame
mode.
SLAVE:
Stays illuminated when the time code is externally
locked.
HOLD:
Stays illuminated when the time code generator/
reader value is frozen.
CTL:
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is
positioned at [CTL] to display the CTL count.
TCG:
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is
positioned at [TC] (or [UB]) to display the TC (or UB)
generator value.
TC:
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is
positioned at [TC] (or [UB]) to display the TC (or UB)
reader value.
VTCG:
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is
positioned at [UB] to display the VIUB generator
value.
VTC:
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is
positioned at [UB] to display the VIUB reader value.
TIME:
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is
positioned at [UB] to display the real-time hour,
minute and second.
DATE:
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is
positioned at [UB] to display the real-time date.
No Indication:
The VTCG, TIME, and DATE stay off when the
DISPLAY switch is positioned at [UB] to display real
time, time zone, hour and minute.
Time count indication:
The time code, user bits, CTL and real time are
shown.
Note
When the DISPLAY switch is positioned at [UB], each press of the
HOLD button changes the indication through VTCG (VTC) DATE
TIME No Indication (Time Zone) TCG (TC), in that order.
Parts and their Functions: Display Window Functions
27
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 28 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Positions of time code-related switches and
information provided
Position of
DISPLAY switch
CTL
Position of TCG
switch
Information Item
SET
Time code
F-RUN or R-RUN
TC
CTL
Time code
F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN
UB
User bits or realtime, time zone
LCD Monitor
5. Cursor and SET buttons
The 4 triangular buttons are the cursor buttons, and the
center rectangular one is the SET button.
They are used to select a thumbnail and manipulate the
thumbnail menu. For more information, see [Manipulating
Clips with Thumbnails] (page 126).
1
6. EXIT button
Used to return the display to the previous state when the
thumbnail menu or the property screen is displayed.
2
3
6
5
4
1. LCD monitor
The LCD monitor displays the video in the viewfinder.
Alternatively, it can show clips on the P2 card in a
thumbnail format.
In thumbnail display mode, clips can be edited or
deleted, or P2 cards can be formatted using the
4. THUMBNAIL MENU button and 5. Cursor and SET
buttons.
2. OPEN button
Used to open the LCD monitor.
3. THUMBNAIL button
This button switches the content on the 1. LCD monitor
from the video in the viewfinder to clip thumbnails.
Another press switches them back to the video from the
viewfinder.
Note that this switchover is not performed during a
recording or playback.
4. MENU (THUMBNAIL MENU) button
In thumbnail display mode, this button allows you to
manipulate the thumbnail menu (e.g., to delete clips).
28
Parts and their Functions: LCD Monitor
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 29 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Viewfinder
You can use the following viewfinder (optional) on the unit:
HD Viewfinder: AJ-HVF21G (selectable between 59.94 and 50 Hz)
13
7. Front tally lamp
14 11 7
9
10
1
8. Back tally lamp
8
4 5 2
3
6
1. Viewfinder (optional)
During recording or playback, the viewfinder displays
the video image in monochrome. It also displays
warnings, messages, zebra patterns, markers (safety
zone and center markers), etc.
2. ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
This switch is used to display the zebra pattern in the
viewfinder.
ON:
OFF:
Zebra pattern displayed.
No zebra pattern displayed.
3. TALLY switch
Used to control the 7. Front tally lamp.
HIGH:
OFF:
LOW:
Front tally lamp brightly illuminated.
Front tally lamp stays off.
Front tally lamp dimly illuminated.
4. PEAKING control
Used to adjust the outlines of the video image in the
viewfinder for easier focusing. This does not affect the
signal output from the camera.
5. CONTRAST control
Used to adjust the contrast of the video image in the
viewfinder. This does not affect the signal output from
the camera.
This lamp stays illuminated during shooting. It also
blinks in synchronization with the REC lamp in the
viewfinder, and provides alerts.
When the lever is positioned at [OFF], the back tally
lamp is hidden.
9. Eyepiece
Parts and their Functions
12
This lamp is activated when the 3. TALLY switch is
positioned at [HIGH] or [LOW], and stays on during
recording. It also blinks in synchronization with the REC
lamp in the viewfinder, and provides alerts.
Use the TALLY switch to change the intensity of the
lamp to ([HIGH] or [LOW]).
Note
Do not leave the eyepiece aimed at the sun. Doing so
may damage the internal components.
10. Diopter adjustment ring
Use this to make adjustments in line with your diopter, in
order to obtain optimum clarity in the viewfinder image.
The adjustable range of the viewfinder view angle is
shown in the following table.
Product Number
AJ-HVF21G
Adjustable range
–0.9 D to –4.4 D
For an eyepiece for presbyopia, consult the dealer.
11. Connecting plug
12. Locking ring
13. Microphone holder
14. Viewfinder stopper
Used to attach or remove the viewfinder.
6. BRIGHT control
Used to adjust the brightness of the video image in the
viewfinder. This does not affect the signal output from
the camera.
Parts and their Functions: Viewfinder
29
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 30 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
16
15
15. Viewfinder left-right position anchoring ring
Used to adjust the side-to-side position of the
viewfinder.
16. Viewfinder front-back position anchoring lever
Used to adjust the fore-and-aft position of the
viewfinder.
Note
For more information, see the instruction manual for the
viewfinder.
If, when fitting a large lens, there is insufficient space
between the top of the lens and the bottom of the viewfinder,
the positions of the slide rails can be shifted upwards slightly
by repositioning the screws.
a
b
a. Conventional screw positions
b. Reposition and fix 3 screws here to raise the slide rail by
approximately 8 mm.
30
Parts and their Functions: Viewfinder
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 31 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Recording and Playback
P2 Cards
3
Inserting P2 Cards
Insert a P2 card into the P2 card slot until the eject
button pops up.
Note
When using the unit for the first time, be sure to set the time
data beforehand. On how the time data is set, see [Setting
Time Data] (page 63).
d
Turn on the POWER switch.
e
Recording and Playback
1
d. Eject button
e. The card must be inserted with the logo right way up.
4
a
Tilt up the popped-up eject button.
a. POWER: [ON]
2
f
While pressing down the slide lock button, slide the
slide-out door to the left.
The door opens.
b
f. P2 card access LED
5
c
b. Slide lock button
c. Slide-out door
6
The P2 card access LED indicates the status of P2 card
in the slot.
For how the P2 card status is indicated, see [P2 card
access LED and status of P2 cards] (page 32).
Close the slide-out door.
Note
Do not leave the slide-out door open when moving unit.
Recording and Playback: P2 Cards
31
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 32 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Removing P2 Cards
1
2
3
While pressing down the slide lock button, move the
slide-out door to the left.
The door opens.
Tilt down the eject button.
Then, depress the eject button to release the P2 card so
that you can remove it.
<For Your Information>
The P2 card access LEDs may be set to stay off using the
menu option ACCESS LED. This option can be found on the
<OPTION MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of P2 Card
Content
To prevent the content of a P2 card being accidentally
erased, position the write-protect switch on the P2 card at
[Protect].
Note
Write-protect switchover can be performed while the card is
being accessed (during recording or playback), but does not
take effect until access to the card ceases.
a
Protect
1
2
Tilt down the eject button.
Depress the tilted-down eject button to release the P2
card.
Notes
Do not remove the P2 card while it is being accessed or
recognized (the P2 card access LED flashes orange), or
the P2 card may fail. When the unit is set to keep the P2
card access LEDs turned off, stop the recording/playback
and ensure that the PRE RECORDING is complete before
removing the P2 card.
If a P2 card being accessed is removed, the viewfinder
displays “TURN POWER OFF” and unit gives a warning
using an alarm and the WARNING lamp. In addition, all P2
card access LEDs blink rapidly in orange. If this is the
case, turn the power off. For more information on warning
indications, see [Warning System] (page 160).
If a P2 card is removed while being accessed, clips on it
may become irregular. Check the clips and restore them if
required. For more information about how to restore clips,
see [Restoring Clips] (page 135).
If a P2 card being formatted is removed, it may be not be
formatted properly. In this case, the viewfinder displays
“TURN POWER OFF”. If this message appears, turn off
the power, then restart unit to reformat the card.
If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being
played back, the inserted P2 card is not recognized and
the P2 card access LED for that card does not come on.
Card recognition starts when the playback ends.
Even if a P2 card is inserted in a vacant slot while
recording, the media may not be recognized during the
following times:
– Immediately after pre-recording
– Immediately before or after switching from the first P2
card for recording to the second one, when data are
recorded on multiple cards spanning from one to the
other (hot-swap recording)
32
Recording and Playback: P2 Cards
a. Write-protect switch
P2 card access LED and status of P2 cards
P2 card access
LED
MODE CHECK
indication*
Status of P2 Card
Stays on in
green
ACTIVE
Writing and reading
enabled.
Stays on in
orange
ACTIVE
Writing and reading
enabled. The card is the
current target card for
recording (including LOOP
REC).
Blinks in orange
ACCESSING
Writing or reading being
performed.
Blinks rapidly in
orange
INFO READING
Recognizing the P2 card.
Blinks slowly in
green
FULL
The P2 card has no free
space. Only reading is
enabled.
PROTECTED
The write-protect switch on
the P2 card is positioned at
[Protect]. Only reading is
enabled.
NOT
SUPPORTED
The card is not supported
by your unit. Replace the
card.
FORMAT
ERROR
The P2 card is not properly
formatted. Reformat the
card.
NO CARD
No P2 card is inserted.
Stays off
* The mode check indication is shown in the viewfinder. For more
information, see [Viewfinder Status Indication Layout] (page 77).
The access LED located on the display window blinks when
reading or writing data from or to any of the P2 cards
inserted in slots 1 - 5 or stays illuminated when any of the
cards are recordable. It stays off when none of the P2 cards
are recordable.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 33 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards
The P2 card is a semiconductor memory card that is used as the recording medium in the professional video production and
broadcasting devices that make up the DVCPRO P2 Series.
Since data recorded in the DVCPRO P2 format or AVCIntra are in a file format, they have excellent compatibility
with PCs. The file structure is a unique format, which in
addition to video and audio data in MXF files contains
various other important information items. The folder
structure links the data as shown on the right.
CONTENTS
AUDIO
CLIP
ICON
PROXY
VIDEO
VOICE
All these folders are required.
* This is the file in which the
information on the final clip
that was recorded with the P2
device is written.
LASTCLIP.TXT*
When transferring data from a P2 card to a PC, or when rewriting data saved on a PC to a P2 card, to prevent data loss be
sure to use the special P2 Viewer software. Download it from the following website.
(Compatible with the Windows Vista, Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems.)
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
Recording and Playback
Changing or deleting just one information component
could make it impossible to recognize the data as P2 data
or use the card in a P2 device.
Device:\
When using regular IT tools such as Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer data to a PC, follow the
instructions below. However, be sure to use the P2 Viewer when returning data to a P2 card.
– Transfer the corresponding CONTENTS folder and LASTCLIP.TXT file together as a set.
Do not transfer individual files from the CONTENTS folder.
When copying, copy the LASTCLIP.TXT file at the same time as the CONTENTS folder.
– When transferring multiple P2 cards to a PC, create a folder for each P2 card to prevent clips with the same name from
being overwritten.
– Do not delete data from the P2 card.
– When formatting a P2 card, be sure to use a P2 device or the P2 Viewer.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.
Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple, Inc., in the USA and other countries.
Recording and Playback: How to handle data recorded on P2 cards
33
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 34 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Basic Procedures
This section describes the basic procedure for shooting and
recording. Before you embark on a shoot, pre-inspect your
system to ensure that it works properly.
* For directions on inspecting your unit, see [Inspections Before
Shooting] (page 153).
Battery Set-up to P2 card Insertion
1
2
3
Note
When “SLOT1” is selected for the menu option P.ON REC
SLOT SEL, recording starts from the P2 card inserted in the
smallest slot number, after the power is turned on.
This option is found in the <REC FUNCTION> screen on the
SYSTEM SETTING page.
Switch Setting
Insert a charged battery pack.
Turn on the POWER switch and ensure that more than
5 segments of the battery-remaining amount indication
bar are illuminated.
If the number of illuminated segments is fewer than 5,
first check the battery setting. If setting is not the
problem, replace the battery with a fully charged one.
When a battery and P2 cards are installed, set the switches
as detailed below, before starting to use your unit.
Setting the switches before shooting and recording
a
Insert a P2 card and ensure that the P2 card access
LED stays on in orange or green. Then, close the slideout door.
When more than one P2 card slot contains a P2 card,
the card in the slot with the lowest number is used first.
However, regardless of slot number, a P2 card inserted
later will not be accessed until the other cards have
been used.
Example:
If all 5 slots contain P2 cards, the cards are used in
order of slot numbers 12345. However, if the P2
card in slot 1 is removed and then re-inserted, the cards
will be used in the following order: 23451.
2
e
d
c
a. USER MAIN:
b.
c.
d.
e.
2
This switch is factory-set to switch the VFR
function on/off.
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2:
[AUTO]
GAIN:
Normally, this should be set to “0 dB”. If
conditions are too dark, an appropriate gain level
should be set.
OUTPUT:
[CAM/AUTO KNEE ON] or [OFF]
TCG:
[F-RUN] or [R-RUN]
Notes
1
3
5 4 3 2 1
Note that the number of the P2 card to which recording is in
progress will be retained even when the power is turned off.
When the power is next turned on, the last card written
before powering-down will be the target card.
34
b
Recording and Playback: Basic Procedures
If the SLOT SEL function is assigned to the USER MAIN
button or other user button, the button can be used to
select a P2 card recording target from among multiple
inserted P2 cards.
When a new target P2 card is selected, the appropriate
slot number appears on the P2 card remaining amount
indicator in the viewfinder.
For more information about the indications in the
viewfinder, see [Viewfinder Status Indication Layout]
(page 77).
SLOT SEL function is enabled during recording. Until the
P2 card on which images are recorded has been switched
completely, “SLOT SEL” blinks on the viewfinder. If the
SLOT SEL operation cannot be executed for any reason,
for instance immediately after starting recording or
switching the P2 card on which images are recorded,
“SLOT SEL INVALID” is displayed.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 35 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
White/Black Balance Adjustment to Recording Completion
For shooting, follow the steps below.
1
2
White/Black balance adjustment to recording completion
Select a filter according to light conditions.
When the white balance is saved:
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B].
If the white balance is adjusted on the spot:
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B] and shoot a
white test subject so that it appears at the center of the
screen. Then, follow the steps below to adjust the white
balance.
1 Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB] to
adjust the white balance.
2 Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [ABB] to
adjust the black balance.
3 Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB] to
adjust the white balance again.
3
1
4 5, 6
2
2
Recording and Playback
When the white or black balance is not saved and
you have no time to adjust the white balance:
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [PRST].
This adjusts the white balance against the filter
according to the position of the FILTER control.
For directions on making adjustments, see [Adjusting
the White Balance] (page 52) and [Adjusting the Black
Balance] (page 55).
3
4
5
6
Point the camera at your subject to adjust the focus, and
zoom.
To use the electronic shutter, set the shutter speed and
operation mode.
For more information, see [Setting the Electronic
Shutter] (page 56).
Press either the REC START button or VTR button at
the lens to start recording.
During recording, the REC lamp in the viewfinder stays
illuminated.
To stop recording, press either the REC START button
or VTR button at the lens.
The REC lamp in the viewfinder goes out.
Operation Buttons
During recording, all operation buttons (REW, FF, PLAY/
PAUSE, STOP) are disabled.
Recording and Playback: Basic Procedures
35
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 36 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Normal Recording
REC START button or VTR button at the lens starts recording of video and sound on the P2 card. A cluster of data that
consists of video and sound generated through a shooting action, together with such added information as meta data, is
called a “clip”.
Normal Recording and Native Recording
In the unit, the camera’s recording method is selectable
between the native recording method with the frame rate
unchanged and the normal recording method pulling the
frame rate down to 59.94 or 50 frames.
Normal recording (Pull-down recording)
Images at 24P (23.98P: referred to as 24P) are pulled down
in 2:3 mode. Images at 30P (29.97P: referred to as 30P) are
pulled down in 2:2 mode and recorded as 59.94i (referred to
as 60i). Images at 25P are recorded as 50i with 2:2 pulled
down. 1080i supports 24PA (2:3:3:2 Advanced Pull down) as
well.
AVC-Intra does not support pull-down recording.
Example of 24P Over 60i
Camera recording
A
B
C
Notes
The recording will start from the top frame of a 5-frame
cycle for 24P/24PA recording, a 4-frame cycle for 24P
native recording or a 2-frame cycle for 25P native
recording, respectively. Therefore, the time code may be
discontinued when recording clips continuously in another
mode in which the recording cycle is different.
Even if a P2 card has just been inserted, or the power has
been just turned on, you can start recording using the
internal memory of unit. In this case, recording cannot be
stopped until the P2 card is recognized. If the inserted
card is not recognized as a recordable P2 card, the record
in internal memory is instantly discarded, and the
message “CANNOT REC” is displayed on the viewfinder.
Press the MODE CHECK button to check P2 card status
(displayed in viewfinder).
D
2:3 pull down = Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
recording
Native recording
This recording method extracts and records effective frames
at the frame rates of the AVC-Intra recording in 1080i.
Even in native recording, the rate for outputting camera
images and playback images is 59.94 or 50 frames that are
pulled down.
Example of 1080/24PN (Native)
Camera recording
A
a
B
C
D
2:3 pull down Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Recording
36
A
B
C
Recording and Playback: Normal Recording
D
a. REC START button
b. MODE CHECK button
b
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 37 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
PRE RECORDING function
The function of the menu option PRE REC MODE may be
assigned to a desired user button by using any one of the
menu options USER MAIN SW, USER1 SW, USER2 SW,
MARKER SEL, or TEXT MEMO SW.
These options can be found in the <USER SW> screen on
the CAM OPERATION page.
The following is the option for PRE REC TIME.
1-8SEC (for AVC-Intra100/50 or DVCPRO HD)
Specify the duration for which data may be recorded before
either the REC START button or VTR button at the lens is
pressed.
Recording starts
Real-time video/
sound
A
Recording pauses
B
C
Specified PRE REC duration
Content on P2 card
Previous clip
A
Recording and Playback
The internal memory of your unit is capable of storing
several seconds of video and sound data coming from the
camera. This capability can be used to record video and
sound several seconds before either the REC START button
or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start recording. To
use this function, the menu option PRE REC MODE must be
set to “ON”. The storage duration of the internal memory can
be set from the menu option PRE REC TIME. PRE REC
MODE and PRE REC TIME menu options can be found in
the <REC FUNCTION> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
B
New clip
Notes
“P-REC” indication when the PRE REC MODE menu
option is set to “OFF”
After recording is stopped, the “P-REC” indication remains
displayed until all video and sound are recorded on the P2
card, even if the PRE REC MODE menu option is set to
“OFF”. For details of the “P-REC” display, refer to
[28. INTERVAL REC/PRE RECORDING indication/SD
memory card remaining free space] (page 83) in
[Viewfinder Status Indication Layout].
Immediately after the power is turned on, the menu option
PRE REC TIME is selected and/or the storage duration is
changed, the content in internal memory will be undefined.
In these situations, the video or sound will not be recorded
for the duration specified, even if either the REC START
button or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start
recording.
A P2 card that has been just inserted takes some time to
recognize. In this situation, video or sound may not be
recorded for the duration specified, even if either the REC
START button or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start
a recording.
The internal memory does not store video or sound when
a playback or recording review is being performed. For
this reason, no video or sound can be recorded during
such operation.
When recording starts, the time code (TCG) display may
not update until the unit recognizes the P2 card.
During native VFR recording and INTERVAL REC
operation, the PRE RECORDING is not available.
Recording and Playback: PRE RECORDING function
37
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 38 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function
This unit can shoot at a lower frame rate (undercrank) or
higher frame rate (overcrank).
For native VFR recording
(1080/23.98PsF (24PsF))
1
2
Open the <SYSTEM MODE> screen from the SYSTEM
SETTING page using the menu.
Set SYSTEM MODE to “1080-23.98PsF (24PsF)”, REC
FORMAT to “AVC-I 100 (50)/24PN”, and VFR to “ON”.
Set FRAME RATE suitable for desired way of shooting.
It is possible to select a frame rate of 1 to 24 if
“24FRAME” is selected for the 24P VFR RANGE, and 1
to 30 if “30FRAME” is selected.
Press the REC START button to begin recording in the
VFR mode.
Notes
When you set the 24P VFR RANGE to “30FRAME”
and FRAME RATE to “25-30FRAME”, output image
becomes unnatural because the 24PsF sequence
cannot be maintained correctly for the HD SDI A · B
image signal.
Recording of audio is only possible when the frame
rate is set to 24 frames.
For native VFR recording (1080/59.94i (50i))
1
2
Open the <SYSTEM MODE> screen from the SYSTEM
SETTING page using the menu.
Set SYSTEM MODE to “1080-59.94i (50i)”, REC
FORMAT to “AVC-I 100 (50)/24PN (25P)” or “AVC-I 100
(50)/30PN”, and VFR to “ON”.
Set FRAME RATE suitable for desired way of shooting.
It is possible to select from 1 to 30 (25) frames as a
frame rate.
Press the REC START button to begin recording in the
VFR mode.
Note
Recording of audio is only possible when the frame rate
is set to the same frame rate as set in the REC
FORMAT (24PN: 24 frames, 30PN: 30 frames, and 25P:
25 frames).
When it is set to other frame rates, audio meter in the
display window or viewfinder of the unit will move, but it
will not be recorded to the P2 card since embedded
audio is superimposed on the HD SDI signal.
During recording native VFR - general notes
It is not possible to switch between P2 cards.
During recording, it is not possible to switch VFR “ON”/
“OFF”.
The time code is fixed by the Rec run.
It is possible to combine standard VFR recording with PRE
RECORDING, LOOP REC, INTERVAL REC or proxy
recording.
Thumbnail screens may be produced one frame later than
in the video recorded to the P2 card. It should be noted
that this does not indicate a fault.
Since the embedded audio is superimposed into the HD
SDI signal, even if the VFR is set to “ON” in the VFR, it
may not be recorded onto the P2 card depending on other
menu setting, even if the audio level meter in the display
window or viewfinder of the unit is showing a move.
It takes about 10 seconds to be able to record VFR after
turning the power ON.
38
Recording and Playback: Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 39 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
To change the frame rate while recording in VFR
It is possible to change the frame rate while recording in
VFR.
1
2
Open the <OPTION MENU> screen from the OPTION
page. OPTION page can be opened by pressing the
MENU button while pressing the LIGHT button.
Set the RATE SET AT REC to “ON”.
Close the menu screen by pressing the MENU button.
Note
Recording of audio to the P2 card will not be possible
when the RATE SET AT REC is set to “ON”.
Delay of audio is almost matched to the delay of the
image when the frame rate is changed. Audio that is
superimposed on the HD SDI signal will be muted when
the delay for the audio is changed.
Recording and Playback
Frame rate can be changed to match the intention of the
recording by pressing the SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment
switch (+/–) while the frame number display (number in
white) in the VF screen is flashing by pressing the JOG
dial button. It is also possible to instantly switch to any
frame rate by using the FRAME RATE function of the
USER switch.
Note
When SYSTEM MODE is set to “1080-59.94i”, setting REC
FORMAT to “AVC-I 100/30PN” or “AVC-I 50/30PN” results in
operation at AVC-I 100/29.97PN or AVC-I 50/29.97PN
respectively. Setting REC FORMAT to “AVC-I 50/24PN”
results in operation at AVC-I 50/23.98PN.
Similarly, when SYSTEM MODE is set to “1080-24PsF”,
setting REC FORMAT to “AVC-I 100/24PN” or “AVC-I 50/
24PN” results in operation at AVC-I 100/24PN or AVC-I 50/
24PN respectively.
Recording and Playback: Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function
39
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 40 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Flow Effect Shooting
2
This way of shooting provides a flow effect and may, for
instance, be used to shoot a subject on a far side of a road
with a stream of fast-moving cars as the flow, in such a way
that the stationary subject comes into focus though the cars.
1
Press the REC START button to begin recording in the
VFR mode.
During Flow Effect Shooting - general notes
Open the <SYSTEM MODE> screen from the SYSTEM
SETTING page using the menu.
Set SYSTEM MODE to “1080-59.94i (50i)”, REC
FORMAT to “AVC-I 100 (50)/60i (50i)” or “DVCPROHD/
60i (50i)”, and VFR to “ON”
Set FRAME RATE suitable for desired way of shooting.
It is possible to select frame rate of 1 to 30 frames if
“1080-59.94i” is selected for the SYSTEM MODE, and 1
to 25 frames if “1080-50i” is selected.
All the image signal and HD SDI output signal recorded
onto the P2 card will be either 59.94i or 50i, and all frames
will be valid.
Audio recording will be recorded onto P2 card at all frame
rates.
Fixed shutter and synchro scan are valid.
It is not possible to switch between P2 cards.
During recording, it is not possible to switch VFR “ON”/
“OFF”.
Standard settings for flow effect shooting
System frequency
59.94 Hz
50 Hz
40
SYSTEM MODE setting
SYSTEM MODE
1080-59.94i
1080-50i
Other settings
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/60i
(AVC-I 50/60i)
(DVCPROHD/60i)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 23FRAME or lower
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/50i
(AVC-I 50/50i)
(DVCPROHD/50i)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 24FRAME or lower
Recording and Playback: Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function
Recording Frame Rate
1 - 23 frames
1 - 24 frames
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 41 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Practical Use of Other VFR Recording Functions
Standard Speed Shooting for Film Production
When producing for the cinema screen, a frame rate of 24 fps (24 frames per sec) matching the rate at which films are played
back is normal (1 speed). When settings below are used, the recorded material will play back as a film. Images like a film
can be obtained by FILMLIKE1-3 and FILM-REC gamma. For more information about the FILMLIKE1-3 and FILM-REC, see
page 184.
Standard Settings for Film Production
SYSTEM MODE setting
1080-24PsF
Recording Frame Rate
Other settings
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
CAMERA MODE
24P
24 frames
Standard Speed shooting for Commercial and TV production
When producing commercials and TV shows for HDTV/SDTV broadcasts, a frame rate of 30 fps (30 frames per second) (or
25 fps (25 frames per second) at 50 Hz), is the norm (1 speed). When the settings below are used, the recorded material
will play back as a television broadcast. Commercials and music clips can be recorded with film-like image quality, and a
frame rate suitable for television broadcasting.
Recording and Playback
SYSTEM MODE
Standard settings for commercials and TV shows
System frequency
59.94 Hz
50 Hz
SYSTEM MODE setting
SYSTEM MODE
1080-59.94i
1080-50i
Other settings
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
(AVC-I 100/60i)
(AVC-I 50/60i)
(DVCPROHD/60i)
CAMERA MODE
30P
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/25PN
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
(AVC-I 100/50i)
(AVC-I 50/50i)
(DVCPROHD/50i)
CAMERA MODE
Recording Frame Rate
29.97 frames
25 frames
25P
Recording and Playback: Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function
41
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 42 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Undercrank Shooting
This way of shooting provides the quick motion effects used, for instance to realize speeding clouds, a person standing
stationary in the blur of a moving crowd, and kung-fu moves. For example, when the scenes have been shot using the 24P
recording format for specifying playback frames, the speed of the quick motion effects can be doubled by setting the VFR
recording frame rate to 12 fps.
Standard settings for undercrank shooting
System frequency
59.94 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
SYSTEM MODE setting
SYSTEM MODE
1080-59.94i
1080-50i
1080-24PsF
Other settings
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 23FRAME or lower
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/25PN
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 24FRAME or lower
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 23FRAME or lower
Recording Frame Rate
1 - 23 frames
1 - 24 frames
1 - 23 frames
Overcrank shooting
This way of shooting provides slow motion effects used in car chases, action scenes, climactic scenes and other dramatic
moments. For example, if the image is taken with REC FORMAT 24P specifying the playback frame, you can get a slow
motion effect of x1.25 by setting the recording frame rate to 30fps.
Standard settings for overcrank shooting
System frequency
59.94 Hz
60 Hz
SYSTEM MODE setting
SYSTEM MODE
1080-59.94i
1080-24PsF
Other settings
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 24FRAME or higher
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 25FRAME or higher
Recording Frame Rate
25 - 30 frames*
25 - 30 frames*
* It is necessary to set the 24P VFR RANGE to “30FRAME”. Images of up to 30 frames will be recorded onto the P2 card at this time, but the
HD SDI output sequence will not be output properly.
24P VFR RANGE is selected in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Slow motion effect is not achieved when the SYSTEM MODE is set to “1080-50i” and the REC FORMAT is set to “AVC-I
/25PN”.
42
Recording and Playback: Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 43 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Loop Recording
When two or more P2 card slots contain cards, this function
allows the target P2 card to be switched in order. Even when
the free space of a P2 card is used up, this function
continues recording while erasing existing data.
Card1
Before loop recording starts
No content
To use this function, the menu option LOOP REC MODE
must be set to “ON”. The option LOOP REC MODE can be
found in the <REC FUNCTION> screen on the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
Card2
Card3
Content
recorded
Recording Cycle 1
Recording Cycle 2
A
D
B
C
B
C
Data are recorded by connecting the unrecorded sections on the P2 card (in the sequence of A to B to C). When the
remaining recording capacity is less than 30 seconds, A is deleted, and data are recorded on C up to nearly full, and
then new data are recorded (D).
Recording and Playback
Recording starts
Notes
When the loop recording capability is used, each P2 card
must have at least 1 minute of free space.
During loop recording, the P2 card access LEDs for all
target P2 cards illuminate in orange. Note that if any of the
target P2 card is removed, loop recording stops.
When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to “ON”,
the viewfinder and display window both show “LOOP”.
However, when only one card is inserted, or when each
card has less than 1 minute of free space, the loop
recording capability does not work, even if the option
LOOP REC MODE is set to “ON”. If this is the case, the
indication “LOOP” flashes in the viewfinder and on the
display window.
When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to “ON”,
the space remaining on the P2 card is displayed as an
estimated recording time for the current recording format.
When LOOP REC is stopped immediately after deleting
an old recording, the actual time remaining may be shorter
than the displayed time.
When you set LOOP REC MODE to “ON”, VFR is set to
“OFF”.
During native VFR recording and use of the INTERVAL
REC function, the LOOP REC function is not available.
Terminating the Loop Recording Mode
You can terminate the loop recording mode by either:
Turning off the POWER switch of unit; or
Setting the menu option LOOP REC MODE to “OFF”.
Recording and Playback: Loop Recording
43
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 44 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Interval Recording
It is possible to record in intervals of one frame as the
shortest length by using the internal memory of the unit.
To use this option, open the <REC FUNCTION> screen from
the SYSTEM SETTING page, and set the interval recording
mode, REC TIME, PAUSE TIME and TAKE TOTAL TIME for
the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE. When the settings
are finalized, TOTAL REC TIME needed on the P2 card is
automatically calculated and displayed.
The following are the options for INTERVAL REC MODE:
OFF:
No interval recording performed.
ON:
Interval recording performed.
ONE SHOT:
Performs “one-shot” recording for the duration
specified under the REC TIME option by
pressing either the REC START button or
VTR button at the lens.
Notes
When you set INTERVAL REC to “ON” or “ONE SHOT”,
VFR is set to “OFF”.
(When an item including any of the 24PN, 25PN or 30PN
modes is selected using the REC FORMAT menu option.)
The shortest recording time, stand-by time, and the set
value of the cut-off unit frame number* may vary with the
recording method as follows.
Recording method
1080i
Unit frame
number
60i, 50i
30P, 25P (Pull down)
30PN, 25PN (Native)
1 frame
24P, 24PA (Pull down)
5 frames
24PN (Native)
4 frames
Shooting procedures when INTERVAL REC is ON
1
2
3
Interval recording starts. Recording automatically stops
after the specified TAKE TOTAL TIME, and the entire
recording is generated as one clip.
“i” starts blinking in the display when the internal
recording mode is selected. “iREC” illuminates after
recording starts. “iREC” blinks during a pause.
The display in the viewfinder is the same as that in the
display window.
The tally lamp illuminates during recording. If PAUSE
TIME is set at 2 minutes or longer, the tally lamp
illuminates at 5-second intervals to indicate that it is
paused. The tally lamp also blinks 3 seconds before
recording starts.
Following basic operations of shooting and recording
according to [Basic Procedures], lock the camera
securely.
Check that “i” is blinking in the display, and that the
interval recording mode is selected.
Press either REC START button or VTR button at the
lens.
iREC start
Real-time video
Sound
Time Axis
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
1
2
3
N-1
N
t2
t2
t2
TAKE TOTAL TIME
(Time necessary for shooting)
Content on P2 card
1
2
3
N-1 N
TOTAL REC TIME
(Recording time on P2 card)
44
Recording and Playback: Interval Recording
One clip
REC TIME
(Recording time=t1)
PAUSE TIME
(Pausing time=t2)
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 45 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
For continuous recording
To stop the Interval recording mode
Press either the REC START button or VTR button at the
lens, again. Interval recording resumes.
Setting the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE to “OFF”.
To stop recording
Press the STOP button. Recording stops. Then, the camera
accesses the P2 card to record the video stored in memory
before recording stops. The record from the beginning of the
interval recording to the moment of pressing the STOP
button is generated as one clip.
When INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to “OFF”, the mode
returns to ordinary recording mode if the POWER switch of
the unit is turned off.
If INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to “ON”, the interval
recording mode will not change even if the POWER switch is
turned off.
After setting the INTERVAL REC mode, follow these steps:
1
2
Following basic operations of shooting and recording
according to [Basic Procedures], lock the camera
securely.
3
4
Press either the REC START button or VTR button at
the lens.
The unit automatically goes into ONE SHOT pause
mode after the specified REC TIME.
Performs recording for the duration specified under the
REC TIME option by pressing either the REC START
button or VTR button at the lens, and returns to ONE
SHOT pause mode.
Press the STOP button.
The video and sound stored in memory are generated
as one clip.
Time Axis
iREC
start
iREC start
Real-time video/
sound
Content on P2 card
A
B
t
t
Previous clip
A
Recording and Playback
Shooting procedures for the ONE SHOT mode of INTERVAL REC
STOP button
REC TIME
(Recording time=t)
B
One clip
To check the previous recording during a pause
Press the RET button at the lens to put the unit into REC
REVIEW mode. ONE SHOT operation continues after the
REC REVIEW.
To divide clips or to change the P2 card used for
recording
Even during ONE SHOT mode, clips will not be generated
on the P2 card until the STOP button is pressed. Press the
STOP button, and stop ONE SHOT mode operation.
To stop the ONE SHOT mode of INTERVAL REC
Set the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE to “OFF”.
When INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to “OFF”, the mode
returns to ordinary recording mode if the POWER switch of
the unit is turned off.
If INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to “ON”, the interval
recording mode will not change even if the POWER switch is
turned off.
Recording and Playback: Interval Recording
45
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 46 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
During INTERVAL REC mode general notes
Sound
By selecting “ON”/“OFF” for the menu option AUDIO REC
in the <REC FUNCTION> screen, it is possible to specify
whether or not sound will be recorded during interval
recording.
Record/playback buttons
During interval recording, all operation buttons other than
STOP (REW, FF, PLAY/PAUSE) are disabled. However,
during a pause in ONE SHOT mode, REC REVIEW can
be executed with the RET button on the lens.
If the POWER switch is turned [OFF] during recording
If the unit is turned off during interval recording, the video
stored in memory is recorded onto the P2 card, and then
the unit automatically turns off.
To start emergency recording during a pause
If the REC START button is assigned to one of the USER
MAIN, USER 1, USER 2, MARKER SELECT and TEXT
MEMO button in advance, emergency recording can be
started during a pause by holding down the relevant
button. Pause time measurement continues after such
emergency recording. However, these buttons will not
operate even if pressed when REC FORMAT is set to
“24P”, “24PA”, or “24PN”.
Time code indication
When recording starts, the time code (TCG) display may
not update until the unit recognizes the P2 card.
Removing cards
During INTERVAL REC mode operation, the P2 card
access LED for the target P2 card blinks in orange. Do not
remove the P2 card during this status. If you should
remove the card accidentally, restore clips. However, even
if the clips are restored, the last 3 to 4 seconds of the
recording (up to a maximum of about 10 seconds if the P2
card is removed while recording onto multiple P2 cards)
may be lost. For more information on how to fix clips, see
[Restoring Clips] (page 135).
Thumbnail operation and menu operation
Thumbnail operation does not work during the INTERVAL
REC mode operation. Press the STOP button before
operating thumbnails.
When standby time is set to 1 minute or more or when in
ONE SHOT mode, the following restrictions apply even
though the menu can be operated during stand-by mode.
– The respective settings of SYSTEM MODE, REC
FORMAT, CAMERA MODE, PC MODE and VFR
cannot be changed.
– The respective settings for SD CARD READ/WRITE,
LENS FILE CARD R/W, READ USER DATA, and READ
FACTORY DATA cannot be executed.
Note
However, this function does not work in native recording with
VFR operation.
Recording Review Function
When recording is paused, pressing the RET button
automatically locates the last 2 seconds of video just
recorded, and the viewfinder provides video playback. Thus,
it is possible to check whether the recording has been
performed correctly.
After playback, the unit is again ready to start recording.
The picture location/playback duration can be increased to
up to 10 seconds by continuously pressing the RET button.
For short clips, however, when the start of a clip is located,
continuously pressing the RET button does not play back
any clips before that clip.
The function of the RET button may be assigned to a
desired user button by using one of the menu options USER
MAIN SW, USER1 SW, USER2 SW, MARKER SEL or
TEXT MEMO SW. These options can be found in the
<USER SW> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
When recording is paused, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE
button plays back the last recorded clip, from the beginning.
After completion of playback, the unit enters the stopped
state.
Recording pauses
Recording starts
2-10 Seconds
Recorded clip
The PLAY/PAUSE button plays back the
clip from the beginning.
The RET button puts the unit into REC
REVIEW mode.
Notes
Set the menu option RET SW (found in the <SW MODE>
screen on the CAM OPERATION page) to “R.REVIEW”.
When the HD SDI A · B switch on the side panel is
positioned at [MEM], the video for REC REVIEW is output
from the video output connectors (HD SDI A · B and MON
OUT connectors), and also to the viewfinder.
Note that when a backup device is connected to back up
the video the pictures for REC REVIEW are backed up.
46
Recording and Playback: Recording Review Function
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 47 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Normal and Variable Speed Playback
The PLAY/PAUSE button provides monochrome playback
through the viewfinder and color playback on the LCD
monitor. A color video monitor connected to the HD SDI A ·
B or MON OUT connector of unit also provides color
playback.
The HD SDI A · B connector outputs an SDI playback (to
view the playback, the HD SDI A · B switch on the side panel
must be positioned to [MEM]).
The FF and REW buttons provide 32 and 4 fast
playbacks and fast reverse playbacks.
When playback is paused, the FF button locates the
beginning of the next clip while maintaining the pause mode.
When playback is paused, the REW button locates the
beginning of the current clip while maintaining the pause
mode.
Recording and Playback
Variable speed playback
Notes
When a clip with a different SYSTEM MODE cannot be
played back, change the SYSTEM MODE setting of this
unit to match the format of the clip. For more details about
the SYSTEM MODE, refer to [Recording formats and
output connector signal formats] (page 50).
When a P2 card has been just removed or inserted, or
when the power has been just turned on for playback, it
may take some time for unit to read clip information. If this
is the case, the viewfinder displays “UPDATING”. Also, it
will display “CANNOT PLAY” when the PLAY/PAUSE
button is pressed while the P2 card is being recognized.
If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being
played back, the clips on the inserted P2 card will not be
played back. A P2 card inserted during playback will be
recognized after playback ends.
If you perform variable speed playback on a clip split
across more than one P2 card, sound may disappear for a
moment. This is not a fault.
Text Memo Function
Text memos are time-coded thumbnails added to any video
point when a clip is being recorded or played back.
The TEXT MEMO button adds text memo information at the
appropriate point. You can edit added text memos using the
P2 Viewer.
Through a thumbnail display, you can choose and play back
the text memo point or copy any portion. For more
information, see [Text Memo] (page 132).
Notes
One clip can have up to 100 text memos.
Text memos can also be recorded when the LCD monitor
is in thumbnail mode. In this case, the text memo is added
to the position on the clip where the cursor is set (normally
at the beginning) only.
Text memos cannot be recorded when the color bar is
output or the unit is in LOOP REC mode and INTERVAL
REC mode.
a
a. TEXT MEMO button
Recording and Playback: Normal and Variable Speed Playback
47
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 48 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Shot Mark Function
A shot mark is added to the thumbnail of a clip to distinguish
that clip from others. It is also possible to select only those
clips which include shot marks, and display and playback the
selected clips on the LCD monitor.
Shot marks may also be added or erased using clip
thumbnails. For more information, see [Shot Mark]
(page 132).
Notes
During color bar output, LOOP REC recording, and in
INTERVAL REC mode, it is not possible to add/delete shot
marks.
It is impossible to add shot marks to incomplete clips (refer
page 128).
For clips recorded on plural P2 cards or clips split on a P2
card (refer to Notes on page 11), a shot mark is added to
the top clip only.
Adding Shot Marks
To add a shot mark during recording, press the SHOT
MARKER button. The viewfinder displays “MARK ON” and
adds a shot mark to the thumbnail of the appropriate clip.
Another press of the button erases the shot mark.
When the SHOT MARKER button is pressed during a
recording pause, a shot mark is attached to the clip recorded
immediately before. The shot mark can be deleted with
another press.
a
a. SHOT MARKER button
Recording Setting and Operation Mode
The unit’s recording mode works according to the priorities outlined in the following table, relative to the setting of the menus
and switches.
Functional
operation mode
Menus related to system/recording
PC MODE
INTERVAL
REC MODE
LOOP REC
MODE
VFR
Recording a
text memo
Shot mark
Proxy
recording
(optional)
USB device
USB DEV.
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
USB host
USB HOST
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
ON or
ONE SHOT
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled*1
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
ON
Enabled
1s - 8s
Enabled*1
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
OFF
Enabled*2
1s - 8s
Enabled
Enabled*3
Enabled*3
Enabled*2
INTERVAL REC
LOOP REC
OFF
OFF
Normal recording
*1 Disabled for native recording
*2 Disabled for native VFR recording
*3 Disabled for color bars
48
PRE REC
MODE
Buttons
Recording and Playback: Shot Mark Function
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 49 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Multi Format
Video system and Recording format
For the unit to obtain image signals for each HD format, CCD is switching between interlaced scan and progressive scan
(reading all pixels).
With combinations of the SYSTEM MODE and CAMERA MODE menu options on the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the
SYSTEM SETTING page, you can select an video system from among 13 types.
SYSTEM MODE menu option
Allows you to select a combination of system frequency
(59.94 Hz, 50 Hz, 23.98 Hz and 24 Hz) and signaling
system (1080i). When a change has been made to the
SYSTEM MODE option, the viewfinder indicates “TURN
POWER OFF”. Then, turn the POWER switch of the unit
off and wait 5 seconds or longer before turning the unit
on again.
REC FORMAT menu option
Used to select the recording format.
AVC-I 100
The AVC-Intra100 format is used to record
video. The native recording format applies to
the 30PN, 24PN and 25PN modes.
AVC-I 50
The AVC-Intra50 format is used to record
video. The native recording is applied to the
30PN, 24PN and 25PN modes.
DVCPROHD
The DVCPRO HD format is used to record
video.
CAMERA MODE menu option
Selecting a shooting mode. For information about the
behavior for each setting, see [Recording formats and
output connector signal formats] (page 50).
Notes
When the camera has been switched from 60i or 30P
to 24P or 24PA, video may produce noise for a
moment because the pull-down 5-frame cycle is
adjusted. This is not an abnormal condition.
When “AVC-I 50” or “AVC-I 100” is selected, the 24PA
mode cannot be selected.
VFR menu option
You can select whether to perform VFR recording.
ON
OFF
Enables variable frame rate shooting at the
frame rate set in FRAME RATE.
The frame rate is determined according to the
REC FORMAT setting.
24P VFR RANGE menu option
It is possible to increase the frame rate of VFR up to 30
frames when the SYSTEM MODE is set to “108023.98PsF” or “1080-24PsF”.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Selecting a recording signal and method
24FRAME
1 to 24 frames can be set for VFR.
30FRAME
1 to 30 frames can be set for VFR. But the
output image becomes unnatural because the
HD SDI output signal sequence cannot be
maintained correctly.
FRAME RATE menu option
When the VFR menu option is set to “ON”, it is possible
to shoot using the frame rate set in this menu option.
When the VFR menu option is set to “ON”, pressing the
jog dial button displays the frame rate on the upper left
of the viewfinder screen as a blinking number. It is then
possible to change the frame rate setting without
opening the FRAME RATE menu option by pressing the
SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment buttons (+/-). Note,
however, that this operation is not available when the
FRATE function has been set to on using a user button.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Multi Format
49
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 50 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Recording formats and output connector signal formats
The table below shows the formats used to record signals from the CCD and externally input signals along with the formats for
signals output from the output connectors.
Menu setting
SYSTEM
REC FORMAT
MODE
CAMERA
MODE
Operating state
VFR
OFF
60i
DVCPROHD/60i
30P
24P
108059.94i
24PA
AVC-I 100/60i
AVC-I 50/60i
60i
AVC-I 100/30PN
30P
AVC-I 50/30PN
AVC-I 100/24PN
24P
AVC-I 50/24PN
ON
Fixed to
OFF
Fixed to
OFF
Fixed to
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1080AVC-I 100/24PN
24P
23.98PsF AVC-I 50/24PN
ON
OFF
108024PsF
AVC-I 100/24PN
24P
AVC-I 50/24PN
ON
OFF
50i
DVCPROHD/50i
25P
1080-50i
AVC-I 100/50i
AVC-I 50/50i
50i
AVC-I 100/25PN
25P
AVC-I 50/25PN
ON
Fixed to
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Recording TC
Recording format/frame
Audio
FRAME RATE
frame number/
Video output format
rate
recording
mode
1080-59.94i
Disabled
59.94i
1FRAME59.94i (Valid for all frames)
1080-59.94i (Valid for all frames)
30FRAME
Disabled
29.97P Over 59.94i
Disabled
23.98P Over 59.94i 2:3
Input/output
TC frame
number/mode
1080-29.97PsF Over 59.94i 2:2
1080-23.98PsF Over 59.94i 2:3
30 frames
Disabled
23.98P Over 59.94i 2:3:3:2
1080-23.98PsF Over 59.94i 2:3:3:2
Disabled
1FRAME30FRAME
Disabled
1FRAME30FRAME
Disabled
1FRAME30FRAME
Disabled
1FRAME24FRAME or
30FRAME*1
Disabled
1FRAME24FRAME or
30FRAME*1
Disabled
1FRAME25FRAME
59.94i
1080-59.94i
30 frames
59.94i (Valid for all frames)
1080-59.94i (Valid for all frames)
29.97P-29.97PN (Native)
1080-29.97PsF Over 59.94i 2:2
For EE: 1080PsF Over 59.94i
Playback: 1080-29.97PsF Over 59.94i 2:2
1080-23.98PsF Over 59.94i 2:3
For EE: 1080PsF Over 59.94i
Playback: 1080-23.98PsF Over 59.94i 2:3
1080-23.98PsF Over 47.96i 2:2
30 frames
30 frames
R-RUN only
30 frames
30 frames
R-RUN only
24 frames
For EE: 1080PsF Over 47.96i
Playback: 1080-23.98PsF Over 47.96i 2:2
24 frames
R-RUN only
1080-24PsF Over 48i 2:2
24 frames
For EE: 1080PsF Over 48i
Playback: 1080-24PsF Over 48i 2:2
24 frames
R-RUN only
30 frames
30 frames
1-29.97P- 29.97PN (Native)
R-RUN only
23.98P- 23.98PN (Native) 24 frames
24 frames
1-29.97P- 23.98PN (Native)
R-RUN only
23.98P- 23.98PN (Native) 24 frames
1-23.98P or 29.97P 23.98PN (Native)
24 frames
R-RUN only
24P-24PN (Native)
24 frames
1-24P or 30P - 24PN
(Native)
24 frames
R-RUN only
–*2
–*2
–*2
–*2
50i
50i (Valid for all frames)
1080-50i
1080-50i
25 frames
Disabled
25P Over 50i 2:2
1080-25PsF Over 50i 2:2
Disabled
1FRAME25FRAME
Disabled
1FRAME25FRAME
50i
1080-50i
50i (Valid for all frames)
25P-25PN (Native)
1-25P - 25PN (Native)
25 frames
25 frames
25 frames
R-RUN only
1080-50i (Valid for all frames)
–*2
1080-25PsF Over 50i 2:2
For EE: 1080PsF Over 50i
Playback: 1080-25PsF Over 50i 2:2
25 frames
25 frames
25 frames
25 frames
R-RUN only
: Supported
–: Not supported
*1 For 1080/23.98PsF and 1080/24PsF, it is possible to record signals of up to 30 frames on the P2 card if the 24P VFR RANGE is set to
“30FRAME”. However, since the HD SDI output signal is 23.98PsF or 24PsF, the sequence of the signal will not be maintained correctly
if it is set above 25 frames during the VFR recording. The output image becomes unnatural, but this is not a malfunction.
24P VFR RANGE is selected in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING page.
*2 Recording of audio is only possible when the frame rate is set to the same frame rate as set in the REC FORMAT (24PN: 24 frames,
30PN: 30 frames, and 25PN: 25 frames). However, recording of audio is not be possible for VFR when the RATE SET AT REC is set to
“ON”.
50
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Multi Format
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 51 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Menu setting
SYSTEM MODE
REC FORMAT
CAMERA MODE
1080-59.94i
Disabled
1FRAME-30FRAME
30P
Fixed to OFF
Disabled
24P
Fixed to OFF
Disabled
24PA
Fixed to OFF
Disabled
60i
AVC-I 100/30PN
AVC-I 50/30PN
30P
24P
AVC-I 100/24PN
AVC-I 50/24PN
24P
1080-24PsF
AVC-I 100/24PN
AVC-I 50/24PN
24P
50i
25P
1080-50i
AVC-I 100/50i
AVC-I 50/50i
50i
AVC-I 100/25PN
AVC-I 50/25PN
25P
OFF
Disabled
ON
1FRAME-30FRAME*1
OFF
Disabled
ON
1FRAME-30FRAME
OFF
Disabled
ON
1FRAME-30FRAME
OFF
Disabled
ON
1FRAME-30FRAME*1 or
24FRAME
OFF
Disabled
ON
1FRAME-30FRAME*1 or
24FRAME
OFF
Disabled
ON
1FRAME-25FRAME
Fixed to OFF
Disabled
OFF
Disabled
ON
1FRAME-25FRAME
OFF
Disabled
ON
1FRAME-25FRAME
PROXY
LOOP REC
INTERVAL/
ONE SHOT
–
–*2
–
–
–
–*2
–
–
–
–*2
–
–
–
–*2
–
–
–
–*2
–
–
: Supported
–: Not supported
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
1080-23.98PsF
DVCPROHD/50i
FRAME RATE
OFF
AVC-I 100/60i
AVC-I 50/60i
AVC-I 100/24PN
AVC-I 50/24PN
VFR
ON
60i
DVCPROHD/60i
Supported Recording Functions
PRE
RECORDING
*1 For 1080/23.98PsF and 1080/24PsF, it is possible to record signals of up to 30 frames on the P2 card if the 24P VFR RANGE is set to
“30FRAME”. However, since the HD SDI output signal is 23.98PsF or 24PsF, the sequence of the signal will not be maintained correctly
if it is set above 25 frames during the VFR recording. The output image becomes unnatural, but this is not a malfunction.
24P VFR RANGE is selected in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING page.
*2 PROXY recording is only possible when the frame rate is set to the same frame rate as set in the REC FORMAT (24PN: 24 frames,
30PN: 30 frames, and 25PN: 25 frames).
Note
During playback, the formats for clips in the same system mode are switched automatically and played back.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Multi Format
51
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 52 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance
To record high-quality video with the unit, the black and white balances must be adjusted according to conditions.
For higher quality, it is recommended that the adjustments should be made in this order AWB (white balance adjustment) ABB (black balance adjustment) AWB (white balance adjustment).
Adjusting the White Balance
Whenever light conditions change, the white balance must
be re-adjusted.
To adjust the white balance, follow the steps below.
1
4
5
Set the switches as illustrated below.
Adjust the lens iris.
Flip up the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is positioned
at [AWB], then release it.
The switch returns to the central position with the white
balance automatically adjusted.
Note
To cancel automatic white balance adjustment in
process (the viewfinder displays “AWB ACTIVE”), reposition the AUTO W/B BAL switch at [AWB].
If automatic adjustment is canceled, the value in effect
before automatic adjustment will be used.
a
6
b
c
d
Adjust the CC/ND FILTER control according to the light
conditions.
Note
3

e
a. CC/ND FILTER control
b. AUTO W/B BAL switch:
Used to perform AWB.
c. GAIN:
Under normal conditions, set to “0 dB”.
If it is too dark, an appropriate gain should
be set.
d. OUTPUT:
[CAM]
e. WHITE BAL: [A] or [B]
2
During an adjustment, the viewfinder displays the
following message:
For examples of CC/ND FILTER adjustments, see
[Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section]
(page 19).
Place a white pattern at a point where the light
conditions match those for the light source of the
subject. Then zoom-in on the white pattern so that white
color appears in the screen. A white object (cloth or
wall) may be used instead of a white pattern.
The illustration below shows the required size for the
white space.
Notes
Do not include a high-intensity spot in the screen.
The white object must appear at the center of the
screen.
7
The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds, and the
following message will appear:
The adjusted value is automatically stored in the
memory specified in step 1 ([A] or [B]).
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
8
For the 3200 K CC/ND filter, if the subject’s color
temperature is lower than 2300 K or higher than 9900 K
the following message appears:
If the arrow points down () the actual color temperature
is lower than the temperature indicated. If the arrow
points up () the actual temperature is higher than the
temperature indicated.
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
Note
“CHECK FILTER” is displayed on the viewfinder or LCD
monitor screen when the power is turned on with CC/ND
FILTER located in a midway position. Move the CC/ND
FILTER to the correct position (where it will click into place).
1/4 or more of the screen in width
1/4 or more of the
screen in height
52
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 53 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Detection area for the white balance
Retaining white balances
The detection area for the white balance is selectable
between “90%”, “50%” and “25%”, using the menu option
AWB AREA.
This option can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE MODE>
screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
The detection area is factory-set to “25%”.
90%
50%
When you have no time to adjust the white
balance
Position the WHITE BAL switch at [PRST].
This adjusts the white balance for the filter according to the
position of the CC/ND FILTER control.
When the white balance has not been
automatically adjusted
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
25%
Each value in memory is retained even if the unit is turned
off; it will not be lost until the white balance is re-adjusted.
White balances are stored in either of two systems: A or B.
When the menu option FILTER INH is set to “ON” (default),
each system stores only one value. If this is the case, the
values are not synchronized with the filters.
This option can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE MODE>
screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
When the menu option FILTER INH is set to “OFF”, the
adjusted value for each filter can be automatically stored in
the memory that corresponds to the position of the WHITE
BAL switch ([A] or [B]). Your unit has 4 built-in filters; it stores
8 (4 2) adjusted values.
When the white balance has not been successfully adjusted,
the viewfinder displays an error message.
If one of the error messages listed below appears, take the
appropriate steps, then adjust the white balance again.
If the error message appears after repeated readjustments,
the interior of the unit must be inspected. For more
information, contact your distributor.
Error message
Description
Remedies
COLOR TEMP
HIGH
The color
temperature is too
high.
Select an appropriate
filter.
COLOR TEMP
LOW
The color
temperature is too
low.
Select an appropriate
filter.
LOW LIGHT
There is insufficient
light.
Increase the light
level or gain.
LEVEL OVER
There is too much
light.
Decrease the light
level or gain.
CHECK FILTER
The FILTER control is
displaced.
Check the FILTER
control.
TIME OVER
AWB was not
completed within the
time allowed.
Shooting conditions
may be unstable. If
flicker occurs, press
the shutter and
readjust the AWB
under stable
conditions.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance
53
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 54 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting Color Temperature Manually
The white balance can be manually adjusted by setting the
color temperature. Manual color temperature settings can be
performed for each of the WHITE BAL switch positions:
[PRST], [A] and [B].
The color temperature is set using the menu options COLOR
TEMP PRE, COLOR TEMP A, and COLOR TEMP B.
These options can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE
MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
Note
Even if the color temperature has been manually set,
automatic adjustment of the white balance (AWB) records
the color temperature at the time of AWB at the position
where the WHITE BAL switch was located. When the CC
filter position is switched, the value for the color temperature
changes.
 







Viewfinder displays related to white balance
See [Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 76).
54
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 55 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Adjusting the Black Balance
The black balance must be adjusted when:
You use your unit the first time.
Your unit has not been used for some time.
The ambient temperature has changed substantially.
The gain switchover value has been changed.
SYSTEM MODE has been changed.
1
Set the switches as illustrated below.
b
a. AUTO W/B BAL switch:
Used to perform ABB.
b. OUTPUT:
[CAM]
2
3
Tilt the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is positioned at
[ABB], then release it.
The switch returns to the central position with the black
balance automatically adjusted.
During adjustment, the viewfinder displays the following
message:
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
a
Notes
Ensure that the lens connector is connected and the
lens iris is CLOSE.
During a black balance adjustment, light is
automatically cut off.
During a black balance adjustment, the gain
switchover circuit is automatically switched.
The viewfinder screen may flicker and/or display
noise; this is not a failure.
If you find the black shading annoying after
performing an auto black balance adjustment, adjust
the black shading. To do so, go to the menu option
DETECTION (DIG), move the cursor (), then press
the jog dial button.
The menu option DETECTION (DIG) can be found in
the <BLACK SHADING> screen on the
MAINTENANCE page.
Note that pressing the ABB switch for longer than
8 seconds automatically performs an auto black
balance adjustment, followed by an automatic black
shading adjustment. (See the menu option SHD.ABB
SW CTL in [SW MODE] (page 193).)
However, when the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G,
optional) is connected, automatic black shading
cannot be executed even if the ABB switch is held
down.
To cancel the automatic black balance adjustment in
process (the viewfinder displays “ABB ACTIVE”), flip
the AUTO W/B BAL switch down to [ABB] again.
If automatic adjustment is canceled, the value in effect
before automatic adjustment will be used.
Retaining black balances
Each value in memory is retained even if the unit is turned
off.

Note
During adjustment, the lens iris automatically becomes
CLOSE.
4
The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds and the
following message will appear:
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ
The adjusted value is automatically stored in the
memory.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance
55
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 56 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting the Electronic Shutter
This section provides a description of the electronic shutter, together with setting and handling directions.
Shutter Modes
The table below lists the shutter modes in which the unit’s electronic shutter can be used as well as the shutter speeds which
can be selected.
To use the fixed shutter speed
To use the half shutter speed (HALF)
For eliminating flicker due to lighting
For shooting fast moving subjects clearly
For shooting images when adding effects as if taken with
film
Notes
To use the shutter speed of SYNCHRO SCAN
No matter in which mode the electronic shutter is used,
the higher the shutter speed, the lower the camera’s
sensitivity.
When the aperture is in the automatic mode, it will
increasingly open and the depth of focus will become
shallower as the shutter speed is increased.
By setting the shutter speed on the time axis (1/60, 1/100,
1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000), the frame rate can
be varied while keeping the exposure constant.
This is equivalent to Ramping (compensating for changes
in the frame rate using shutter angle) in a conventional film
camera.
For shooting monitor screens in a way that minimizes the
pattern of horizontal lines
For shooting images when adding effects to the subjects’
movement
SYNCHRO SCAN:
Shutter is set using angle (deg) irrespective of
frame rate.
SYNCHRO SCAN2:
Shutter is set using time (sec) irrespective of
frame rate.
Video system
SYSTEM
MODE
CAMERA
MODE
Fixed shutter speed
Half shutter
speed
Time/Angle display
Time display
60i
30P
1080-59.94i
24P
24PA
1080-23.98PsF 24P
1080-24PsF
1/60, 1/100,
1/120, 1/250,
1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000, HALF
180.0 deg, 172.8 deg,
144.0 deg, 120.0 deg,
90.0 deg, 45.0 deg
Select from the
14 types above
24P
50i
1080-50i
25P
1/50, 1/60,
1/120, 1/250,
1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000, HALF
180.0 deg, 172.8 deg,
144.0 deg, 120.0 deg,
90.0 deg, 45.0 deg
Select from the
14 types above
Variable range for SYNCHRO
SCAN
Time display
Angle
display
Variable range for SYNCHRO
SCAN2
Time display
1/120
1/61.7 - 1/7200
1/F* - 1/7200
1/60.0 - 1/250
1/F* - 1/250
1/60
1/30.9 - 1/3600
1/F* - 1/3600
1/30.0 - 1/250
1/F* - 1/250
1/48
1/24.7 - 1/2880
1/F* - 1/2880
1/24.0 - 1/250
1/F* - 1/250
1/48
1/24.7 - 1/2880
1/F* - 1/2880
1/24.0 - 1/250
1/F* - 1/250
1/48
1/24.7 - 1/2880
1/F* - 1/2880
1/48
1/24.7 - 1/2880
1/F* - 1/2880
1/100
1/51.4 - 1/6000
1/F* - 1/6000
1/50.2 - 1/250
1/F* - 1/250
1/50
1/25.7 - 1/3000
1/F*- 1/3000
1/25.2 - 1/250
1/F* - 1/250
3.0 350.0 deg
(In 0.5 deg
steps)
1/24.0 - 1/250
1/F* - 1/250
1/24.0 - 1/250
1/F* - 1/250
Angle
display
Angle not
displayed
* F displays the frame rate frequency for VFR. For example, if the VFR recording was done with a frame rate frequency of 15, the range of
the SYNCHRO SCAN will be from 1/15.
56
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting the Electronic Shutter
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 57 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed
The shutter speed in any shutter mode is set using the
SHUTTER switch.
In SYNCHRO SCAN/SYNCHRO SCAN2 mode, shutter
speed can be switched easily, using the SYNCHRO SCAN
adjustment buttons (+/–) on the side panel.
Note that the range of selectable shutter speeds may be predefined; whether or not to use the SYNCHRO SCAN mode
may be determined through the <SHUTTER SPEED> and
<SHUTTER SELECT> screens. These screens are found in
the CAM OPERATION page.
The selected shutter speed is retained even if the unit is
turned off.
2
Once more, press the SHUTTER switch towards [SEL].
Repeat this switchover until the desired mode or speed
appears in the viewfinder screen.
If all modes and speeds are available, the display
changes in the following order:
Normal mode
POSITION1
POSITION2
POSITION3
SYNCHRO SCAN2
mode
POSITION4
POSITION5
POSITION6
SYNCHRO SCAN
mode








See [Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 76).
Note
When recording using VFR, set the shutter speed to 1/60 or
1/100 to allow the recording to continue without any change
in brightness when the frame rate is changed mid-way
through recording.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Viewfinder displays relating to the shutter
 
 






1
Press the SHUTTER switch, positioned at [ON], towards
[SEL].
a
a. SHUTTER switch
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting the Electronic Shutter
57
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 58 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Placing the Unit in SYNCHRO SCAN Mode
To place the unit in SYNCHRO SCAN mode, follow the steps
below.
1
2
Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at [ON] towards
[SEL], to place the unit in SYNCHRO SCAN mode or
SYNCHRO SCAN2 mode.
In the SYNCHRO SCAN mode, it is possible to change
the shutter speed continuously by operating the
SYNCHRO SCAN (+/–) adjustment buttons.
a
b
a. SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment buttons (+/–)
b. SHUTTER switch
3
In SYNCHRO SCAN mode, the shutter speed display
can be switched between seconds and degrees.
For more details, refer to [SYNCHRO SCAN DISP.]
(page 185).
In SYNCHRO SCAN2 mode, the shutter speed can
only be displayed in seconds.
When the frame rate is low, pressing the SYNCHRO
SCAN adjustment buttons (+/–) to change the shutter
speed only gives a small change in the time, and
consequently the shutter value in the viewfinder
display may remain unchanged.
Note
When the VFR function is enabled, the variable ranges in
the SYNCHRO SCAN mode differs from those seen when
the VFR function is disabled.
58
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting the Electronic Shutter
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 59 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Assigning Functions to User Buttons
The USER MAIN, USER 1, USER 2, MARKER SELECT and
TEXT MEMO buttons can be assigned user-selected
functions.
To select desired functions, use the menu options which can
be found in the <USER SW> screen on the CAM
OPERATION page.
differences in color development when the DRS
function is turned on/off.
When the DRS function is turned on, Gamma mode,
the Knee function and the BLACK GAMMA function
are not available.
ASSIST:

Note
When the ASSIST function is turned on, a graph is
displayed on the bottom right of the viewfinder and the
LCD monitor. Adjust the focus ring on the lens so that
the graph comes further right.
C.TEMP:
Selectable Functions
For more details about functions which can be allocated to
the buttons, refer to [USER SW] (page 192).
S.BLK:
B.GAMMA:
Y GET:
DRS:
No function assigned.
Iris Override function assigned.
The target (reference) value in Auto Iris mode
must be changed.
To change the target value, put the unit into
this mode and press the jog dial button. Turn
the jog dial button clockwise or anti-clockwise
to change the value. The iris indication section
of the viewfinder screen displays “+”, “+ +”,
“–”, or “– –”.
When the desired value is displayed, stop
turning the jog dial button. Then, press the
dial button to accept that value.
+:
Iris opens up by 0.5.
+ +:
Iris opens up by 1.
–:
Iris closes down by 0.5.
– –:
Iris closes down by 1.
No indication:
The reference value is used.
Super Black function assigned.
This function lowers the black level to the
pedestal level or below.
The black gamma function is allocated. This
function highlights the black gradations.
BLACK GAMMA is set to “+6”, and B.GAMMA
RANGE is set to “3”, regardless of the values
set in the BLACK GAMMA item on the menu
(<LOW SETTING> screen, <MID SETTING>
screen and <HIGH SETTING> screen on the
PAINT page).
Function of indicating the brightness level of
the center marker assigned.
The function of the dynamic range stretcher is
allocated.
The function is allocated to compress the
video level with high brightness and stretched
the dynamic range.
VFR:
FRATE:
VF GAM:
The function to switch to the mode that allows
the jog dial button to change the assigned
color temperature. It is useful for intentionally
changing the color temperature after adjusting
the white balance.
To change the color temperature, press the
user button with this assigned function, and
then press the jog dial button.
The color temperature indicated on the
viewfinder display is highlighted and starts
blinking, indicating that the color temperature
can be changed. While the indication is
blinking, the jog dial button can be turned to
change the color temperature. At this time, the
value set for the position ([PRST], [A], or [B])
to which the WHITE BAL switch is set is also
changed.
The function of switching the VFR function on/
off is assigned. For more details about the
VFR function, refer to [Variable Frame Rate
(VFR) Recording Function] (page 38).
When “ON” has been selected in the VFR
menu option, a function of switching to the
frame rate set in USR SW F.RATE is
assigned.
For example, if you have set FRAME RATE to
“24P” and USR SW F.RATE to “12P” for the
VFR function, you can use this button to
switch between 12P and 24P when the VFR
function is enabled. FRAME RATE and USR
SW F.RATE can be set from the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
When “FILM-REC” has been selected in the
GAMMA MODE SEL menu option, telecine
conversion correction is performed on the
viewfinder video. GAMMA MODE SEL can be
set from the <GAMMA> screen of the PAINT
page.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
 






INH:
I.OVR:
The function to turn on or off of the focus
assist indication is assigned.
Notes
Since the DRS function compresses the video levels
of sections with high brightness, there are slight
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Assigning Functions to User Buttons
59
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 60 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
AUDIO CH1: Function of switching the input signal source
for audio channel 1 assigned.
Pressing the button switches the input signal
in the following order: FRONT W.L. REAR. Note that the AUDIO IN switch can
also be used to change the input signal: later
specification takes precedence.
AUDIO CH2: Function of switching the input signal source
for audio channel 2 assigned.
Pressing the button switches the input signal
in the following order: FRONT W.L. REAR. Note that the AUDIO IN switch can
also be used to change the input signal: later
specification takes precedence.
REC SW:
Function of the REC START button assigned.
RET SW:
Function of the RET button at the lens
assigned.
PRE REC:
PRE RECORDING switch on/switch off
function assigned.
SLOT SEL: Function of switching the target P2 card
among multiple cards assigned. Not available
when recording with the VFR function is “ON”.
PC MODE: The function to turn on or off the assigned
USB device or USB host mode.
Switching between the USB device and USB
host modes is set by selecting the PC MODE
SELECT menu option in the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
TEXT MEMO:Function of switching the text memo function
on/off is assigned. For more details about the
text memo function, refer to [Text Memo
Function] (page 47). This switching function
can only be assigned to the TEXT MEMO
button.
VF MARK: Function to select A, B or OFF as the marker
for recording in the viewfinder. The A or B
marker type is set using the <VF MARKER>
screen of the VF page. This switching function
can only be assigned to the MARKER
SELECT button.
Notes
When the remote controller, AJ-RC10G (optional), is
connected and I.OVR or C.TEMP is assigned to the user
button on the side of the AJ-RC10G, operation of the jog
dial button on the main unit is disabled.
The following functions are turned off when the power of
the main unit is switched off.
I.OVR/S.BLK/B GAMMA/Y GET/DRS/ASSIST/C.TEMP/
FRATE/VF GAM
With regard to C.TEMP, note that the changes in color
temperature will be stored.
60
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Assigning Functions to User Buttons
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 61 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting
Recording Levels
This unit is capable of recording 4 independent audio channels in all recording formats except for native recording with VFR.
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch is positioned at [AUTO], the recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2 are
automatically adjusted. To manually adjust the recording levels, position the switch at [MAN]. Note that the recording levels for
audio channels 3 and 4 are selected through a menu option.
Note
4-channel sound is recorded on P2 cards.
The input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1, 2, 3,
and 4 are selected with the AUDIO IN switch. For more
information, see [Audio (input) Function Section] (page 17).
f
 











a
b
c
 
e
d
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Specific audio settings are performed through the <MIC/
AUDIO1> and <MIC/AUDIO2> screens on the MAIN
OPERATION page.
For more information, see [MAIN OPERATION] (page 195).
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Selecting Audio Input Signals
Display window
MONITOR CH1/3 / ST / CH2/4 selector switch
MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4 selector switch
AUDIO IN switch (CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4)
AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 controls
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch











Notes
Four-channel-recorded audio signals are SDI-output as
they are.
When using VFR with native recording, audio cannot be
recorded or output.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels
61
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 62 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Adjusting Recording Levels
To adjust the recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2,
follow the steps below.
1
Position the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4selector switch at [CH1/2] so that the audio level meter
on the display window will provide CH1 and CH2
indications. Ensure that the channel indications
displayed in the window are “1” and “2”.
Whether to enable or disable the FRONT AUDIO
LEVEL control must be preset through menu options
FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2. Note that this
control is factory-disabled.
The menu options are found in the <MIC/AUDIO1>
screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
2
3
Position the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch at [MAN].
While checking the audio channel level meter in the
display window or the audio level meter in the
viewfinder, adjust the AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 control.
Note that if the level exceeds the top bar (0 dB), the
word “OVER” illuminates to show that the input level is
excessive. The adjustment made in such a way that the
maximum level will not reach the 0 dB bar.
Audio level meter on the display window
NDF SLAVE HOLD
HD GPS
CTL VTCG TIME DATE P-iREC
10
h Y
MEDIA
BATT
minM
s D
frm
F
E
F
OP-SLOT 1
LOOP
F : 1 - - - R : 2 - - - -
62
LINE
When operating the unit without a sound recordist, it is
recommended that the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control
should be used to adjust the audio level.
Preset the channel to be adjusted, and use the FRONT
AUDIO LEVEL control to adjust the audio level while
checking the audio level meter in the viewfinder to ensure
that the level does not become excessive.
 











MIC
AGC ON
OFF
AGC/LIMITER OFF
LIMITER ON
2
- - - +
Input level
AGC ON
40
-dB
Audio level meter in the viewfinder
The following table shows the effects on the recording level
for audio channels 3 and 4 that depend on the settings and
input levels specified through the menu options AUTO
LEVEL CH3 and AUTO LEVEL CH4. Note that the recording
level cannot be adjusted manually.
These options are found in the <MIC/AUDIO1> screen on
the MAIN OPERATION page.
ON
30
OO
CH3 and CH4 Recording Levels
AUTO LEVEL
CH3/CH4
20
E
Selecting Function for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control
This function enables the recording level to be adjusted
using the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control.
To select this function, perform menu operations to open the
<MIC/AUDIO1> screen from the MAIN OPERATION page,
and set whether to enable or disable the FRONT AUDIO
LEVEL controls for the system selected as the input signals
using the FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2 items.
OVER
0
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 63 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting Time Data
The unit supports time codes, user bits, date, and time (real time) data, which are recorded as data for the sub-code area,
VIDEO AUX area, and clip metadata files. It also includes a CTL counter and camera ID.
Description of time data
Time code
Note
The CTL counter will measure total recording time after
resetting in the recording operation. At playback, CTL is
counted from the start of the first clip that can be played
back. This can be used to find the current playback position.
Camera ID
The camera ID can be set with 10 characters 3 lines,
which can be superimposed on the color bar video. It can be
also superimposed along with date and time data.
When using VFR, native recording is limited to Rec run. Free
run operation is not possible.
User bits
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
The TCG switch can be used to switch between Rec run and
Free run.
Free run:
The time code always advances even when
the power is turned off. It can be handled as
time. It can be slaved to the time code input
through the TC IN connector.
Rec run:
The time code is recorded as sequential
values regenerated as the time code for a clip
recorded on a P2 card.
CTL counter
The unit separately includes 2 types of user bits: one (UB) is
recorded in the sub-code area and the other (VITC UB) in
the VIDEO AUX area.
Each user bits can be recorded as any of the following: a
user defined value, time, date, same value as the time code,
frame rate information for camera shooting, externally input
value (through the TC IN), and value regenerated as the
user bits recorded in a clip on a P2 card.
The unit includes only one user defined value. If user
defined values are selected for both the UB and VITC UB,
then the same value is used.
Types of UB can be selected in UB MODE and types of
VITC UB can be selected in VITC UB MODE, respectively.
However, in the following cases, at least one of UB and VITC
UB is always frame rate information in order to support
editors (PC software of the like) which make use of
information about the frame rate employed at shooting.
For recording 24P/24PA in 1080i mode, VITC UB is fixed
to frame rate information.
In Native mode, VITC UB is fixed to frame rate
information.
Date and time (real time)
The built-in clock maintains the date and time. When the
GPS unit AJ-GPS910G is installed, the built-in clock is
corrected with accurate date and time information from the
GPS.
The built-in clock is used not only to keep track of the Free
run time code when the power is switched off and to provide
time and date data for the user bits, but also as a time
reference when generating files during clip recording and to
determine the arrangement and playback order of
thumbnails.
It is also used to generate clip metadata and UMIDs (Unique
Material Identifiers) in the VIDEO AUX area.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
63
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 64 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Recording time code and user bits
The following shows recording time codes and user bits for different input signal formats, and SYSTEM MODE and CAMERA
MODE settings.
System setting
CAMERA
SYSTEM
REC FORMAT
MODE
MODE
VFR
OFF
60i
DVCPROHD/
60i
108059.94i
AVC-I 100/60i
AVC-I 50/60i
Disabled
59.94i
1-30FRAME
59.94i
(Over 59.94i)
24P
Fixed
Disabled
to OFF
23.98P
(Over 59.94i)
24PA
Fixed
Disabled
to OFF
23.98PA
(Over 59.94i)
OFF
Disabled
59.94i
As per the TC
MODE*2
ON
1-30FRAME
59.94i (Valid for
all frames)
Always non-drop
frame*3
OFF
Disabled
29.97P-29.97PN As per the TC
(Native)
MODE*2
ON
1-30FRAME
30
As per the TC
0.997-29.97PMODE
29.97PN (Native)
Always Rec run
OFF
Disabled
23.98P- 23.98PN Always non-drop
(Native)
frame*3
ON
1-30FRAME
Always non-drop 24
0.997-29.97Pframe
23.98PN (Native)
Always Rec run
OFF
Disabled
23.98P- 23.98PN Always non-drop
(Native)
frame*3
ON
1-30FRAME or
24FRAME
0.997-23.98P23.98PN (Native) Always non-drop 24
or
frame
0.997-29.97PAlways Rec run
23.98PN (Native)
OFF
Disabled
24P- 24PN
(Native)
Always non-drop
frame*3
ON
1-30FRAME or
24FRAME
1-24P- 24PN
(Native) or
1-30P- 30PN
(Native)
Always non-drop 24
frame
Always Rec run
OFF
Disabled
50i
ON
1-25FRAME
50i (Over 50i)
60i
AVC-I 100/
24PN
24P
AVC-I 50/24PN
50i
25P
50i
AVC-I 100/
25PN
25P
AVC-I 50/25PN
User bit (UB) operation
As per the TC
MODE*2
29.97P
(Over 59.94i)
AVC-I 100/
108024PN
24P
23.98PsF
AVC-I 50/24PN
1080-50i AVC-I 100/50i
AVC-I 50/50i
Recording
frame mode*7
Fixed
Disabled
to OFF
AVC-I 100/
24PN
24P
AVC-I 50/24PN
DVCPROHD/
50i
VFR FRAME
RATE
30P
AVC-I 100/
30PN
30P
AVC-I 50/30PN
108024PsF
ON
Time code (TC) operation
No. of frames of
Sub-codes and
UB in VIDEO
TC during
No. of frames of No. of frames of UB in sub-code
VIDEO AUX
AUX area (VITC
recording and the output TC the displayed TC
area
area TC
UB)
presetting
Always non-drop 30
frame*3
30
30/24 switchable
25P (Over 50i)
OFF
Disabled
50i
ON
1-25FRAME
50i (Over 50i)
Always Rec run
OFF
Disabled
25P- 25PN
(Native)
As per the TC
MODE*2
ON
1-25FRAME
1-25P- 25PN
(Native)
Always Rec run
As per the TC
MODE*2
As per the VITC
UB MODE
Always frame
rate information*1
30
30/24 switchable
As per the UB
MODE*4*6
Always frame
rate information*5
HD SDI A · B: 24 Recording/
Otherwise: 30
Playback: 24
As per the UB
MODE*4*6
Always frame
rate information*5
HD SDI A · B: 24 Recording/
Otherwise: 30
Playback: 24
As per the UB
MODE*4
Always frame
rate information*5
As per the UB
MODE*4
As per the VITC
UB MODE
As per the UB
MODE*4*6
Always frame
rate information*5
As per the UB
MODE*4*6
Always frame
rate information*5
30
Recording: 24 fixed
Playback:
30/24 switchable
As per the TC
MODE*2
Fixed
Disabled
to OFF
As per the UB
MODE*4
25
25
25
*1 If the menu option FRAME RATE UB on the <OPTION> screen is set to “MENU”, then recording is performed as per the UB MODE or
VITC UB MODE. Note that, with this setting, information required by editors (PC editing software) is not recorded.
*2 For Free run, the time code is slaved to the time code input through the TC IN connector.
*3 For Free run, the time code is slaved to the time code input through the TC IN connector if it is a non-drop frame.
*4 When the menu option UB MODE is set to “EXT”, then the bits are slaved to the user bits input through the TC IN connector.
*5 Regardless of the menu settings, frame rate information is always recorded. During playback, the information is output after being
converted into pull-down frame rate information.
*6 When the menu option UB MODE is set to “FRM RATE”, the pull-down frame rate information read out from the UB in the VAUX area is
output during playback.
*7 For details on this item, refer to [Recording formats and output connector signal formats] (page 50).
64
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 65 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting of the user bits
The user bits (UB) to be recorded in the sub-code area are
selected through the menu option UB MODE. The user bits
(VITC UB) to be recorded in the VIDEO AUX area are
selected through the menu option VITC UB MODE.
a
b
c
d
e
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1
2
3
HOLD switch
DISPLAY switch
Display window
TCG switch
Cursor and SET buttons
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
USER (UB MODE only)
The included user value is recorded. A user value is
input through the display window. For more information
about how to input a user value, see [Inputting a user
value] (page 65). The recorded user value is retained
even if the power is turned off.
TIME
The time kept by the built-in clock is recorded.
DATE
The hour digits for date and time kept by the built-in
clock are recorded.
EXT (UB MODE only)
The user bits value input through the TC IN connector is
recorded.
The included user’s value will also be this input value.
TCG
The time code value is recorded.
FRM RATE
The frame rate information for camera shooting is
recorded. For more information, see [Frame rate
information recorded in user bits] (page 66).
REGEN
The user bits last recorded on the current target P2 card
is read and recorded as is.
USER/EXT (VITC UB MODE only)
The included user’s value is recorded as the user bits
for the VIDEO AUX area. It is the same value as the
user bits indicated when the option UB MODE is set to
“USER” or “EXT”.
Inputting a user value
Position the DISPLAY switch at [UB].
Position the TCG switch at [SET].
When the left digit starts blinking you can change the
value.
Use cursor buttons to set the user bits.
Z button:
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.
Y button:
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.
U button:
Advances the blinking number by one digit.
V button:
Winds back the blinking number by one digit.
4
5
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN].
Go to the <TC/UB> screen from the MAIN OPERATION
page, and set the menu option UB MODE to “USER”.
Notes
When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET], thumbnails
cannot be manipulated.
To confirm VITC UB, press the HOLD switch to display
VTCG on the display window.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
65
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 66 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
Retaining the user bits
午後6時38分
For 1080i
The data set for the user bits are automatically saved and
retained even if the unit is turned off.
Frame rate: 24P Over 60i (2:3)
Starting field for the updated frame
Time code frame digit
Frame rate information recorded in user bits
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
•••
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Image
If video information to be recorded based on the frame rate
set through the menu option FRAME RATE or CAMERA
MODE is recorded in the user bits, it can be edited with
editing tools (e.g. PC editing software). In 1080i mode, the
frame rate information for the user bits recorded in the
VIDEO AUX area are used.
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
Sequence No.
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
•••
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
10
•••
01
00
10
10
01
01
00
25
26
27
28
29
Updated frame information
10
10
01
01
00
10
Time code frame digit
The frame rate and video pull-down menu are linked to the
time code and user bits as follows:
00
01
02
03
04
05
06

d
e f
a. Checking information for the 6 digits at right.
b. Fixed value
c. Sequence No.
0 to 4:
24P, 24PA
Fixed at F:
In all other modes
d. Frame rate
e. Camera shooting mode
f. Media management information
Updated frame/Effective frame information
REC START/STOP mark
•••
23
24
Image
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
b c
Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Frame rate: 24PA Over 60i (2:3:3:2)
Frame rate information
a
•••
•••
Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De
Sequence No.
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
•••
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
10
•••
00
10
10
10
01
00
10
Updated frame information
10
10
01
00
10
10
Frame rate: 30P Over 60i (2:2)
25P Over 50i (2:2)
Time code frame digit
00
01
02
•••
Image
Ao Ae Bo Be Co Ce
•••
Updated frame information
10
10
10
•••
Note
During playback of clips recorded in native recording frame
rate information of user bits is converted according to the
image pull down and then output.
Example:
Recording

Playback

# indicates sequence Nos. 0 to 4.
66
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 67 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and Time
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
Press the HOLD button to display DATE in the display
window.
Time
difference
Area
00:00 Greenwich
Time
difference
Area
–12:00 Kwajalein
+00:30
–11:30
+01:00 Central Europe
–11:00 Midway Island
+01:30
–10:30
Use the cursor and SET buttons to set the year, month
and day (Y/M/D).
Note that any later than 2030 cannot be set.
+02:00 Eastern Europe
–10:00 Hawaii
Position the TCG switch at [SET].
+02:30
–09:30 Marquesas Islands
+03:00 Moscow
–09:00 Alaska
Z button:
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.
Y button:
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.
U button:
Advances the blinking number by one digit.
V button:
Winds back the blinking number by one digit.
+03:30 Tehran
–08:30
+04:00 Abu Dhabi
–08:00 Los Angeles
+04:30 Kabul
–07:30
+05:00 Islamabad
–07:00 Denver
+06:30 Yangon
–05:30
Press the HOLD button to display TIME in the display
window.
+07:00 Bangkok
–05:00 New York
Use the cursor buttons to set the hour, minute and
second (h/min/s).
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN]. The
internal clock starts at the moment the switch position is
changed.
Press the HOLD button to display a time zone (time
difference between local time and Greenwich Mean
Time) in the display window.
9 Position the TCG switch at [SET].
10 Use the U and V buttons to set the desired hours and
minutes ahead of (no sign) or behind (– sign) the
Greenwich Mean Time.
Example: If the local time is 5 hours behind Greenwich
Mean Time, set the time zone to “5:00 –”.
The time zone is always recorded, together with the
date and time, as metadata.
See the table at right to set the time zone according to
your local time.
11 Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN] to
accept the time zone.
Notes
When using the unit for the first time, be sure to perform
this setting beforehand. Do not change the setting during
use of the unit.
When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET], thumbnails
cannot be manipulated.
+05:30 Bombay
–06:30
+06:00 Dacca
–06:00 Chicago
+07:30
–04:30
+08:00 Beijing
–04:00 Halifax
+08:30
–03:30 Newfoundland Island
+09:00 Tokyo
–03:00 Buenos Aires
+09:30 Darwin
–02:30
+10:00 Guam
–02:00 Mid-Atlantic
+10:30 Lord Howe Island
–01:30
+11:00 Solomon Islands
–01:00 Azores Islands
+11:30 Norfolk Island
–00:30
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
5
Position the DISPLAY switch at [UB].
+12:00 New Zealand
+12:45 Chatham Islands
+13:00
Notes
In step 4, if the TCG switch is positioned at [F-RUN] or [RRUN], this also activate the internal clock.
To cancel date, time and time zone settings in process,
hold down the SET button and position the TCG switch at
[F-RUN] or [R-RUN].
Clock accuracy fluctuates between about ±30 seconds per
month when the power is turned off. If more accurate
timekeeping is required, check the time when the power is
turned on and, if necessary, reset the clock.
When the GPS unit AJ-GPS910G is installed, and if it
successfully receives time information, the internal clock
keeps accurate (local) time based on the received time
(Greenwich Mean Time) and the time zone. If the date and
time differ from the actual local time, the time zone may
not be set correctly. Check again, to see if the time zone is
set correctly. (The date and time need not be set again.)
The built-in clock operates for several years on a lithium
battery built into the unit. When the lithium battery is
exhausted, the viewfinder indicates the message
“BACKUP BATT EMPTY” when the power is turned on.
For more information, see [Maintenance] (page 155).
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
67
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 68 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting the Time Code
1
2
3
Position the DISPLAY switch at [TC].
Position the TCG switch at [SET].
Set the menu option TC MODE to “DF” or “NDF”. “DF”
steps the time code in drop frame mode, and “NDF”
steps it in non-drop frame mode. However, the camera
always operates in “NDF” for 24P, 24PA and 24PN
(Native) modes.
The menu option TC MODE can be found in the <TC/
UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
Note
4
5
Switching between “DF” and “NDF” is operative only
when the system frequency of the unit is set to
59.94 Hz.
Use the cursor buttons to set the time code.
The time code setting range extends from 00:00:00:00
to 23:59:59:29 (59.94 Hz), 23:59:59:23 (24PN) or to
23:59:59:24 (50 Hz).
Z button:
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.
Y button:
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.
U button:
Advances the blinking number by one digit.
V button:
Winds back the blinking number by one digit.
Change the position of the TCG switch.
[F-RUN] steps the time code in Free run mode, and [RRUN] set it in Rec run mode.
Regeneration function using REC REVIEW
If the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to “PRESET”, if the
time code has been set or reset, or if the time code has been
switched from Free run to Rec run, it is possible to
regenerate the time code as the last time code of a clip
recorded on the P2 card.
This action requires you to preset the RET SW menu option
on the <SW MODE> screen to “R.REVIEW” and the REC
REVIEW REGEN menu option on the <TC/UB> screen to
“ON”.
1
2
3
Make sure the P2 card to record the data. To regenerate
the time code of the last recorded clip when more than
one P2 card is inserted, press the THUMBNAIL button
to open the thumbnail screen.
Check the P2 card which recorded the last clip
displayed on the screen, and then switch the slot with
the user button assigned the SLOT SEL function so that
data will be recorded on the P2 card.
Press the RET button on the lens. The message “TC
REGEN” is displayed in the viewfinder. During the next
recording, the time code of the last recorded clip on the
card will be regenerated.
Notes
When a card with recorded data is changed, the time code
of the last recorded clip on the changed P2 card will be
regenerated.
This function is disabled during recording or Free run.
Notes
When the unit is in the 24P or 24PA mode, time code
settings are adjusted to the 5-frame unit. For 24PN
(Native) mode, it is adjusted for counting by the 4frame unit. The time code cannot be set when
recording in the 24P, 24PA, and 24PN (Native)
formats.
When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET],
thumbnails cannot be manipulated.
Time code function during battery replacement
Even during battery replacement, the backup mechanism
functions, allowing the unit to operate continuously.
If SYSTEM MODE is changed, a free-run time code may
shift. After turning on the power again, confirm the time code
and reset if necessary.
Note
Regeneration of Time Code
When the TCG switch is positioned to [R-RUN], the time
code recorded on the last frame of the last recorded clip
(with the latest recording date) on the P2 card is read, and
this time code can be used again.
When the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to “REGEN”
and a P2 card is removed or inserted or the target recording
card is changed with the user button assigned the SLOT
SEL function, the same time code is added to the last
recorded clip on the target P2 card. When no clips have
been recorded, recording starts from a value generated by a
time code generator in the unit.
The menu option FIRST REC TC can be found in the <TC/
UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
68
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
When the POWER switch has been switched [ON] [OFF]
[ON], the backup accuracy of the time code in Free run
mode is about ±2 frames.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 69 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Externally Locking the Time Code
The unit’s internal time code generator can be locked to an
external generator. In addition, the external time code
generator can be locked to the unit’s internal generator.
Example of connections for external locking
As the figure shows, connect both the reference video signal
and reference time code.
Example 1:
When locking onto an external signal
TC IN
Reference video signal
GENLOCK IN
MON OUT (VBS)
Setting of GL PHASE
COMPOSIT
b
Setting of GL PHASE
a. Reference time code
b. Reference video signal
Item
Note
In place of the HD Y reference signal, composite video
signals can be input as the reference video signal.
Example 2:
When connecting a multiple number of units
and using one of them as the reference unit
TC OUT
Reference unit
c
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
Variable
range
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
a
Note
The system can be configured with multiple units by opening
the <GENLOCK> screen from the SYSTEM SETTING page
and setting the GL PHASE item to the connector using menu
operations.
The phase of the time code can correspond to the VBS
output signals of the MON OUT connector.
However, the same value should commonly be set to the GL
PHASE for all cameras. If different values coexist in the
system, the shooting timing may not correspond to each
other.
Note that when the unit is in the 1080/23.98PsF or 1080/
24PsF modes, it is not possible to lock the time code using
the VBS connection with one unit as a reference unit in the
manner shown in Example 2. When using these modes,
connect the unit in the manner shown in Example 4 and
Example 6.
Remarks
For selecting the output signals that lock
GL PHASE HD SDI
COMPOSIT phases to the signals that are input in the
GENLOCK IN connector.
HD SDI:
For locking the HD SDI signals
to the GENLOCK input.
For the down converter output
signals, the start position of the
video delays by about 90 lines.
COMPOSIT:
For locking the down converter
output signals to the GENLOCK
input.
For the HD SDI output signals,
the start position of the video
gains by about 90 lines.
Note, however, that in 1080/
23.98PsF mode and 1080/
24PsF mode, the phase is
locked to HD SDI even if
“COMPOSIT” has been
selected.
TC OUT
c
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
c
TC OUT
To the next camera
c. MON OUT (VBS)
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
69
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 70 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
As a result of processing to convert the video captured by
the imaging devices from a progressive signal to an interlace
signal, video signal delays will occur in the camera.
Since time is required for making the 2:3 pull-down from the
24P frame, there is a video signal delay in the camera.
When recording from a device that can record images
without a delay and the unit is connected in parallel, it is
necessary to synchronize the time code. To set this timing,
open the <TC/UB> screen from the MAIN OPERATION
page and set it in the TC VIDEO SYNCHRO item.
Set by referring to the connection example.
Setting of the TC VIDEO SYNCHRO item
Variable
range
Item
For setting to correct the time code
according to the delay of video signals.
0:
Do not correct.
1:
To delay the time code to be
input according to the timing of
the video images.
2:
To forward the time code to be
output according to the timing of
the video images.
3:
To delay the time code to be
input and forward the time code
to be output, respectively,
according to the timing of the
video images.
TC VIDEO 0
SYNCHRO 1
2
3
Example 3:
Remarks
When the unit and an external device are
locked to the external time code generator,
which is connected externally, and when
simultaneous recording is made by using the
TC OUT output signals.
Reference video signal
Note
In the 1080/23.98PsF or 1080/24PsF mode, set the
23.98PsF or 24PsF HD signal as the reference signal and
input a 24 frame time code to the TC IN input.
If the VTR is capable of recording the HD SDI time code, it is
possible to receive the time code output from the HD SDI A ·
B output, and synchronously record video with the time
code. In this case, it is not necessary to supply a time code
output signal to the VTR.
Example 4:
When the unit and an external device are locked to the
external time code generator and when several units of
the camera are connected in a cascade configuration.
Reference video signal
External time code generator
TCG
TC OUT
Device that records images without a
delay
TC IN
DAT
AJ-HPX3700
1st unit and later
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
TC OUT
AJ-HPX3700
2nd unit and later
External time code generator
TCG
TC OUT
Device that records images without a
delay
TC IN
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
TC IN
DAT
GENLOCK IN
TC OUT
AJ-HPX3700
Settings of the TC VIDEO
SYNCHRO item: 1
AJ-HPX3700
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
TC IN
TC OUT
GENLOCK IN
MON OUT
or
HD SDI A · B
TC OUT
TC IN
VTR etc.
VIDEO IN
HD SDI IN
REF IN
70
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 71 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Example 5:
When an external device is locked to the time code
generator of the unit.
Example 6:
When an external device is locked to the time code
generator of unit, which is connected in a cascade
configuration.
Reference video signal
Reference video signal
To be connected if necessary
To be connected if necessary
TCG
TC OUT
TCG
TC OUT
AJ-HPX3700
Settings of the TC VIDEO
SYNCHRO item: 3
AJ-HPX3700
1st unit
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
TC OUT
GENLOCK IN
A device that synchronizes with the TC
IN input and capable to record without
delay (DAT etc.)
TC IN
TC OUT
AJ-HPX3700
From the 2nd unit to
the (n–1)-th unit
DAT
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
TC IN
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
TC IN
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
GENLOCK IN
TC OUT
AJ-HPX3700
n-th unit
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
TC OUT
A device that synchronizes with the TC IN
input and capable to record without delay
(such as DAT or a camera recorder)
TC IN
DAT
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
71
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 72 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
To externally lock the time code
Follow the steps below.
1
2
3
4
5
Turn on the POWER switch.
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN].
Position the DISPLAY switch at [TC].
Set the menu option GENLOCK to “EXT”.
This option can be found in the <GENLOCK> screen on
the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Supply a phase-relationship reference time code (that
conforms to the time code requirements) and reference
video signals to the TC IN and GENLOCK IN
connectors, respectively.
Now the built-in time code generator is locked with the
reference time code.
From about 10 seconds after locking the time code
generator stays locked even if the supply of external
reference time code is discontinued.
Notes
When the time code generator is externally locked, the
time code instantly becomes locked with the external time
code, and the counter displays the external time code
value. Do not begin recording in the few seconds it takes
for the synch generator to stabilize.
Be sure to enter the non-drop-frame time code to
externally lock the time code in the 24P, 24PA or 24PN
(Native) mode. Externally locking the drop-frame time
code is not permitted.
Video quality may be degraded momentarily while
externally locking to adjust the 5-frame cycle. This is not
abnormal.
While recording data in the 24P, 24PA, or Native modes, it
is impossible to lock the time code externally. Lock it
before recording.
Note also that if the unit is used with PRE REC MODE set
to “ON” in any of the 24P, 24PA or Native modes,
changing the time code from Rec run to Free run or slave
locking the time code before recording may result in a
flickering video or a stopped code being recorded.
In the 1080/23.98PsF mode, the 23.94 Hz non-drop frame
time code should be supplied. In the 1080/24PsF mode,
the 24 Hz non-drop frame time code should be supplied.
72
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
Setting the user bits when the time code is
externally locked
When the TCG switch is positioned to [F-RUN], only the time
code is locked to an external time code. To lock the user bits
to an externally input value, the UB MODE and VITC UB
MODE menu options must be set to “EXT” and “USER/EXT”,
respectively.
The menu option UB MODE and VITC UB MODE can be
found in the <TC/UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION
page.
To unlock the externally locked time code
Discontinue external time code supply, then position the
TCG switch at [R-RUN].
Cautions in switching the power source from
battery to external power supply
Connect the DC IN socket with the external power supply
before removing the battery pack, in order to keep the time
code generator energized. If the battery pack is removed
first, there is no guarantee that the time code will stay
externally locked.
External synchronization of the camera when the
time code is externally locked
When the time code is externally locked, the reference video
signals input through the GENLOCK IN connector gen-lock
the camera.
Notes
To externally lock the unit, as the master device, with more
than one unit, the mode must be the same as that of the
camera. Note that in a system using both interlaced and
progressive scanning, there may be breaks in the video
and time code.
When using the MON OUT connector to output reference
signals, position the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side
panel at [CAM].
Superimpose of time codes
To display the time code in the viewfinder or the LCD monitor
when recording or during playback, set TC in <VF
INDICATOR3> to “TCG”, “TCR”, or “TCG/TCR”.
To include the time code indication in the MON OUT or HD
SDI A · B outputs, set the MON OUT CHARACTER switch to
[ON], and set HD SDI A · B CHAR to “A”, “B” or “BOTH” from
the <OUTPUT SEL> screen using the menu.
To display the time code while the color bar is displayed, set
TC ON COLOR BAR in <VF INDICATOR3> to “ON”.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 73 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Providing an ID to the Camera
The camera ID is specified through the <CAMERA ID>
screen.
The ID can include up to 10 alphanumeric characters,
symbols, and/or spaces.
Note
When the settings menu is displayed, outputting color bar
signals does not indicate the camera ID.
1
Go to the <CAMERA ID> screen from the CAM
OPERATION page.



2
3
4
7
8
Notes
When the menu option CAMERA ID is set to “BAR”,
the camera ID is recorded together with color bar
signals.This menu option is accessible from the <VF
INDICATOR1> screen on the VF page.
The ID POSITION menu option can be used to select
a position where the camera ID is superimposed on
the color bar. The ID POSITION option can be
accessed through the <VF INDICATOR1> screen on
the VF page.
When the TIME/DATE menu option is set to “ON”, the
camera ID along with the date and time information
are superimposed on the color bar. The TIME/DATE
option can be accessed through the <VF
INDICATOR1> screen on the VF page.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
options ID1: - ID3:.
Press the jog dial button. The arrow (cursor) moves to
the ID entry area, allowing you to enter an ID.
Turn the jog dial button until a desired character
appears. The characters that appear are switched in the
following order:
Space:
Ð
Alphabetical characters:
Ð
Numerals:
Ð
Symbols:
5
6
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
 
9
†
A to Z
0 to 9
', >, <, /, -
Press the jog dial button to accept a desired character.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
next digit (clockwise), and repeat steps 4 - 5 to set
characters.
To change an input character, turn the jog dial button to
move the arrow (cursor) to the appropriate character
and carry out steps 4 and 5.
When all the characters are set, turn the jog dial button
to move the arrow (cursor) to : .
Pressing the jog dial button brings the arrow (cursor)
back to the options ID1: - ID3:.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
73
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 74 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting UMID Information
The unit supports UMID metadata. You need to specify as
UMID information the country where you live (using up to
3 characters), organization or company (up to 4 characters)
and user name (up to 4 characters). For the country name,
you must use abbreviations prescribed in the ISO3166
Country Code*.
Here are some examples of the correct method for
specifying a user name:
*
Examples:
China
U.S.A.
Canada
Japan
CHN
USA
CAN
JPN




 

1
2
3
4
Go to the <UMID SET/INFO> screen from the MAIN
OPERATION page.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
option USER.
Press the jog dial button. The arrow (cursor) moves to
the user entry area, allowing you to enter a user name.
Turn the jog dial button until a desired character
appears. The characters appear in the following order:
Space:
Ð
Alphabetical characters:
Ð
Numerals:
Ð
Symbols:
†
A to Z
0 to 9
', >, <, /, -
Note
The COUNTRY entry can only include alphabetical
characters and spaces.
5
6
7
8
74
Press the jog dial button to accept a desired character.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
next digit (clockwise), and repeat steps 4 to 5 to set
characters.
To change an input character, go back to step 3.
When the last character is set, press the jog dial button
to bring the arrow (cursor) back to the option USER.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 75 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
CTL Count Setting and Display
By setting the DISPLAY switch to [CTL], CTL count is
displayed on the time count indication of the LCD display
window.
The CTL count is displayed in ±12 hours with non-dropframe.
The playback order of clips recorded on a P2 card is not
linear as for VTRs. It is organized according to thumbnail
operations or exchanging P2 cards, and the priority of
recorded clips will be altered. Therefore, different CTL
counts are displayed for recording mode and playback
mode, respectively.
Recording CTL count is displayed during recording mode
(REC, REC/PAUSE, STOP and REC REVIEW), and the
count continues from the end point of the previous
recording. Recording CTL count is retained even if the
power is turned off. When the power is next turned on, the
count continues from the previous value.
Notes
If the RESET button is pressed while the recording CTL
count is being displayed, only the recording CTL count is
reset. Note that reset is disabled during the REC REVIEW
operation.
24 frames are counted in the 24PN (Native) mode.
CTL count for the playback mode
(playback CTL)
During playback mode (PLAY, FF, REW, PLAY/PAUSE),
playback CTL count is displayed.
Whenever the playback order of clips is altered (clips are
sorted by shooting dates), previous playback CTL count is
disabled. The first frame of the first clip is used as a
reference value for recalculation, and the new playback CTL
count is displayed.
The reference value (value of the first frame of the first clip)
is changed when either of the following occurs:
The power is turned on, the first frame becomes 0.
When the playback CTL count is reset, the current
playback position is set as 0, and the previous reference
value becomes a negative value.
Example:
Current value
First frame
Clip 2
Clip 1
00:00:00:00
Clip 3
00:01:00:00
00:02:00:00
Reset
00:03:00:00
First frame
Clip 1
–00:03:00:00
–00:02:00:00
Clip 2
–00:01:00:00
Clip 3
00:00:00:00
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
CTL count for recording mode (recording CTL)
The playback order of clips is altered when either of the
following occurs:
Clips are deleted, copied or restored, or the P2 card is
formatted.
The thumbnail display is switched (for more information,
see [Switching the Thumbnail Display] (page 130)).
A P2 card is inserted or removed.
Notes
If the RESET button is pressed while the playback CTL
count is being displayed, only the playback CTL count is
reset.
For playback in 24PN (Native) mode, 30 frames are
counted in accordance with the pull-down images.
Note, however, that in the 1080/23.98PsF and 1080/
24PsF modes, 24 frames are counted.
Example:
Current value
First frame
Clip 1
00:00:00:00
Clip 2
00:01:00:00
00:02:00:00
Delete Clip 2.
Current value
Clip 1
00:00:00:00
Clip 3
00:03:00:00
Clip 3
00:01:00:00
00:02:00:00
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data
75
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 76 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
In addition to video images, the viewfinder displays lamps and text that indicate the settings and operating status of the unit,
together with messages, a center marker, a safety zone marker and the camera ID.
Lamps in the Viewfinder Screen
2. Abnormal Operating Status Warning Lamp
1
This lamp comes on when the unit is in any of the
abnormal operating statuses specified through the
<!LED> menu screen.
For statuses that activate the lamp, see the options in
the [!LED] (page 189).
3. BATT (battery) Lamp
2
3
4
The above viewfinder is the AJ-HVF21G (for further information
on your optional viewfinder model, see the relevant instruction
manual).
1. TALLY/REC (recording) Lamp
This lamp stays illuminated in red during recording, and
starts blinking if any abnormal action occurs.
For more information, see [Warning System]
(page 160).
This lamp starts blinking a few minutes before the
battery charge starts to run out, and stays illuminated
after the battery is completely flat. The battery should be
replaced before it is nearly flat, so that operation will not
be interrupted.
For more information, see [Warning System]
(page 160).
4. SAVE Lamp
In the normal setting:
The lamp stays on when the SAVE switch is positioned
at [ON] and the output of video and audio is powersaved.
When the menu option SAVE LED is set to
“P2CARD”:
The lamp starts blinking when the P2 card remaining
free space is getting low.
The menu option SAVE LED can be found in the <VF
INDICATOR3> screen on the VF page.
Mode Check Screen Displays (MODE CHECK button function)
The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to check
the settings and status of the unit.
Each press of the MODE CHECK button switches the
screen as follows:
STATUS screen !LED screen FUNCTION screen AUDIO screen CAC screen USER SW STATUS screen
No indication
Each screen is displayed for about 5 seconds. A press of the
MODE CHECK button switches the current screen.
Whether or not to display each screen is specified through
the <MODE CHECK IND> screen, which is accessible from
the VF page.
76
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
 







AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 77 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Y GET Area Display
Y GET detection area is displayed on the viewfinder screen,
LCD monitor, and monitor output when the Y GET function is
enabled after assigning the Y GET function to the USER
button.
However, Y GET detection area is not displayed in the
monitor output unless the center marker is displayed.
a
b
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
a. Center marker
b. Y GET detection area
Selecting Viewfinder Display Information
To select the information items you want to have displayed in
the viewfinder screen, go to the <VF INDICATOR1>, <VF
INDICATOR2> and <VF INDICATOR3> screens from the VF
page, and turn on or off the appropriate options, or specify
desired values.
For directions on setting the options, see [Setting Menu
Options] (page 168).
 






 














 









Viewfinder Status Indication Layout
The indications are arranged as illustrated below.
4
2
1
15
10
3
6
5
42
7
                                
      
        





11
13
12
16
17
21
18
9
8
41
33
34
35
32
31
                               
13
14



                               
                           




 
 
       


         
20 45 29 22 30 19
23
24 25
26
36

28
27
                               
40
45 43 44 37
38
36
39
For more information, see the following pages.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
77
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 78 ページ
2008年10月15日
Information Item
1080-59.9i
1080-23.9PsF
1080-24.0PsF
1080-50i
Frame number
for shooting and
recording
P:
i
At native recording
P:
PN
3. REC FORMAT
DVCPROHD
AVC-I100
AVC-I50
4/40.
Shutter speed/
mode
X1/
. ,X
. d
XX1/
.
1/50 (1/60) - 1/2000,
HALF,
. d
5. P2 card remaining
free space
min
The shooting frame number is displayed next to the recording frame number
(including native recording) and the recording type (progressive/interlacing).
Examples: In the case of 24PN recording and 12 frame shooting, “12P:24PN”
is displayed.
In the case of 12P Over 59.94i, “12P:60i” is displayed.
When the VFR function is “ON”, the shooting frame number is displayed with
black and white reversed. When operating in SYNCHRO SCAN mode, the
shooting frame number blinks.
This indicates the recording mode.
Note
“DVCPROHD” is also displayed in the native recording.
DVCPRO HD recording (including native recording)
AVC-Intra100 recording
AVC-Intra50 recording
This indicates that the shutter speed is set to SYNCHRO SCAN.
This indicates that the shutter speed is set to SYNCHRO SCAN2.
This indicates that a fixed shutter speed has been set.
The indication “
min” stays illuminated under normal conditions or blinks
when the remaining level is near zero.
When the card space is used up, “END” blinks.
WP
WP is illuminated when the P2 card is write-protected.
LOOP
LOOP is illuminated when the LOOP REC mode is set. When loop recording
cannot be performed, for example because the P2 card has no free space, the
indication blinks.
P2 card being recognized.
/
6. P2 card remaining
free space (when
MODE CHECK is
being performed)
78
Status
This indicates the mode that the unit operates in.
1080-59.94 interlace mode
1080-23.98 segment frame mode
1080-24 segment frame mode
1080-50 interlace mode
END
INFO P2
7. Unit REC indication
午後6時38分
Indication
1. System mode
2/42.
水曜日
Total free space/capacities of the P2 cards (when MODE CHECK is being
performed).
Note
When the menu option P2CARD REMAIN is set to “ONE-CARD”, the number
of the P2 card slot that contains the target card is indicated, together with the
remaining space.
For more information, see [P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity Indication]
(page 84).
With lower frame rates under VFR operation during native recording, the
display period may lengthen for the indication that little space remains on the
P2 card.
min
REC
The number of the P2 card slot that contains the target card and the remaining
free space are indicated (when MODE CHECK is being performed). In LOOP
REC mode, an indication of estimated recording time appears. For more
information, see [Loop Recording] (page 43). This indication also appears
when the target P2 card has been switched with a user button.
Note
Under VFR operation in native recording, the amount of free space increases
as the frame rate is lowered.
This can be displayed during the recording using the unit alone.
This is displayed when the menu option REC STATUS of the <VF
INDICATOR3> screen is set to “ON”.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 79 ページ
2008年10月15日
Information Item
8. Battery type (when
MODE CHECK is
being performed)
9. Battery remaining
level/voltage
水曜日
Indication
PRO14 - AC ADPT
. V
%
MAX
MODE CHECK
Indication Area
Status
Battery type, selected through a menu option. “AC ADPT” indicates when an
external DC power supply has been input.
Battery remaining level in tenths of a volt
The battery level of batteries having a level indicating function is displayed as a
percentage.
Where the battery has a level indicating function, this indicates that the battery
is empty.
Where the battery has a level indicating function, this indicates that the battery
is fully charged.
EMP
10.
午後6時38分
LOW/MID/HIGH
–3 to 30
Value set for the master gain
Example: LOW: 0
(Cause of !LED
illumination: displayed fullscreen)
Indications selected
through the menu
option !LED are marked
with [ ! ].
Indications which may
activate the !LED are
marked with [ ].
GAIN (0dB)
SHUTTER
WHITE PRE.
EXTENDER
B.GAMMA
MATRIX
COLOR COR.
FILTER
Gain status
Shutter status
White balance status
Extender status (EX2 or OFF)
BLACK GAMMA status (ON or OFF)
MATRIX status (A, B, or OFF)
Color correction status (ON or OFF)
Filter status
(FUNCTION: HD SDI A ·
B)
OUTPUT: MEM/CAM/OFF
TYPE: 4:2:2/4:4:4
Position of OUTPUT SEL switch.
Indicates current setting of SIGNAL FORMAT.
SIGNAL FORMAT is selected in the <OUTPUT SEL> screen of the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
Indicates current setting of HD SDI A · B CHAR.
HD SDI A · B CHAR is set from the <OUTPUT SEL> screen of the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
(STATUS: Master gain)
(FUNCTION: MON OUT)
OUTPUT: MEM/CAM/OFF
SELECT: VBS/HD SDI
CHAR: ON/OFF
(FUNCTION: P2CARD
STATUS)
TOTAL
SLOT1/SLOT2/SLOT3/
SLOT4/SLOT5
OP-SLOT
(AUDIO: Enabling or
disabling the FRONT
AUDIO LEVEL control)
CH1: ON/OFF
CH2: ON/OFF
(AUDIO: Phantom power FRONT:
status for the microphone) REAR:
(AUDIO: Input signal and
level for each channel)
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
FRONT/W.L./REAR
CH1/2/3/4
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
CHAR: A/B/BOTH
Position of OUTPUT SEL switch.
Indicates current setting of MONITOR OUT.
MONITOR OUT is set from the <OUTPUT SEL> screen of the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
Indicates current setting of MON OUT CHARACTER switch.
Total remaining free space/capacities of the P2 cards loaded in P2 card slots
1 - 5.
Status and remaining free space/capacity of each card. The numbers denote
the P2 card slot numbers.
The card status is indicated as:
ACTIVE/ACCESSING/INFO READING/FULL/PROTECTED/
NOT SUPPORTED/FORMAT ERROR/NO CARD/PROXY
For details of statuses, see [P2 card access LED and status of P2 cards]
(page 32).
Indicates optional slot status.
The card status is indicated as:
PROXY/NO CARD/NOT SUPPORTED
If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for channel 1, then “ON” is
indicated. If not, “OFF” is indicated.
If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for channel 2, then “ON” is
indicated. If not, “OFF” is indicated.
Phantom power status of the front microphone
Phantom power status of the rear microphone
For more information, see [MIC/AUDIO2] (page 199).
Input signal and level for each channel
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
79
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 80 ページ
Information Item
2008年10月15日
Camera Warning AWB A ACTIVE
and Report Area AWB B ACTIVE
AWB A OK . K
(Related to AWB, ABB
AWB B OK . K
and switch settings)
AWB BREAK . K
AWB NG
COLOR TEMP LOW
COLOR TEMP HIGH
LEVEL OVER
LOW LIGHT
TIME OVER
AWB PRESET . K
CHECK FILTER
ABB ACTIVE
ABB OK
ABB BREAK
ABB NG
B-SHD READY
B-SHD ACTIVE
B-SHD OK
B-SHD BREAK
B-SHD NG
(Low light warning)
(Y GET value)
12.
User button
functions
UM:
USER MAIN
button
USER 1 button
USER 2 button
MARKER
SELECT button
TEXT MEMO
button
U1:
U2:
U3:
U4:
Status
AWB being performed on Ch A.
AWB being performed on Ch B.
AWB successful on Ch A.
AWB successful on Ch B.
AWB action aborted by user.
AWB action failed. The second line indicates the status.
Color temperature too low.
Color temperature too high.
Brightness too high.
Brightness too low.
Action timed-out.
AWB cannot be performed because the AWB switch is position at [PRST] or
the super gain is enabled.
This is warning to recheck the position of the filter switch knob during AWB and
when the power is turned on.
ABB being performed.
ABB action successful.
ABB action aborted by user.
ABB action failed.
Black shading accepted (by holding down the ABB switch during ABB
adjustment).
Black shading being adjusted.
Black shading adjustment successful.
Black shading adjustment aborted by user.
Black shading adjustment failed.
WHITE: # . K
AUTO KNEE: ON/OFF
GAIN:
dB
SS: 1/
,
. d,
X
. d
SS: X 1/
, XX1/
ND: /CC:
K
EXTENDER: ON/OFF/
K
IRIS:
F .
DRS: ON/OFF
The WHITE BAL switch has been switched. # is replaced with A, B or PRE.
AUTO KNEE switch has been switched to [ON] or [OFF].
Gain has been switched with the GAIN selector switch or a user button.
When the shutter speed has been switched, the shutter speed is indicated.
LOW LIGHT
Brightness too low.
. %
INH
I.OVR ON/OFF
S.BLK –
/OFF
B.GAMMA ON/OFF
Y GET ON/OFF
DRS ON/OFF
ASSIST ON/OFF
C.TEMP ON/OFF
VFR ON/OFF
FRATE ON/OFF
VF GAM ON/OFF
AUDIO CH1
AUDIO CH2
REC SW
RET SW
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
USB HOST/DEVICE/OFF
VF MARK A/B/OFF
TEXT MEMO
80
午後6時38分
Indication
11.
(Switch changeover
indication)
水曜日
Shutter speed is in SYNCHRO SCAN mode.
This appears when the filter setting has been selected.
Lens extender has been turned on or off.
Indicated when the iris override correction value is to be changed.
The dynamic range stretcher has been switched.
With the Y GET ON setting, the output brightness level near the center marker
is displayed as “%”.
User buttons disabled.
Iris override can be set (the iris override setting is on).
Status of super black (on or off). When it is on, the set value is also indicated.
Status of black gamma (shade correction for the black level): on or off
Indicates whether the Y GET function is on or off.
Indicates whether the dynamic range stretcher function is on or off.
Indicates whether the focus assist function is on or off.
Indicates the mode for changing the color temperature with the jog dial button
is on or off.
Indicates whether the VFR function is on or off.
Indicates whether the frame rate set in USR SW F.RATE is being applied.
Indicates whether the monitor gamma function is enabled for the viewfinder.
Input signal to be recorded on audio channel 1 has been switched.
Input signal to be recorded on audio channel 2 has been switched.
User button acts as REC switch.
User button acts as RET switch.
Indicates that PRE RECORDING mode has been switched on or off.
Switch that changes the target card is set.
USB action status has been switched.
Displayed when the marker displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen
has been changed.
Indicates whether the TEXT MEMO function is on or off.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 81 ページ
2008年10月15日
Information Item
13.
System
information and
warnings
水曜日
午後6時38分
Indication
Status
SYSTEM ERROR-
Something abnormal is happening to the internal computer communications or
reference signal. No further recording or playback can be performed.
is
replaced with an error code. For more information, see [Error Codes]
(page 163).
TURN POWER OFF
P2 card has been removed while being accessed (recorded, played back, or
formatted), and subsequent operation is disabled.
CARD ERR
An error has occurred while recording data to or playing data from a P2 card. In
the actual indication the is replaced by the slot number of the P2 card that
triggered the error.
REC WARNING
Something abnormal is happening to video and/or audio being recorded.
Backup battery needs replacing.
FAN STOP
The fan is locked and halted.
WIRELESS-RF
RF signal from the wireless receiver is degraded.
EOM
P2 card has no free space.
BOS
Playback position is at the start of all the clips.
EOS
Playback position is at the end of all the clips.
CANNOT REC
Indicates that it is not possible to record to a P2 card directly after insertion or
switching on the power. Detailed information is provided on the FUNCTION
screen of MODE CHECK. See the relevant section of the 10. MODE CHECK
indication area.
CANNOT PLAY
Clip cannot be played back perhaps because no P2 card is loaded, or the P2
card contains no clips.
COMM ERROR
Displayed when disconnection between microcomputers continues for a
specified period or longer.
TEXT MEMO
Text memo has been added.
TEXT MEMO INVALID
Text memo has not been successfully added.
MARK ON/OFF
Shot mark has been added or deleted. For information on shot marks, see
[Shot Mark Function] (page 48).
SHOT MARK INVALID
This is displayed when shot marks cannot be added.
UPDATING
Clip information is being updated. Playback operation disabled.
USB DEVICE
The unit is in USB DEVICE mode. When communication is disabled, the
indication blinks.
USB HOST
Indicates that the unit is set to the USB HOST mode. When the external hard
disk is not successfully recognized, then the indication blinks.
THUMBNAIL OPEN
Thumbnail is being manipulated.
PROXY REC P2&SD
Displayed when proxy recording on either the P2 card or the SD memory card
starts (when AJ-YAX800G is attached, the PROXY REC item on the <VF
INDICATOR3> screen is turned on).
PROXY REC P2
Displayed when proxy recording on the P2 card starts (when AJ-YAX800G is
attached, the PROXY REC item on the <VF INDICATOR3> screen is turned
on).
NEAR END (SD)
When the remaining free space on the SD Memory card drops below 1 minute
during proxy recording, the message is displayed (when AJ-YAX800G is
attached).
EOM (SD)
Displayed when full capacity is reached during proxy recording on the SD
memory card (when AJ-YAX800G is attached).
PROXY CARD ERROR
Displayed when proxy recording stops because of failure on either the video
encoder card or the stream. Check the video encoder card or avoid use of
proxy recording. (When AJ-YAX800G is attached.)
SD CARD WRITE ERR
Displayed when a failure occurs on the SD memory card during proxy
recording, and only recording on the SD memory card stops (when AJYAX800G is attached).
TC REGEN
The RET button was pressed to regenerate the time code as the time code for
the last clip recorded on a P2 card.
SLOT SEL
This blinks while the recording slots of P2 cards are switched after pressing the
user button where the SLOT SEL function is assigned.
SLOT SEL INVALID
This is displayed if the recording slots of P2 cards cannot be switched when
the user button where the SLOT SEL function is assigned is pressed.
DIR NG CARD
SLOT1/2/3/4/5
This is displayed when a P2 card with an irregular directory structure is
inserted or when beginning or ending a recording to an inserted card having
such a directory structure.
RUN DOWN CARD
SLOT1/2/3/4/5
This is displayed when the recording starts or completes with a P2 card on
which the maximum number of overwrites has been exceeded, or when data is
recorded after inserting such a P2 card.
AUDIO NOT RECORDING
This is displayed when audio is not being recorded on the P2 card even if the
audio level meter is moving.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
BACKUP BATT EMPTY
81
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 82 ページ
2008年10月15日
Information Item
14.
82
Time code
indication
水曜日
午後6時38分
Indication
TCG
TCR
(V)UBG
(V)UBR
CTL
12:59:59:20
12:59:59:20
AB CD EF 00
12 34 56 78
–1:59:59:20
Status
TCG (time code generator value)
TCR (time code reader value)
UBG VUBG (User bits generator value)
UBR VUBR (User bits reader value)
Displays CTL count.
15.
CAC
CAC
16.
Extender
EX
This is displayed when CAC is operating normally.
17/39.
Color
temperature
18/38.
Filter position
1-4
A-D
–
This indicates the position of the ND filter.
This indicates the position of the CC filter.
This indicates that the filter has not been set to a proper position.
19.
Dynamic range
stretcher mode
DRS
This is displayed when the function for compressing the video levels of
sections with high brightness to stretch the dynamic range has been selected.
20.
WHITE BAL
switch position
A
B
P
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [A].
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [B].
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [PRST].
21/42.
Gamma
Indication
HD
SD
FLK1
FLK2
FLK3
FREC
VREC
This indicates the gamma used in the unit.
Lens extender used.
. K
dB
Color temperature assigned to [A], [B], and [PRST] of the WHITE BAL switch
(this is a value stored at AWB performance or a value set through the menu
option).
22.
Gain value
23.
Audio input
channel and
level meter
- - - - „- - - - +
F
W
R
Current gain value.
24.
Super black ON
B
Super black ON.
25.
Iris override
indication
++
+
(No indication)
–
––
Correction phase of the iris override (when active)
+ +:
On the open side by 1
+:
On the open side by 0.5
– –:
On the closed side by 1
–:
On the closed side by 0.5
No indication: Standard status
Selected channel together with its audio level.
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at [FRONT].
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at [W.L.] (wireless)
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at [REAR].
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 83 ページ
2008年10月15日
Information Item
Indication
水曜日
午後6時38分
Status
26.
Iris, F value
NC
OPEN
F1.7 - F16
CLOSE
Lens cable is not connected.
Lens iris is at maximum.
Lens iris value
Lens iris closed.
Note
These indications are provided when the lens is capable of indicating the iris
value. When the iris is being overridden, they blink.
27.
Zoom indication
Z00 - Z99
Zoom degree is indicated. This indication is not provided for a lens that does
not return the zoom position, even if the indication is set to on.
28.
INTERVAL REC/
PRE
RECORDING
indication/SD
memory card
remaining free
space
Displayed before and after operation during INTERVAL REC mode.
h
(blink)
Displayed during INTERVAL REC operation.
(blink)
m/
s
Displays the pause time before the next recording during INTERVAL REC.
P-REC (blink)
m
END
If a video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional) is attached, the remaining free
space on the SD Memory card will be displayed when the MODE CHECK
button is pressed during proxy recording.
“END” is displayed when there is no remaining free space.
29/43.
VF-GAMMA
This is only enabled when “FILM-REC” has been selected in the GAMMA
MODE SEL menu option. Video shot in the FILM-REC gamma mode is
converted to high-contrast video and supplied to the viewfinder. GAMMA
MODE SEL can be selected from the screen <GAMMA> in the PAINT page.
30/44.
MON-GAMMA
31.
F-REC DYNAMIC 200%
LVL indication
300%
400%
500%
600%
This indicates the dynamic range at FILM-REC.
At other times, it indicates knee-slope.
32.
F-REC BLACK
STR LVL
indication
00% - 30%
This indicates the level of black stretch at FILM-REC.
At other times, it indicates knee-point.
33.
MASTER
GAMMA
indication
0.30 - 0.75
This indicates the master gamma level.
34.
BLACK GAMMA
setting
–8 - OFF - +8
This indicates the gamma curve setting for dark locations on the screen.
M
This is only enabled when “FILM-REC” has been selected in the GAMMA
MODE SEL menu option. Video shot in the FILM-REC gamma mode is
converted to high-contrast video and supplied to the MON OUT output.
GAMMA MODE SEL can be selected from the screen <GAMMA> in the PAINT
page.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
h
Indicated while pre-recorded video and audio are being recorded on the P2
card. If the user button is set to perform the PRE RECORDING function, either
“P-REC OFF” or the specified duration “1s - 8s” is displayed when the PRE
RECORDING mode is switched by pressing the user button.
83
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 84 ページ
2008年10月15日
Information Item
水曜日
午後6時38分
Indication
Status
35.
B.GAMMA
RANGE
1
2
3
This indicates the level (upper limit) of the compression/expansion.
36.
Switch lock
setting
!SW LOCK
This is displayed when any of the side switches (GAIN, OUTPUT and AWB
switches) are operated with SIDE SW LOCK in a locked state. Note that it is
not displayed during when AJ-RC10G is connected and in operation.
37.
Exposure
Indication
–4
–3„„
–3„
–3
–2„„
–2„
–2
–1„„
–1„
–1
±0
+0„
+0„„
+1
+1„
+1„„
+2
+2„
+2„„
+3
+3„
+3„„
+4
+4„
+4„„
+5
When GAMMA MODE SEL has been set to “FILM-REC” and STATUS MODE
to “FILM REC”, executing the Y GET operation measures brightness in
proximity to the center marker. The measured value is displayed as an
exposure level.
A measured output signal of 30% is displayed as ±0 (normal). This value is
then adjusted by +1 STOP for every doubling of the amount of incident light
and by –1 STOP for every halving of the amount incident light. Each „
represents 1/3 STOP.
GAMMA MODE SEL is set from the <GAMMA> screen of the PAINT page.
STATUS MODE is set from the <VF DISPLAY> screen of the VF page.
45.
P-10LOG
P
This is displayed when the HD SDI A · B output signal of the unit is P-10LOG.
P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity Indication
Status of unit
Under normal
conditions
Recording
status
Other than
LOOP REC
mode
Menu option
P2CARD REMAIN*1
5. P2 card remaining free space
indication*2
6. P2 card remaining free space
indication (during MODE CHECK)*2
TOTAL
The total remaining free space of all P2
cards loaded in the P2 card slots is
indicated in minutes.
Example: 30min
Not provided
ONE-CARD
The number of the P2 card slot holding the Not provided
target P2 card, together with that card’s
remaining free space indicated in minutes.
Example:
8min
OFF
Not provided
LOOP REC
mode
TOTAL/ONE-CARD
Indicated as “LOOP”
Not provided
OFF
Not provided
Not provided
During MODE Other than
CHECK
LOOP REC
mode
TOTAL/ONE-CARD/
OFF
The total remaining free space and
capacities of all P2 cards loaded in the P2
card slots are indicated in minutes.
Example: 20/40
The number of the P2 card slot
holding the target P2 card, together
with that card’s remaining free space,
indicated in minutes.
Example:
8min
Indicated as “LOOP”
The estimated recording time is
indicated in minutes.
Example: 7min
LOOP REC
mode
Not provided
*1 The menu option P2CARD REMAIN can be found in the <VF INDICATOR3> screen on the VF page.
*2 If the remaining free space or memory capacity is 9999 min or more, [9999min] is displayed.
84
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 85 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Indications Available in the Viewfinder Screen
Selectable
between on and
off through menu
options
Provided when
the appropriate
status is
encountered.
Provided during
MODE CHECK*
Can be switched
off.
Provided during
playback
1.
System mode
–
–
2.
Frame number for shooting and
recording
–
–
3.
REC FORMAT
–
–
4.
Shutter speed/mode
5.
P2 card remaining free space
6.
P2 card remaining free space
(when MODE CHECK is being
performed)
Unit REC indication
8.
Battery type (when MODE CHECK
is being performed)
9.
Battery remaining level/voltage
10.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
MODE CHECK Indication Area
–
–
–
11.
Camera Warning and Report Area
–
–
12.
User button functions
–
–
13.
System information and warnings
14.
Time code indication
15.
CAC
–
16.
Extender
–
17.
Color temperature
18.
Filter position
–
–
19.
Dynamic range stretcher mode
–
–
20.
WHITE BAL switch position
–
–
21.
Gamma Indication
–
–
22.
Gain value
–
23.
Audio input channel and level
meter
24.
Super black ON
25.
Iris override indication
26.
Iris, F value
–
–
27.
Zoom indication
–
–
28.
INTERVAL REC/PRE RECORDING
indication/SD memory card
remaining free space
–
–
–
–
All 4ch input
information
–
–
–
–
–
–
29.
VF-GAMMA
30.
MON-GAMMA
31.
F-REC DYNAMIC LVL indication
–
–
–
–
32.
F-REC BLACK STR LVL indication
–
–
–
–
33.
MASTER GAMMA indication
–
–
–
–
34.
BLACK GAMMA setting
–
–
–
–
35.
B.GAMMA RANGE
–
–
–
–
36.
Switch lock setting
–
–
–
–
37.
Exposure Indication
–
–
–
–
38.
Filter position
–
–
–
–
39.
Color temperature
–
–
–
–
40.
Shutter speed/mode
–
–
–
–
41.
Gamma Indication
–
–
–
–
42.
Frame number for shooting and
recording
–
–
–
–
43.
VF-GAMMA
–
–
–
–
44.
MON-GAMMA
–
–
–
–
45.
P-10LOG
–
–
–
*
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
7.
–
–
–
–
: Not provided when the menu option STATUS is set to “OFF”, which can be found in the <MODE CHECK IND> screen on the VF page.
: Provided regardless of the menu option setting.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
85
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 86 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Display Modes and Setting Changes/adjustment Result Messages
The messages that appear on the viewfinder screen to
indicate changes to settings and adjustment results may be
limited, or set not to appear, through the menu option DISP
MODE. This menu option can be found in the <VF
DISPLAY> screen on the VF page.
For directions on navigating the menu, see [Setting Menu
Options] (page 168).
 




 









Setting change/adjustment messages and DISP MODE settings
Message appears when:
Message
DISP MODE
settings
1
CC filter/ND filter changed.
ND: n (n=1, 2, 3, 4), CC: m (m=A, B, C, D)
Gain changed.
GAIN: n dB
(n=–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30)
WHITE BAL switch re-positioned.
WHITE: n (n=A, B, PRE)
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch positioned at
[AUTO KNEE] or [OFF].
AUTO KNEE: ON (or OFF)
Shutter speed/mode changed.
1/180.0 deg (or 1/172.8 deg, 1/144.0 deg, 1/120.0 deg, 1/90.0 deg,
1/45.0 deg, 1/
, X1/
,X
. deg, XX1/
)
White balance adjusted (AWB performed).
Example: AWB A OK 3.2 K
Black balance adjusted (ABB performed).
Example: ABB OK
Extender selected.
Example: EXTENDER ON
User button selected.
Example: UM: SLOT SEL
Iris being overridden.
Example: ++ F 5.6
: Message appears.
: Message does not appear.
Setting the Marker Displays
The center, safety zone, safety zone area and frame
markers may be set to on or off, along with specifications of
the marker types. To set and select markers, go to the <VF
MARKER> screen from the VF page and select the
appropriate options.
For directions on navigating the menu, see [Setting Menu
Options] (page 168).
 








Note
The indication “MRK: A” at the upper right of the screen
shows the current indication status. To view TABLE B, press
the MARKER SELECT button. This changes the indication
to “MRK: B”, allowing you to view the settings.
86
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
2
3
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 87 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Marker Check Screen Displays (MARKER SELECT button function)
The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to view
the marker settings of the unit.
Pressing the MARKER SELECT button on the unit switches
the marker indication as follows.
Markers
b
c
MRK: A MRK: B MRK: OFF
If the menu option FRAME SIG is set to “14:9” as the
information of Marker A and “4:3” as the information of
Marker B, then the 14:9 and 4:3 view angles can easily be
checked with the button, as required.
b. Center marker
c. Safety zone
d. The view angle specified through the menu option
FRAME SIG is displayed.
a
a. MARKER SELECT button
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
d
Checking Return Video Signal in the Viewfinder
The viewfinder displays the return video signal input to the
GENLOCK IN connector while the RET button at the lens is
held down.
Note, however, that the return video signal cannot be viewed
unless the signal format set using SYSTEM MODE matches
the input signal to the GENLOCK IN connector.
To enable this capability, select “CAM RET” for the menu
option RET SW. This option can be found in the <SW
MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.

 






Note
1080/23.98P, 1080/24P and SD format signals cannot be
viewed.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
87
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 88 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor
5
Using the LCD Monitor
1
2
Turn on the POWER switch of the unit.
Slide the OPEN button in the arrow 1 direction to open
the LCD monitor in the arrow 2 direction.
Through the menu option VF/LCD CHAR, specify
whether or not the LCD should display the same
characters as the viewfinder.
This menu option can be found in the <OUTPUT SEL>
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.




・


 






Notes
3
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for most convenient
viewing.
The monitor can turn up to 180 degrees towards the
lens and up to 90 degrees towards you.
When closing the LCD monitor make sure that it is
shut tight.
In an environment with sudden temperature changes,
condensation may form on the liquid crystal surface of
the monitor. If this happens, wipe off the moisture with
a soft, dry cloth.
When the unit is very cold, the video image in the LCD
monitor will appear slightly darker immediately after
the power is turned on. Once the interior of the unit
warms up, the LCD monitor delivers normal
brightness.
Note
To prevent unit failure, do not allow undue force to be
applied to the monitor (when it is open).
Self-portrait Shooting
When shooting with the LCD display angled 180 degrees
towards the lens, you can set the menu option SELF
SHOOT to “MIRROR”, to horizontally flip the video image on
the LCD display, and allow you to view a mirror image while
shooting.
Note that only the video image on the LCD monitor is
horizontally flipped, not the actual video being recorded.
The menu option SELF SHOOT can be found in the <LCD
MONITOR> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Notes
4
The options BRIGHTNESS, COLOR LEVEL, and
CONTRAST show respectively the brightness, color
level and contrast of the screen. These options can be
found in the <LCD MONITOR> screen on the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
 





88
When the LCD monitor is angled 180 degrees towards the
lens with the menu option SELF SHOOT to “MIRROR”,
the LCD monitor does not provide the same status
indication as the viewfinder, regardless of the setting for
the menu option VF/LCD CHAR.
Return signals from the GENLOCK IN connector cannot
be output to the LCD monitor.
When the OUTPUT SEL switch of MON OUT is in the
[CAM] position, playback cannot be output to the LCD
monitor. The viewfinder must be used to view playback.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 89 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Selection of video output signals
The unit employs the HD SDI A · B connector and the MON OUT connector as connectors for outputting video signals.
Settings of signals output from HD SDI A · B connector
MEM:
CAM:
OFF:
Item
OUTPUT
ITEM
Variable
range
MENU
ONLY
TC
STATUS
During EE, such as recording, video images
taken by the camera are output. Meanwhile,
signals on the P2 card are output during
playback.
The camera images are output at all times.
No signal is output from the HD SDI A · B
connector.
a
HD SDI A・B
MEM
CAM
OFF
TCG
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
MON OUT
OUTPUT SEL
MEM
CAM
OFF
OFF
CHARACTER
ON
a. HD SDI A · B switch
HD SDI A · OFF
A
B CHAR
B
BOTH
Remarks
Set the characters to be superimposed
on the output signals from the HD SDI A
· B connector and MON OUT connector.
MENU ONLY:
The menu screen is
superimposed only when the
menu is accessed. This normally
displays nothing.
TC:
Time codes are superimposed.
(When the menu is accessed,
the menu screen is
superimposed.)
STATUS:
The characters that are the
same as the characters
superimposed in the viewfinder
screen are superimposed.
(When the menu is accessed,
the menu screen is
superimposed.)
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Change the characters of the signal output from the HD SDI
A · B connector using the <OUTPUT SEL> screen from the
menu. The character content output from the HD SDI A · B
connector and MON OUT is the same.
The signals output from the HD SDI A · B connector are
switched with the HD SDI A · B switch.
However, the switching operation is not acknowledged
during the recording operation.
OFF:
The characters are not
superimposed on the HD SDI A ·
B connector.
A:
The characters are
superimposed on the HD SDI A
connector.
B:
The characters are
superimposed on the HD SDI B
connector.
BOTH: The characters are
superimposed on the HD SDI A
connector and the HD SDI B
connector.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Selection of video output signals
89
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 90 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector
The MON OUT connector outputs HD SDI signals or downconverted analog signals.
Set the video signals output from the MON OUT connector
by using the MONITOR OUT item on the menu (<OUTPUT
SEL> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page).
Item
MONITOR
OUT
Variable
range
Remarks
Set video signals output from the MON
OUT connector.
VBS: Analog composite signals are
output.
HD SDI: HD SDI signals are output.
VBS
HD SDI
The signals output from the MON OUT connector are
switched with the OUTPUT SEL switch.
However, the switching operation is not acknowledged
during the recording operation.
MEM:
CAM:
OFF:
During EE, such as recording, video images
taken by the camera are output. Meanwhile,
signals on the P2 card are output during
playback.
The camera images are output at all times.
No signal is output from the MON OUT
connector.
TCG
HD SDI A・B
MEM
CAM
OFF
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
b
MON OUT
OUTPUT SEL
MEM
CAM
OFF
OFF
CHARACTER
ON
b. MON OUT OUTPUT SEL switch
Set the characters to be superimposed on the signals output
from the MON OUT connector in the OUTPUT ITEM item on
the menu (<OUTPUT SEL> screen on the SYSTEM
SETTING page).
c
HD SDI A・B
MEM
CAM
OFF
TCG
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
MON OUT
OUTPUT SEL
MEM
CAM
OFF
OFF
CHARACTER
ON
c. MON OUT CHARACTER switch
Note
When VBS has been selected as the MON OUT signal and
the menu option SYSTEM MODE has been set to “108024PsF”, the MON OUT signal is luminance signal video. The
menu option SYSTEM MODE can be found in the
<SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
90
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Selection of video output signals
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 91 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Handling data
Set data file configuration
The unit employs 6 sets for the file data area.
For menu items that can be read from or stored in the
respective areas, refer to [Menu] (page 166).
SD memory card
SET UP data
Notes
For information about how to navigate through the menu
for this section, see [Setting Menu Options] (page 168).
Access the respective data settings files after switching
the PC MODE to “OFF”. If the respective data settings
files are accessed when the unit is in USB DEVICE mode,
an error may occur. The PC MODE can be operated from
the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
Do not edit the data stored on the SD memory card using
a PC or the like.
It is possible to write 8 setup files on
the SD memory card.
No. of files: 8
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
FACTORY data:
The area for storing factory settings
Data cannot be revised with menu operations.
CINEMATOGRAPH data:
The area for storing cinematograph settings.
Data cannot be revised with menu operations.
USER data:
The area for storing the data set by menu operations
The FACTORY data is stored as the factory setting.
CURRENT data:
The area for storing the operating status of the unit
The set value in this area is revised by menu operations.
SCENE file:
16 sets of scene files are provided.
LENS file:
64 sets of lens files are provided.
Menu operations
To revise the set
value
SD CARD READ/WRITE
READ
SD CARD READ/WRITE
WRITE
SCENE
WRITE
SCENE file
No. of files: 16
CURRENT data
(Operating status of the unit)
No. of files: 1
WRITE USER
DATA
READ USER
DATA
LENS FILE
READ
USER data
No. of files: 1
READ FACTORY
DATA
READ
CINEMATOGRAPH
SCENE
READ
FACTORY data
(Revision disable)
No. of files: 1
CINEMATOGRAPH data
(Revision disable)
No. of files: 1
: Files built in the unit
: Menu operations
LENS file
LENS FILE
WRITE
No. of files: 64
LENS FILE CARD R/W
READ
LENS FILE CARD R/W
WRITE
SD memory card
Lens file
No. of files: 8 8
It is possible to write 8 titles for 8 lens files
on the SD memory card.
Setting Data Using an SD memory card
An SD memory card (optional) can be used as a setup card that stores up to 8 files of settings menu specifications.
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum state.
Regarding SD memory cards, please see <Cautions in using SD memory cards> (page 23).
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
91
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 92 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Handling SD memory cards
An SD memory card may be inserted or removed, either before or after the power is turned on.
To insert an SD memory card
Open the lid of the switch cover, and insert an SD memory
card (optional) into the SD memory card slot with the notch
upward. Close the lid.
To remove the SD memory card
Open the lid of the switch cover, and ensure that the busy
lamp is not illuminated. Then, further depress the SD
memory card towards the main unit. This releases the SD
memory card from the insertion slot. Take hold of the SD
memory card and remove it. Close the lid.
When using or storing SD memory cards, be sure to
Avoid high temperature and humid environments
Avoid water
Avoid static electricity
For storage, the SD memory card must be kept inserted into
the unit with the lid closed.
Note
An SD memory card must be inserted with the right side
facing the slot. If the card is hard to insert, it may be
reversed or upside down. Do not force it into the slot. Check
the card before re-inserting it.
SD memory card operations
To format an SD memory card, write settings data or read
data on an SD memory card, navigate the menu to the <SD
CARD READ/WRITE> screen from the FILE page.
 











Insertion of an SD memory card formatted to a standard
other than the SD and SDHC standards using some other
device will result in the display of “FORMAT ERROR” on the
top right part of the window. In this case, reformat the card
as follows.
Note that the indication “FORMAT ERROR” does not
disappear if the SD memory card is replaced with this menu
page open. When the SD memory card is replaced, perform
TITLE READ.
To format an SD memory card
Note
SD memory cards may be formatted via the thumbnail
screen. For more information, see [Formatting SD memory
cards] (page 141).
1
2
3
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>
screen.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
menu option CARD CONFIG.
Press the jog dial button to display the following
message:


 
92
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 93 ページ
4
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
To format the SD memory card, turn the jog dial button
to move the arrow (cursor) to YES. Then, press the dial
button.
When the SD memory card has been formatted, the
following message appears:
To write set data on an SD memory card
1
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>
screen.
To select a file number
2
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
option W.SELECT. Then, press the dial button.

The card will not be formatted if the following message
appears when the jog dial button is pressed:
Error message
Remedy
CONFIG NG
NO CARD
(No SD memory card inserted.)
Insert an SD memory card.
CONFIG NG
ERROR
(SD memory card cannot be
formatted.)
The card may be defective.
Replace the card.
CONFIG NG
WRITE PROTECT
(SD memory card is writeprotected.)
Remove the card and cancel the
protect.
CONFIG NG
CANNOT ACCESS
(SD memory card not
accessible).
Example: The SD memory card
is not accessible because it is
being played back.
After the operation in process,
format the card.
5





3
Turn the jog dial button to select a desired number (1 8). Then, press the dial button.
To give the selected file a title
4
Note
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
option TITLE.







To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
The settings menu disappears and the status of the unit
is indicated at the top and bottom of the viewfinder
screen.
When an SD memory card is inserted or removed with
the <SD CARD READ/WRITE> screen open, the titles
of data on the card cannot be updated.
Move the cursor to the option TITLE READ and press
the jog dial button. The titles of the data will be updated.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording


 




 




5
Press the jog dial button. This moves the arrow (cursor)
to the entry area, putting the unit in entry mode.













Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
93
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 94 ページ
6
水曜日
午後6時38分
Turn the jog dial button until a desired character
appears.
The characters that appear are switched in the following
order:
Space:
Ð
Alphabetical characters:
Ð
Numerals:
Ð
Symbols:
7
8
2008年10月15日
†
A to Z
0 to 9
', >, <, /, -
Press the jog dial button to accept a desired character.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
next digit (clockwise), and repeat steps 6 - 7 to set
characters (up to 8 characters).
To write data on a selected file
9
When the title is set, turn the jog dial button to move the
arrow (cursor) to : .













The data will not be written if any of the following messages
appears when the jog dial button is pressed:
Error message
Remedy
WRITE NG
NO CARD
(No SD memory card inserted.)
Insert an SD memory card.
WRITE NG
FORMAT ERROR
(SD memory card not properly
formatted.)
The card has not been
formatted using the unit.
Replace the card.
WRITE NG
ERROR
(SD memory card not writable.)
The card may be defective.
Replace the card.
WRITE NG
WRITE PROTECT
(SD memory card writeprotected.)
Remove the card and disable
the protect.
WRITE NG
CANNOT ACCESS
(SD memory card not
accessible.)
It is impossible to access the SD
memory card while the card is in
use. After completion of the
respective operations, perform
the write operation again.
WRITE NG
CARD FULL
(SD memory card has no free
space.)
The card is not writable because
it has no free space. Delete
unwanted files or replace the
card with a new one.
13 Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
When the data has been written, the following message
appears:
10 Press the jog dial button to return the arrow (cursor) to
the option TITLE.
11 Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the

option WRITE.
12 Press the jog dial button to display the following
message:
14 To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
The settings menu disappears and the status of the unit
is indicated at the top and bottom of the viewfinder
screen.
Notes


 

94
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
The <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen can be used to
select the type of the menu to be written on the SD
memory card.
It is possible to overwrite a setup file stored by a different
device with a new setup file from this unit. Note that if the
file is overwritten, the original setup file from the other
device will be lost.
We recommend managing the respective SD memory
cards on the respective devices independently.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 95 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
To read data on an SD memory card
1
6
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>
screen.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
When the data has been read, the following message
appears:
To select a file number
2
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
menu option R.SELECT. Then, press the dial button.






3
Turn the jog dial button to select a desired number (1 8). Then, press the dial button.
To read data on a selected file
4
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
option READ.


 









5

The data will not be read if any of the following messages
appears when the jog dial button is pressed:
Error message
Remedy
READ NG
NO CARD
(No SD memory card inserted.)
Insert an SD memory card.
READ NG
FORMAT ERROR
(SD memory card not properly
formatted.)
The card has not been
formatted using the unit.
Replace the card.
READ NG
NO FILE
(No file found.)
Write file data.
READ NG
ERROR
(SD memory card not
readable.)
Only data written with the unit is
readable.
READ NG
CANNOT ACCESS
(SD memory card not
accessible.)
Example: The SD memory card
is not accessible because it is
being played back.
After the operation in process,
read data.
7
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
 





To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
The settings menu will be replaced by status indications
for the unit.
Press the jog dial button to display the following
message:


 
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
95
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 96 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
How to Use the User Data
It is possible to write the settings data into the user area of
the internal memory of the unit, or to read data written in this
area.
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup
state.
2


 




To write data, go to the <INITIALIZE> screen from the FILE
page. To read the written user data, go to the <SCENE>
screen from the FILE page.







To write settings data in the user area
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <INITIALIZE> screen.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
option WRITE USER DATA.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
option READ USER DATA.
3
Press the jog dial button to display the following
message:


 


 
3
Press the jog dial button to display the following
message:
4
5
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
The data written in the user area of the internal memory
of the unit is read to complete the setting.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
The set user data may be also read without navigating the
menu.


 
4
5
1
2
Turn off the POWER switch.
Position the WHITE BAL switch at [PRST].
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
This writes the settings data into the user area of the
internal memory of the unit.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
To read written user data
1
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.
a
a. WHITE BAL switch
3
96
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
With the AUTO W/B BAL switch flipped up, turn on the
POWER switch.
This resets all settings for USER menu options to their
defaults.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 97 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
How to Use Scene File Data
It is possible to write the settings data into the scene file area
of the internal memory of the unit, or to read data written in
this area. 16 types of scene files are available. This data
allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup state.
To use the scene file data, go to the <SCENE> screen from
the FILE page.
7
8
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
This writes the setting data into the scene file area of the
unit internal memory.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
To write settings data for scene files
3
Navigate the menu to the SCENE screen.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
1
2
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
SCENE SEL option.
Press the jog dial button to blink scene file numbers.
Then, turn the dial button to select a desired scene file
number (1 to 16).



 










4
5
Press the jog dial button to accept the scene file.
Turn the jog dial button to return the arrow (cursor) to
the option WRITE.





 








6
Press the jog dial button to display the following
message:


 
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
97
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 98 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
To read settings data for scene files
1
2
3
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
option SCENE SEL.
Press the jog dial button to blink scene file numbers.
Then, turn the dial button to select a desired scene file
number (1 to 16).
To return data for scene files to their defaults
1
2
3

4
5
8
98
Press the jog dial button to blink scene file numbers.
Then, turn the dial button to select the scene file that
you want to reset (1 to 16).



 

















Press the jog dial button to accept the scene file.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
READ option.
4
5
Press the jog dial button to accept the scene file.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
option RESET.




 







 














Press the jog dial button to display the following
message:
6


 
7
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
option SCENE SEL.


 




6
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
The data stored in the scene file area of the internal
memory of the unit is read to complete the setting.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
Press the jog dial button to display the following
message:


 
7
8
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
The data stored in the scene file area of the internal
memory of the unit is reset to the defaults.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 99 ページ
2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
To title settings data for scene files
1
2
10 Press the jog dial button to display the following
message:
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
TITLE item.









 

3
11 Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
This writes the title into the scene file area of the unit
internal memory.
Press the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
the title entry area, putting the unit in entry mode.
12 To exit the menu, press the MENU button.















4
Turn the jog dial button until a desired character
appears.
The characters that appear are switched in the following
order:
Space:
Ð
Alphabetical characters:
Ð
Numerals:
Ð
Symbols:
5
6
7
8
9
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
 






†
A to Z
0 to 9
', >, <, /, -
Press the jog dial button to accept a desired character.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
next digit (clockwise), and repeat steps 4 - 5 to set
characters (up to 8 characters).
When the title is set, turn the jog dial button to move the
cursor to : .
Press the jog dial button to return the arrow (cursor) to
the options TITLE.
Turn the jog dial button to return the arrow (cursor) to
the option WRITE.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
99
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 100 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Resetting Menu Option Settings to Defaults
The menu settings can be reset to their defaults.
To reset the settings to their defaults, select the menu option
READ FACTORY DATA in the <INITIALIZE> screen on the
FILE page.
All settings will be reset to their defaults.

 

Note
This operation does not delete the scene file, lens file, and
the information stored as the user data.
Lens file
The built-in memory of the unit can store 64 sets of lens files.
On the SD memory card, 8 titles for 8 sets of lens files in a
table (total 64 sets) can be written.
The following data are recorded on the lens file.
Title name
White shading correction value
Flare compensation value
RB gain offset correction value
How to provide lens files
Adjustment of white shading
For the white shading adjustment, refer to [Adjusting the
Lens White Shading] (page 118)
Adjustment of the flare
Using the menu operations, open the <LENS FILE ADJ>
screen from the MAINTENANCE page and adjust the flare in
the LENS R FLARE item, the LENS G FLARE item and the
LENS B FLARE item.
 



Adjustment of RB gain offset
For correcting changes in white balance that may occur
when replacing the lens.
1
2
3
4
5



6
Example of the chart for flare adjustment
7
8
9
H
Mount the lens as standard on the unit.
Shoot the grayscale chart with appropriate lighting
(2000 lx, 3200 K are preferable).
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the [A] position.
Adjust the lens aperture so that the white window at the
center of the grayscale chart is about 80%.
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to [AWB] to adjust the
white balance automatically.
Measure the signal level of RGB by using the waveform
monitor (WFM).
Replace the lens to one where a lens file is provided.
Adjust the lens aperture so that the signal level of Gch is
the same signal level as the one obtained in 6 above.
Using the menu operations, open the <LENS FILE
ADJ> screen from the MAINTENANCE page and set the
RB GAIN CTRL RESET to “ON”.
10 Adjust the signal level of Rch to be the same as Gch in
0.1H
0.1L
the LENS R GAIN OFFSET item.
11 In the same way, adjust the signal level of Bch to be the
same as Gch in the LENS B GAIN OFFSET item.
L
100
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 101 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
To save the lens file into the built-in memory
Select the file No.
1
2
3
Using the menu operations, open the <LENS FILE>
screen from the FILE page.
 











Press the jog dial button to enter the file number.
Give a title to the selected file.
5
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
TITLE item.





 







6
When the jog dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)
moves to the title input area, and the input mode is
established.














8
9
†
A to Z
0 to 9
', >, <, /, -, . , x
Press the jog dial button to enter the character.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
next position (right), and repeat steps 7 and 8 to set the
characters (maximum of 12).
10 When the title has been input, turn the jog dial button to
move the arrow (cursor) to the : position.







Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Press the jog dial button and the file number will flash.
Turn the jog dial button to select the file (1 to 64) to be
recorded.
Press the jog dial button again and turn it until the
character to be set is displayed.
When the button is turned, the character displayed is
switched in the following sequence:
Space:
Ð
Alphabetical characters:
Ð
Numerals:
Ð
Symbols:
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
FILE NO. item.

4
7







11 When the jog dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)
returns to the TITLE item.





 







12 Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
WRITE position.



 









Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
101
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 102 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
13 When the jog dial button is pressed, the following
午後6時38分
14 Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
message appears.
YES, and press the jog dial button.
The current white shading correction value, the flare
compensation value, and the RB gain offset correction
value are stored in the built-in memory of the unit.
Note


 
The values will not be stored in the unit’s internal
memory if another menu screen is selected without
executing WRITE or if the menu is exited.
15 Press the MENU button.
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom
of the viewfinder screen.
To read the lens file from the builtin memory
1
2
3
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE> screen
from the FILE page.
6
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
FILE NO. item.
Press the jog dial button and the file number will flash.
Turn the jog dial button to select the file (1 to 64) to be
read.


 

 











4
5
Press the jog dial button to enter the file number.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
READ item.


 










102
When the jog dial button is pressed, the following
message appears.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
7
8
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to
YES, and press the jog dial button.
The recorded correction values for the white shading,
flare, and RB gain offset are read.
Press the MENU button.
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom
of the viewfinder screen.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 103 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
To write in and read out the lens file to/from the SD memory card
The contents of the 8 lens files stored in the unit’s internal
memory can be saved onto an SD memory card as card files
under a single title. A total of 8 titles can be saved on an SD
memory card.
Furthermore, the 8 lens files saved under one title on an SD
memory card can be loaded into the unit’s internal memory.
Saving lens files on the SD memory card
Select the card file No.
1
The correlation between the lens files stored in the internal
memory and lens files saved on an SD memory card is
shown below.
Up to 64 sets of the lens file
can be stored in the built-in
memory.
64 lens files
3
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
CARD FILE SELECT item.
Press the jog dial button and the card file number will
flash. Turn the jog dial button to select the file (1 to 8) to
be recorded.

The contents of 8 lens files
can be saved onto an SD
memory card as card files
under one title or they can be
loaded from the SD memory
card.
Card files
Title 1
 



Title 2
Title 3
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
2
Internal memory
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE CARD
R/W> screen from the FILE page.
When the message “FORMAT ERROR” appears in the
upper right corner, format the SD memory card with the
unit. SD cards can be formatted through the CARD
CONFIG menu option on the <SD CARD READ/
WRITE> screen. For more information, see [Handling
SD memory cards] (page 92).





Title 4
4
Press the jog dial button to enter the file number.
Give a title to the selected card file.
Title 5
Title 6
Title 7
Title 8
5
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
TITLE item.





 




A total of 64 lens files (8 lens files
memory card.
8 titles) can be saved on an SD
6
When the jog dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)
moves to the title input area, and the input mode is
established.
Now perform step 7 on page 101 through step 15 on
page 102.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
103
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 104 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
Loading lens files from the SD memory card
1
2
3
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE CARD
R/W> screen from the FILE page.
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
CARD FILE SELECT item.
Press the jog dial button and the card file number will
flash. Turn the jog dial button to select the file (1 to 8) to
be read.

 








4
Press the jog dial button to enter the file number.
Now perform steps 5 through 8 on page 102.
Note
The card file titles on the SD memory card are displayed on
the <LENS FILE CARD R/W> screen, but the titles of the
lens files contained in the card files are not shown on this
screen.
To display these titles, load the files, and check the titles on
the <LENS FILE> screen.
The lens files in the unit’s internal memory will be rewritten
as the loaded lens files at this time. For this reason, save the
lens files in the internal memory onto the SD memory card
first to back them up before loading them on the SD memory
card.
104
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data
午後6時38分
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 105 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)
CAC is a function that automatically corrects registration errors mainly caused by slight chromatic aberration, which cannot be
corrected with lenses, and minimizes color weepage on the images.
What is the chromatic aberration?
CAC operation
For the 4 lenses listed on the left
1
2
3
B
G
R
Install the lens on the unit and connect the lens
connector.
Open the <CAC ADJ> screen on the MAINTENANCE
page.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Chromatic aberration means magnification ratio chromatic
aberration. Magnification ratio chromatic aberration is
caused by differences in the red (R), green (G), and blue (B)
refractive indexes of a lens. The lens itself corrects
chromatic aberration but the astigmatism remains in the
surrounding area in particular. The zooming ratio, iris, and
focal distance involves complicated chromatic aberration
phenomena in a zoom lens. Images have registration errors.
Turn on the CAC CONTROL.
If the lens product number recorded on the unit
coincides with the product number of the connected
lens, the CAC data stored in the unit are read out
automatically.



 









Chromatic aberration compensation function
To correct the chromatic aberration, record the chromatic
aberration characteristics of the lens for the zooming ratio,
iris, and focal distance in the unit and connect a lens suitable
for these characteristics. Then perform the correction in
accordance with the zooming ratio, iris, and focus distance
of the lens.
The CAC data for the following 4 kinds of lenses are stored
in the unit at the time of shipment from the factory.
Indication on the unit
Supporting lens model No.
HA16 6.3BERM-M58
HA16 6.3BERM-M58
HA22 7.8BERM-M58
HA22 7.8BERM-M58
HJ17e 7.6B IASE
HJ17E 7.6B IASE
HJ22e 7.6B IASE
HJ22E 7.6B IASE
Note
After the release of this unit, visit our Web site at the address
given below for details on new lenses compatible with this
function and any changes in this function.
Confirmation of the CAC operation status
1
2
When the menu is not displayed on the viewfinder
screen, press the MODE CHECK button.
If letters of the “CAC” are indicated at the left top of the
viewfinder screen, the CAC is operating properly. If the
letters of “CAC” are not indicated, the CAC is not
operating.
Open <VF INDICATOR2> screen on the VF page and
set the menu option CAC to “ON”, and then the letters of
“CAC” are indicated in the left top of the viewfinder
screen.
 






https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)
105
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 106 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
To read the CAC FILE from an SD memory card
1
午後6時38分
7
Insert the SD memory card with the CAC file
downloaded from our support website.
For downloading, refer to the following URL.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
2
3
Open the <CAC FILE CARD READ> screen from the
FILE page via the menu operation.
Select TITLE READ using the jog dial button and then
press the jog dial button.
The lens product number is indicated in the TITLE
column.
Select a file containing data and
perform the read operation
again.
READ NG
ERROR
(Data cannot be read out)
Insert an SD memory card
again, and then perform the
read operation again.
READ NG
CANNOT ACCESS
(It is impossible to access the
data)
It is impossible to access the SD
memory card while the card is in
use. After completion of the
respective operations, perform
the read operation again.
Select CARD FILE SELECT using the jog dial button
and then press the jog dial button.
READ NG
FILE DATA INVALID
(File data are abnormal)
The written file data have errors.
Use the proper file data.
Select the TITLE No. to be read and press the jog dial
button.
READ NG
FILE MEMORY FULL
(Memory is full)
The memory is full, and new
data cannot be written on it.
Delete unnecessary CAC data
and then perform the write
operation again.
Select READ using the jog dial button and then press
the jog dial button.
The following screen is displayed.
8


 










106
Measures
READ NG
NO FILE
(No file is available)









6
Error message
Insert an SD memory card.



 
5
If the following messages are displayed when the jog
dial button is pressed, the data cannot be read out.
READ NG
NO CARD
(No SD memory card is
inserted)

4
Select YES using the jog dial button and then press the
jog dial button.
The CAC file for the lens selected in step 4 is recorded
in memory on the unit.
If EMPTY is selected in MEM STORE NO.: EMPTY/1/
2... at this time, data are recorded in available space of
the CAC file numbers on the unit. If “1” is selected, the
data will overwrite the contents of CAC file No. 1.
9
To store multiple CAC files in the unit, repeat steps 3 to
7.
To close the menu operation, press the MENU button.
The setting menu disappears, and the current state of
the unit is displayed.
Notes
The unit is capable of recording 32 CAC files. When the
CAC file is full, delete any of the CAC files.
While the SD memory card is inserted, the busy lamp for
the SD memory card blinks, which is normal and not a
malfunction.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 107 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
To delete the CAC file from the unit
1
To delete the CAC file from the SD memory card
Open <CAC ADJ> screen from the MAINTENANCE
page using the menu operation.
The following screen is displayed.
1


 



 


4
5
6









2
Select “OFF” in CAC CONTROL.
Select the lens product number to be deleted in CAC
FILE NO. using the jog dial button.
3
Press the jog dial button to fix the selected operation.
Select CAC FILE DELETE using the jog dial button and
then press the jog dial button.
When the following screen is displayed, move the arrow
(cursor) to YES by turning the jog dial button and then
press the jog dial button.
4
5
Select TITLE READ using the jog dial button and then
press the jog dial button.
The lens product number is displayed in the TITLE part.
Select CARD FILE SELECT using the jog dial button
and then press the jog dial button.
Select the TITLE No. of the CAC file to be deleted, and
then press the jog dial button.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording









2
3
Open <CAC FILE CARD READ> screen from the FILE
page using the menu operation.
The following screen is displayed.
Select DELETE using the jog dial button and then press
the jog dial button.
The following screen is displayed.


 


 
6
Move the arrow (cursor) to YES by turning the jog dial
button and then press the jog dial button.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)
107
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 108 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
If the following messages are displayed when the jog dial
button is pressed, the data cannot be deleted.
Error message
Measures
DELETE NG
NO CARD
(No SD memory card is
inserted)
Insert an SD memory card.
DELETE NG
ERROR
(Data cannot be deleted)
It is assumed that the SD
memory card is defective.
Replace the card.
When CAC file does not operate properly
The following error messages are displayed in the viewfinder
when CAC does not operate properly or CAC files cannot be
read properly.
Error message
DELETE NG
Eject the SD memory card and
WRITE PROTECT
release write protection.
(The SD card is write protected)
DELETE NG
CANNOT ACCESS
(It is impossible to access the
data)
It is impossible to access the SD
memory card while the card is in
use. After completion of the
respective operations, perform
the delete operation again.
DELETE NG
NO FILE
(No file is available)
Select the file No. containing
astigmatism files and perform
the delete operation.
7
午後6時38分
Move the arrow (cursor) to YES by turning the jog dial
button and then press the jog dial button. When the
write operation is completed, the following message is
displayed.
Meanings
Measures
FILE MEMORY
FULL
When the CAC file is Read the CAC file in a
read from the SD
mode other than
memory card to
EMPTY mode.
memory in the unit in
EMPTY mode, the
built-in memory is full.
CAC FILE DATA
NOT FOUND
When the CAC
function is set to ON
and no CAC file
applicable to the
connected lens is
available. This is
displayed when the
power of the unit is
turned on.
Read the CAC file that
is applicable for the
lens to be used.
CAC LENS DATA When the unit cannot
INVALID
respond to the return
data from the lens, or
when any responses
other than ones as
defined in the CAC file
are returned.
This lens does not
support CAC
correction. Although it
cannot execute CAC
correction, using this
lens presents no
problems.
LENS
INITIALIZE NOT
COMPLETED
Turn the focus/zoom
ring to through the
intermediate point of
the operation range.
Initialization of the
lens position detection
(focus/zoom) in the
encoder type is not
completed yet.
Notes

108
When lens optical accessories (converter lens,
attachment) are installed, the CAC may not operate
properly due to changes in the optical characteristics of
the lens. In this case, turn off the CAC function.
When focus servo is used with Canon lenses, data must
be recorded after initialization in the automatic initialization
mode. The state where the focus ring is moving may be
recorded.
When the CAC does not operate and no error message is
displayed, the version of the software for the lens may be
out of date and invalid. Please contact the lens
manufacturer.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 109 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Cinematograph Settings
Menu items used for the film production are registered together in the scene file.
Performing Cinematograph Settings
1
2
Open <SCENE> screen from the file page using the
menu operation.
Select READ CINEMATOGRAPH with the JOG dial
button, and press the JOG dial button.
Confirmation and Modification of Cinematograph
Settings
1
2
Open the USER MENU by pressing the MENU button.
Select the item to confirm with the JOG dial button, and
press the JOG dial button.
 



















3
The following screen is displayed, and move the arrow
(cursor) to “YES” by turning the JOG dial button, and
press the JOG dial button.
Data stored in the cinematograph area of the built-in
memory will be read out, and the setting is completed.


 
4
Press the MENU button to complete the menu
operation.
Notes
It is recommended to use with the following settings after
the cinematograph setting are read:
GAIN switch: LOW
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch: CAM
WHITE BAL switch: PRST
As the cinematograph setting is read out, AWB memory
will be set to 3200 K, and viewfinder marker will be set to
A.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording


 





3
Contents of the selected setting are displayed.











4
5
6
7
To change the setting, move the arrow (cursor) to the
item to change, and set the item to change by pressing
the JOG dial button.
Change the setting values using the JOG dial button.
Set the change by pressing the JOG dial button.
Press the MENU button to complete the menu
operation.
Note
It is possible to operate by displaying the MAIN MENU by
pressing the MENU button for over 3 seconds, or displaying
the OPTION MENU by pressing the LIGHT button even after
the cinematograph is set.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Cinematograph Settings
109
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 110 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Return Cinematograph Setting to Factory Setting
1
2
Display the MAIN MENU by pressing the MENU button
for over 3 seconds, then open the <INITIALIZE> screen
from the FILE page.
3
Select READ FACTORY DATA with the JOG dial button,
and press the JOG dial button.
The following screen is displayed, so move the arrow
(cursor) to “YES” by turning the JOG dial button, and
press the JOG dial button.
Data stored in the Factory setting area of the built-in
memory will be read in, and the setting is completed.

 



 
4
Press the MENU button to complete the menu
operation.
Difference Between Cinematograph Settings and Normal Settings
The following are the differences between the cinematograph setting and the normal factory settings.
Menu settings
Page
SYSTEM SETTING
PAINT
VF
CAM OPERATION
110
Menu screen
Item
SYSTEM MODE
SYSTEM MODE
VFR
OUTPUT SEL
SIGNAL FORMAT
P-10LOG
OUTPUT ITEM
DOWNCON MODE
HD SDI A · B OUT MARKER CENTER MARK
FRAME MARK
FRAME SIG
MONI OUT MARKER
CENTER MARK
FRAME MARK
FRAME SIG
LOW SETTING
„MATRIX TABLE
MID SETTING
„MATRIX TABLE
HIGH SETTING
„MATRIX TABLE
„CAMERA SETTING
DETAIL
VF DISPLAY
STATUS MODE
LOW LIGHT LVL
VF MARKER
SAFETY MARK (A)
FRAME MARK (A)
FRAME SIG (A)
SAFETY MARK (B)
FRAME MARK (B)
FRAME SIG (B)
VF INDICATOR1
EXTENDER
GAIN
ZOOM LVL
SYSTEM MODE
VF INDICATOR3
BATTERY
AUDIO LVL
SHUTTER SPEED
SYNCHRO SCAN2
SHUTTER SELECT
POSITION4 SEL
POSITION5 SEL
POSITION6 SEL
USER SW
USER2 SW
MARKER SEL (USER3 SW)
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Cinematograph Settings
Factory setting
Cinematograph
setting
1080-59.94i
OFF
4:2:2
OFF
MENU ONLY
SQUEEZE
1
OFF
4:3
1
OFF
4:3
A
A
A
ON
NORMAL
35%
1
OFF
4:3
1
OFF
4:3
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
VF GAM
VF MARK
1080-23.98PsF
ON
4:4:4
ON
STATUS
LT-BOX
2
ON
VISTA
2
ON
VISTA
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
FILM-REC
OFF
2
ON
VISTA
2
ON
VISTA
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
90.0deg
45.0deg
1/60
REC SW
VF GAM
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 111 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
USER MENU
Page
USER
MENU1
USER
MENU
(SYS)
SYSTEM MODE
OUTPUT SEL
MASTER PED
BLACK GAMMA (LOW)
MASTER GAMMA
F-REC DYNAMIC LVL
F-REC BLACK STR LVL
DETAIL
USER MAIN SW
USER1 SW
USER2 SW
MARKER SEL
TEXT MEMO SW
SIDE SW LOCK
SD CARD READ/WRITE
SCENE
REC FUNCTION
BRIGHTNESS (LCD)
COLOR LEVEL (LCD)
CONTRAST (LCD)
BACKLIGHT (LCD)
BATTERY SELECT
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
FIRST REC TC
HOURS METER
Cinematograph
setting
SYSTEM MODE
OUTPUT SEL
BLACK GAMMA (LOW)
B.GAMMA RANGE (LOW)
MASTER GAMMA
GAMMA MODE SEL
F-REC DYNAMIC LVL
F-REC BLACK STR LVL
DETAIL
SIDE SW LOCK
COLOR TEMP PRE
SD CARD READ/WRITE
SCENE
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
USER
MENU2
Factory setting
No page display
REC FUNCTION
BRIGHTNESS (LCD)
COLOR LEVEL (LCD)
CONTRAST (LCD)
BACKLIGHT (LCD)
BATTERY SELECT
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
FIRST REC TC
HOURS METER
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Cinematograph Settings
111
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 112 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
RGB 4:4:4 Output and P-10LOG Settings
This unit can output signals suitable for Digital-Intermediate,
which is a film production workflow.
RGB 4:4:4 Output and P-10LOG Settings
Link A signal is output from the HD SDI A connector and
Link B signal is output from the HD SDI B connector by
performing the cinematograph setting, and it is possible to
set these signals as P-10LOG for RGB 4:4:4 output. For
cinematograph settings, see page 109 and later.
Refer to the following procedures to set the above without
using the cinematograph setting.
1
2
Notes
Recording to the P2 card and MON OUT signal will be
YPBPR 4:2:2 even if the signal is set to P-10LOG for RGB
4:4:4.
If you select “ON” in P-10LOG setting, 2D-CMS will
operate in accordance with P-10LOG as well.
Example of Digital Cinema Recording
Film camera
AJ-HPX3700G
Ð
Open the <GAMMA> screen from the PAINT page with
menu operation.
Equipment to convert
film to digital data
Select GAMMA MODE SEL using the JOG dial button,
and press the JOG dial button.
Convert
film to
data
Ð
Ð
Hard disk recorder, etc.
 
Ð








Color grating process
Ð
Film recording
Ð
Film print
Ð
Screening
3
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button and select “FILM-REC”, then
press the JOG dial button.
Transition Chart of FILM-REC Gamma to P10LOG
Open <OUTPUT SEL> screen from SYSTEM SETTING
page with menu operation.
100
VIDEO-REC
Select SIGNAL FORMAT using the JOG dial button, and
press the JOG dial button.
FILM-REC
50

 


・







NORMAL
18% GRAY
30
0
1000
+4 stop
+3 stop
+2 stop
500
+1 stop
P-10LOG
Normal
-1 stop
-2 stop
-5 stop
6
7
8
9
112
0
-6
-5
-4 stop
-4
Turn the JOG dial button and select “4:4:4”, then press
the JOG dial button.
Select P-10LOG using the JOG dial button, and press
the JOG dial button.
Turn the JOG dial button and select “ON”, then press
the JOG dial button.
Press the MENU button to complete the menu
operation.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: RGB 4:4:4 Output and P-10LOG Settings
-3 stop
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 113 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Preparation
Power Supply
A battery pack or an external DC power supply can be used as the unit’s power supply.
Using a Battery Pack
Battery packs from the following manufacturers can be used:
Anton/Bauer
IDX
PACO
Sony
Preparation
The type of the battery can be checked or changed through
the menu screen on the viewfinder or on the monitor.
Pressing the MODE CHECK button on the side of the unit
displays the current type of the battery in the upper right
corner of the viewfinder display.
Navigate the menu to open the <BATTERY/P2CARD>
screen from the MAIN OPERATION page. Then, through
the BATTERY SELECT menu option, you can check and
change the battery type.
 









  
Notes
Other batteries may be used by changing the menu
setting, but system compatibility is not guaranteed.
Charge the battery pack with the battery charger before
using it. (Please refer to the battery charger’s instruction
manual for information about charging.)
Preparation: Power Supply
113
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 114 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Mounting the Battery and Setting the Battery Type
Using an Anton/Bauer Battery Pack
1
Mount the Anton/Bauer battery pack.
a
b
3
Setting the battery type.
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.
Select BATTERY SELECT from the <BATTERY/
P2CARD> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
Please refer to [BATTERY SETTING1] (page 196) for
more information.
The following Anton/Bauer batteries can be used:
PROPAC14
TRIMPAC14
HYTRON50
HYTRON140
DIONIC90
DIONIC160
c
a. Power supply output connector for lighting
b. Anton/Bauer battery pack
c. Lighting control switch
<For your information>
The Anton/Bauer battery holder includes both a power
supply output connector for lighting and a lighting control
switch, which are convenient when attaching a light. Please
contact Anton/Bauer for information about the lighting
system.
2
Insert the battery and slide it in the direction of the
arrow.
d
d. Release lever
<For your information>
Removing the battery pack
Completely push down and hold the release lever on the
battery holder. Then, slide the battery pack in the
opposite direction to the arrow while holding the lever
down.
114
Preparation: Power Supply
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 115 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
When using a V-mount type battery pack
Using an NP-1 type battery pack
Mount the V-mount adapter plate (optional).
Fit the plate, sliding it in the manner shown in the
illustration.
CAUTION:
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified
service personnel only. To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock do not perform any servicing other than
that contained in the operating instructions unless you
are qualified to do so.
1
2
Remove the battery holder.
Mount the NP-1 type battery case on the unit.
4
Tighten the mounting screws.
Tighten the power contact screws.
Insert the upper part of the removed cover in the
direction of the arrow.
Align the holes in the bottom part (metal part) of the
cover with the holes in the case, and secure the
cover with the screw.
Preparation
1
2
3
Note
When mounting the battery holder, take care not to
pinch the connection cord.
a
3
a. Battery case (for NP-1 type)
Setting the battery type.
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.
Select BATTERY SELECT from the <BATTERY/
P2CARD> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
When using another battery which cannot be selected
using the BATTERY SELECT item setting, select
“TYPE A” or “TYPE B”, and set the items that
correspond to the characteristics of the battery.
Please refer to [BATTERY SETTING2] (page 197) for
more information.
Note
For information about the V-mount adapter plate, please
contact the store where you purchased the unit.
Preparation: Power Supply
115
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 116 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Use of the external DC power supply
1
Connect the external DC power supply to the DC IN
socket on the unit.
DC IN socket
External DC power
supply
2
3
Turn on the power switch of the external DC power
supply. (If the power switch is available on the external
DC power supply.)
Turn on the POWER switch on the unit.
Inrush current is generated when the power of the
unit is turned on. Insufficient power supply when
turning on the power may cause a malfunction. We
recommend using an external DC power supply with
double the capacity of the total power consumption
of the unit and any other connected device that is
turned by interlocking with the power on of the unit
(the viewfinder). Select the DC cord that is
recommended for the external DC power supply.
Confirm the pin arrangements of the DC output
connector of the external DC power supply and the
DC IN socket on the unit, and connect the proper
polarities to each other.
If the +12 V power supply is connected to the GND
connector in error, it may cause a fire or failure of the
unit.
Pin No.
Signal
4
1
2
3
DC IN socket
116
Preparation: Power Supply
1
GND
2, 3
—
4
+12 V
Notes
If both the battery pack and the external DC power
supply are connected, the electric power is supplied
from the external DC power supply. While the external
DC power supply is used, the battery can be mounted
and removed on/from the unit.
When the external DC power supply is used, ensure
that the power switch of the external DC power supply
is turned on first and then the POWER switch on the
unit is turned on. In the case of the reverse operation,
a malfunction may occur on the unit since the output
voltage of the external DC power supply is raised
slowly.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 117 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back
and White Shading Adjustments
Mounting the Lens
1
Adjusting the Lens Flange Back
Raise the lens clamping lever and remove the mount
cap.
a
If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and wideangle positions during zoom operations, adjust the flange
back (distance from the lens mounting surface to the image
formation surface).
Once adjusted, the flange back does not need to be readjusted as long as the same lens is mounted on the
camera.
b
2
a. Lens clamping lever
b. Mount cap
1
To mount the lens, align the indentation at the top center
of the lens mount with the center mark of the lens.
2
Mount the lens on the camera.
Make sure you connect the lens cable.
Preparation
Note
Please also refer to the lens instruction manual for directions
on adjustment and locations of individual lens parts.
Set the lens iris to manual, and fully open the iris.
c
Approximately 3 m
c. Mark
3
Lower the lens clamping lever to clamp the lens.
3
4
4
Secure the cable through the cable clamp, and plug it
into the LENS connector.
Note
5
7
d. LENS connector
5
Loosen the F.f (Flange focus) ring clamping screw.
F.b (Flange back) may be indicated on some lenses.
6
d
Place the flange back adjustment chart about 3 m from
the lens and adjust the lighting on the chart to obtain an
appropriate video output level.
If the video level is too high, use the filters or the shutter.
Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position, either
manually or by electric drive.
Aim the lens at the flange back adjustment chart and
turn the distance ring to bring the chart into focus.
Set the zoom ring to the wide-angle position and turn
the F.f ring to bring the chart into focus.
While focusing, take care not to move the distance ring.
Adjust the lens flange back.
Notes
Please refer to the lens instruction manual for guidance on
lens handling.
When the lens is removed, install the mount cap to protect
the device.
Preparation: Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments
117
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 118 ページ 2008年10月15日
8
9
水曜日
Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the lens is in focus at both the
telephoto and wide-angle positions.
午後6時38分
7
Firmly tighten the F.f ring clamping screw.
Notes
The zebra pattern will not cover the whole screen if
there is any unevenness in the lighting. In this case,
make adjustments to the position of the lighting, etc.
Make adjustments to the position of the lighting, etc.
also when the lens aperture is not between F4 and
F10.
Be absolutely sure to leave the electronic shutter at
OFF.
Adjusting the Lens White Shading
Method to correct the waveform to be more flat by
combining the sawtooth-shaped waveform and the
parabola waveform when watching the respective
waveforms of R, G and B of the video signals.
Note
Coloring may occur in the vertical direction near where the
lens aperture is open even when the white shading has been
adjusted. This is something that is inherent to lenses and
optical systems and is therefore not indicative of a failure or
malfunctioning.
1
2
3
4
Attach the lens to the camera.
At this stage, do not forget to connect the lens cable.
Set the electronic shutter to OFF and the gain to “L
(0 dB).”
If the extender is attached to the lens, release the
extender function.
Perform a menu operation to open the <VF DISPLAY>
screen from the VF page, check that the settings
selected for the ZEBRA1 DETECT item, ZEBRA2
DETECT item and ZEBRA2 item match the settings
shown in the figure below. If they differ, make the
appropriate changes, and then close the menu screen.
 














5
6
Set the ZEBRA switch on the viewfinder to [ON].
Shoot a white sheet of paper with no unevenness of
color.
Note
Since fluorescent lights, mercury lamps and other such
kinds of lighting tend to flicker, use a light source which
is free from flicker such as sunlight or a halogen lamp.
118
Set the lens aperture control to manual, and adjust it so
that the zebra pattern covers the whole screen.
Check that the lens aperture is between F4 and F10.
8
1Set the WHITE BAL selector switch to [A] or [B], and
use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to adjust the white
balance automatically (AWB).
2Use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to adjust the black
balance automatically (ABB).
3Again, use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to adjust the
white balance automatically (AWB).
9 Repeat step 7.
10 Using the menu operation, open the <WHITE
SHADING> screen from the MAINTENANCE page and
a range of items from R H SAW item to B V PARA item,
so that the waveform is more flat.


 











H SAW
Before
correction
After correction
H PARA
11 When an extender is fitted to the lens, switch on the
extender function, and repeat steps 7-9. The unit stores,
as one lens file data item, two different correction
values, one for when the extender is fitted and the other
for when it is not fitted. When a ratio converter is
inserted, the correction value for the latter correction
value is used.
Preparation: Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 119 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
When making the white shading correction, make the
adjustment while observing the R, G, and B waveforms in
the horizontal and vertical directions with the waveform
monitor.
This now completes the white shading adjustments.
The adjustment values are now stored in the non-volatile
memory so that even when the unit’s power is turned off,
there will be no further need to perform the white shading
adjustment.
Preparation
Preparation: Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments
119
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 120 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Preparing for Audio Input
Take the following steps to prepare the camera for connecting audio input devices.
When Using the Front Microphone
The unit can be equipped with the AJ-MC900G stereo
microphone kit (optional).
1
3
Connect the microphone cable to the MIC IN jack on the
camera.
Open the microphone holder.
b
b. MIC IN jack
4
2
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [FRONT] depending on the
audio channel to be recorded.
Mount the microphone and tighten the clamping screw.
The microphone must be attached with the UP mark on
the microphone facing up.
c
a
c. AUDIO IN switch
a. Clamping screw
When Using a Wireless Receiver
When Using the Unislot Wireless Receiver
1
2
120
Remove the cover to insert the wireless receiver and
secure it with the screws.
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [W.L.] depending on the
audio channel to be recorded.
Preparation: Preparing for Audio Input
3
When using a 2-channel wireless receiver, select
“DUAL” in the WIRELESS TYPE menu option. The
menu option WIRELESS TYPE can be found in the
<MIC/AUDIO2> screen on the MAIN OPERATION
page.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 121 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
When Using Audio Devices
1
2
3
Connect the audio device to the AUDIO IN jack with the
XLR cable.
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [REAR] for the channel to
which the XLR cable is connected.
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the rear
panel to [LINE].
a
Preparation
c
b
a. LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch
b. AUDIO IN switch
c. AUDIO IN jack
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod
When mounting the camera on a tripod, use the tripod adapter supplied with the camera.
1
Removing the Camera from the Tripod Adapter
Mount the tripod adapter on the tripod.
a
c
b
d
e
c. Tripod adapter
d. Red lever
e. Black lever
a. Tripod adapter
b. Pan head
Note
Select an appropriate hole in the adapter, taking into
account the center of gravity of the camera and tripod
adapter combined.
Also, make sure that the diameter of the selected hole
matches the diameter of the pan head screw.
2
Mount the camera on the tripod adapter.
Slide the camera forward along the grooves until you
hear a “click”.
While holding the red lever down, move the black lever in the
direction of the arrow, and slide the camera backward to
remove it.
Note
If the tripod adapter pin does not return to its original position
after the camera has been removed, hold the red lever down
and move the black lever in the direction of the arrow again,
in order to return the pin to its original position.
Please note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin
remains in the center.
Preparation: Mounting the Camera on a Tripod
121
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 122 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
To detach the shoulder strap, first open the hooks, then
detach the strap.
Shoulder strap
Note
Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached.
Press to open the
hook.
Attaching the Rain Cover
When using the SHAN-RC700 Rain Cover
a
b
b
a. Tighten the cord
b. Secure with the surface fastener
122
Preparation: Attaching the Shoulder Strap
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 123 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Connection of the remote control unit
(AJ-RC10G)
It is possible to control some of the functions remotely by
connecting the remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional).
When AJ-RC10G is connected to the REMOTE connector
on the unit and the power switches of both of the unit and
AJ-RC10G are turned on, the unit automatically enters the
remote control mode.
The remote control mode is released when AJ-RC10G is
removed or the power for the AJ-RC10G is turned off.
In the remote control mode, the following switches and
buttons on the unit are disabled.
SHUTTER switch
MENU button
Jog dial button
GAIN switch
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch
WHITE BAL switch
USER MAIN button
USER 1 button
USER 2 button
When the remote control is connected, recording and
playback can be controlled through both the unit and the AJRC10G.
Notes
The state that was adjusted by connecting AJ-RC10G is
stored in the unit. Not to store the adjusted state in the
unit, open the FUNCTION MENU of AJ-RC10G to set the
RC DATA SAVE item to “OFF”.
When the dedicated cable is connected or removed,
ensure that the POWER switches on both the main unit
and AJ-RC10G are turned off.
Use Ver 1.11-00-000 or a later version of AJ-RC10G.
See the P2 support page on the following website for
information about upgrades to AJ-RC10G.
Preparation
Switch functions in the remote control mode
Recording and playback Operations in the
remote control mode
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
b
AJ-RC10G
a
a. REMOTE connector
b. Dedicated cable
Notes for the remote control unit
When this unit and AJ-RC10G are connected, the following
functions differ from those described in the operating
instructions that accompany AJ-RC10G.
A. KNEE ON button
When “DRS” has been selected in the AUTO KNEE SW
menu option of this unit, this button can be used to
switch DRS on/off. This button is lit when DRS is on and
not lit when DRS is off.
The menu option AUTO KNEE SW can be found in the
<SW MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
Preparation: Connection of the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G)
123
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 124 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
CHARA ON button
This button is used to select whether to superimpose
characters on the video signal output to the MON OUT
connector of this unit. Note that the MON OUT
CHARACTER switch of this unit does not function when
the AJ-RC10G is connected.
Scene file
Scene files created on other types of device cannot be
read. When an attempt is made to read such a file, AJRC10G displays “NG” on the liquid crystal screen.
Menu option
GAMMA menu
The options available in GAMMA-MODE-SEL are as
follows.
HD, SD, F-LIKE1, F-LIKE2, F-LIKE3, FILM-REC,
VIDEO-REC
DYMC-LVL and BSR-LVL are added to the 4th layer.
The variable ranges for these are as follows.
DYMC-LVL: 200% - 600%
BSR-LVL: 00% - 30%
Note, however, that these values can only be changed
when “FILM-REC” has been selected in GAMMAMODE-SEL.
V-KNSLP and V-KNPNT are added to the 5th layer.
The variable ranges for these are as follows.
V-KNSLP: 150% - 500%
V-KNPNT: 30% - 107%
Note, however, that these values can only be changed
when “VIDEO-REC” has been selected in GAMMAMODE-SEL.
WHITE menu
The variable range of COLR-TEMP-PRE, TEMP-A
and TEMP-B is 2300K - 9900K.
KNEE menu
CHROMA LEVEL is added to the 5th layer.
The variable range for this is OFF/–99% - +40%.
HI-COLOR LVL is added to the 6th layer.
The variable range for this is 1 - 32.
SHUTTER menu
“S.S2” can be selected in MODE.
The variable range for this is 1/1.0 - 1/250.0.
The values which can be selected in SPED differ
depending on the settings of this unit.
When “FIX” has been selected in MODE, the options
available in SPED are as follows.
1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000, HALF, 180.0d, 172.8d, 144.0d, 120.0d,
90.0d, 45.0d
The values that can be selected in SPED differ
depending on the settings of the SYSTEM MODE
menu option in this unit.
SYNCRO SCAN DISP is added to the 2nd layer.
When “S.S” has been selected in MODE, it is possible
to select between SEC and DEG as units for the
values displayed in SPED. The changes to the units
are reflected in this unit.
When “S.S” has been selected in MODE, the variable
ranges of SPED are as follows.
For SEC: 1/1.0 - 1/7200 (selectable values differ
depending on the settings of this unit)
For DEG: 3.0d - 350.0d
SKIN DTL menu
The options available in OUTPUT are as follows.
MONI, SDI A, SDI B
A zebra is added to the colors of the table selected in
SDTL.
SCORG of the 3rd layer changes to SKIN DTL
EFFECT. The variable range for this is 0 - 31.
FUNC menu
The options available in SELECT of the 4th layer are
as follows.
INH, I.OVR, S.BLK, B.GAMMA, Y GET, DRS,
ASSIST, C.TEMP, FRATE, VFR, VF GAM, AUDIO
CH1, AUDIO CH2, REC SW, RET SW, PRE REC,
SLOT SEL, PC MODE
Note, however, that the C.TEMP function will not work
when assigned to a user button on AJ-RC10G.
The variable range of BLK-GAMMA of the 5th layer is
–8 - 8.
RANGE is added next to BLK-GAMMA of the 5th
layer. The variable range for this is 1 - 3.
FRAME-RATE is added to the 6th layer.
The variable range for this is 1 - 60. Note, however,
that the variable range will differ depending on the
settings of this unit. Also, if the unit is not recording
VFR, values can be changed but there is no effect on
the image.
Attaching the Front Audio Level Control Knob
If you use the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control frequently,
attach the accessory knob so that it can be easily operated.
a
c
b
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
124
d
e
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control
Screw
Marks
Knob (included)
Screw (included)
Preparation: Attaching the Front Audio Level Control Knob
Remove the screw in the center of the FRONT AUDIO
LEVEL control, and attach the accessory knob (included)
using the screw (included). When attaching the knob, be
sure to align the marks on the control with the marks on the
knob.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 125 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Connection of the DC OUT connector and External
REC start/stop switch
It is possible to draw 1.5 A current from the DC OUT
connector of the unit.
Recording start/stop can be controlled by connecting an
external switch to this connector.
Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting an LED to this
connector, it is useful for shooting video when fixing the
camera on a crane.
Note
Make sure the total of current output from DC OUT,
REMOTE, VF, and LENS connector do not exceed 2.5 A.
Preparation
DC OUT connector
4
1
3
2
Connector at the cable side
HR10A-7P-4P(73)
(Hirose Denki)
LED
Resistance
Max. 50 mA
1:
2:
3:
4:
Recording start/stop
GND
TALLY OUT
Open collector output on the unit side.
TALLY ON:
Low impedance
TALLY OFF:
High impedance
Recording start/stop switch
This is connected in parallel to the REC START button on the
unit or the VTR button on the lens.
+12 V
Preparation: Connection of the DC OUT connector and External REC start/stop switch
125
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 126 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
A clip is a data group that includes the images and sounds
created from one shooting session, together with additional
information such as text memos and meta data.
The following manipulations can be performed using the
cursor and SET buttons, while checking the images
displayed on the LCD monitor:
Playback, delete, copy or restore the clip.
Add or delete a shot mark and a text memo on the clip
thumbnail.
Copy part of a clip by using the text memo.
Change the thumbnail image.
Format P2 cards and SD memory cards.
Uploading and editing clip metadata from the SD memory
card
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
Thumbnail screens are configured as follows:
THUMBNAIL
OPERATION
DELETE
FORMAT
REPAIR CLIP
RE-CONNECTION
COPY
EXCH. THUMBNAIL
DEVICE SETUP
EXIT
ALL CLIP
SAME FORMAT CLIPS
SELECTED CLIPS
MARKED CLIPS
TEXT MEMO CLIPS
PROPERTY
CLIP PROPERTY
CARD STATUS
SLOT CLIPS
SETUP
EXIT
ALL HIDE
MARKER IND.
TEXT MEMO IND.
WIDE IND.
PROXY IND.
DATA DISPLAY
DATE FORMAT
THUMBNAIL SIZE
PLAYBACK RESUME
THUMBNAIL INIT
EXIT
META DATA
LOAD
RECORD
USER CLIP NAME
INITIALIZE
PROPERTY
LANGUAGE
EXIT
126
HDD
EXPORT
EXPLORE
FORMAT
SETUP
EXIT
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
DEVICES
PROPERTY SETUP
EXIT
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 127 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Thumbnail Screen
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail
screen on the LCD monitor. Pressing the THUMBNAIL
button again returns the display to the regular display. When
switching is done from the regular screen display to the
thumbnail screen display, all the clips will be displayed on
the thumbnail screen.
Pressing the THUMBNAIL MENU button allows you to
navigate the thumbnail menu.
Note
With the TCG switch positioned at [SET], when the time
code or user bits are set or when camera menus are being
manipulated, thumbnails cannot be manipulated.
1
3
The type of the thumbnail indicated on the display and
the types of the other information screens are indicated.
ALL:
Display all clips.
SAME FORMAT:
The clips in the same format as the system
format are shown. To check the format,
consult system mode and REC FORMAT
indicated on the STATUS screen of the
viewfinder. For more details, refer to
[Viewfinder Status Indication Layout]
(page 77).
SELECT:
The clips selected with the SET button are
shown.
MARKER:
Display clips with shot marks.
TEXT MEMO:
Display clips with text memo data.
SLOT n: Display clips in the specified P2 card.
(n: 1 to 5, which indicates slots 1-5.)
UPDATING..:
Indicated when the unit is updating the screen
or reading data. When the screen is being
updated, the rotating icon
is indicated.
Please refer to [Switching the Thumbnail Display]
(page 130) for more information.
4
6
5
7
Thumbnail screen
9
10
8
11 12 13 14 15
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
2
1. Display Mode
2. Slot numbers and HDD status
This section indicates on which P2 card the pointed clip
is recorded. The number of the slot that contains the
appropriate P2 card is indicated in yellow. If the clip is
recorded on more than one P2 card, then the numbers
of all slots that contain the appropriate cards are
indicated. The numbers of the other slots are shown in
white if they contain P2 cards.
When the following P2 card is inserted, the slot number
is displayed with a pink frame.
RUN DOWN CARD
(A P2 card on which the maximum number of overwrites
has been exceeded.)
DIR ENTRY NG CARD
(A P2 card on which the directory structure is not
supported.)
The USB HDD section is indicated as follows:
Other than the USB HOST mode: gray
Not connected in USB HOST mode: gray
HDD recognized and usable in USB HOST mode:
white
HDD recognized and thumbnails shown in USB
HOST mode: yellow
HDD recognized and data unable to be copied in USB
HOST: red
3. Time Display
You can set this to display the time code at the start of
clip recording, the user bits at the start of clip recording,
the shooting time, the shooting date, the shooting date
and time or USER CLIP NAME.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Screen
127
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 128 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
4. Recording mode
The recording mode for the clip on which the pointer is
located is indicated.
5. System mode
The format for the clip on which the pointer is located is
indicated.
6. Duration
The duration of the clip on which the pointer is located is
indicated.
7. USB HOST mode indicator
Indicated when the mode has been switched to USB
HOST.
8. Clip Number
The numbers set by the camera for all the clips
recognized correctly by the P2 card. These numbers are
allocated in chronological order, by shooting dates and
times.
If clips cannot be played because of different recording
formats, they are displayed in red.
9.
Defective Clip Indicator and
Unknown Clip indicator
This marker is displayed for defective clips, which may
result from a variety of causes, e.g., powering-down
during recording.
Clip with yellow defective clip indicators can be restored
in some cases. Please refer to [Restoring Clips]
(page 135) for more information.
A clip displayed with a red defective clip indicator cannot
be restored and must be deleted. If the clip cannot be
deleted, format the P2 card.
is displayed for clips such as those which differ in
format from the P2 standard.
10.
Incomplete Clip Indicator
Indicates that although a clip is recorded across multiple
P2 cards, one of these cards is not inserted into a P2
card slot.
11.
Shot Mark Indicator
This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot mark
attached. Please refer to [Shot Mark] (page 132) for
more information about shot marks.
12.
Indicator for clips with proxy
This marker is displayed for clips with proxy attached.
13.
Text Memo Indicator
This marker is displayed for a clip with a text memo
attached.
14.
Edit Copied Clip Indicator
In models which support edit copying, such as the AJHPM110, this marker is displayed on clips which have
undergone edit copying. For more information about edit
copying, see the instruction manual for a model that
supports edit copying.
15.
Wide Clip Indicator
This marker is displayed for clips recorded with the 16:9
aspect ratio. However, it does not accompany clips in
HD format.
128
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Screen
午後6時38分
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 129 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Selecting Thumbnails
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in the
thumbnail screen.
1
2
It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails in the
thumbnail screen for playback. Please refer to [Switching the
Thumbnail Display] (page 130) for more information.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer (yellow
frame) to the desired clip and press the SET button.
The frame around the selected thumbnail changes to a
blue frame. Press the SET button again to deselect the
clip.
Additional clips can be selected by repeating step 1.
e
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
a
b
c
d
a. LCD monitor
b. THUMBNAIL button
c. EXIT button
d.
cursor buttons
SET button
e. THUMBNAIL MENU button
Playing back Clips
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the
desired clip.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button, and the clip under the
pointer will be played back on the LCD monitor.
After playback of the clip under the pointer, subsequent
clips are played back in order, according to when they
were shot. The thumbnail screen returns after the last
clip has been played back.
Notes
When playing back clips, it is not necessary to “select”
the clips (blue frames around the thumbnails).
Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be
played.
4
5
6
Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops the
playback and returns the display to the thumbnail
screen.
Notes
When playback is stopped, the position of the pointer
moves to the clip that was being played back,
regardless of where the playback started.
When the PLAY/PAUSE button is pressed again,
playback will start from the beginning of the clip on
which the pointer is positioned. To begin playback
from the last stop position, set PLAYBACK RESUME
to on. Refer to [Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode]
(page 142) for further details.
After closing the thumbnail screen by pressing the
THUMBNAIL button, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE
button plays back the first clip (i.e., the clip with the
earliest recording date and time), not the clip on which
the pointer was last positioned.
During playback, pressing the REW button starts 4
speed reverse playback, and the FF button starts 4
speed fast playback. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to
return to normal playback.
During clip playback, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button
will temporarily stop (pause) the process.
During a pause, pressing the REW button moves the
pause position to the beginning of the clip. Pressing the
REW button again moves the pause position to the
beginning of the previous clip.
During a pause, pressing the FF button moves the
pause position to the beginning of the next clip.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Selecting Thumbnails
129
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 130 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Switching the Thumbnail Display
The display can be switched so that only those clips matching the specified conditions are displayed in the thumbnail screen.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button. The thumbnail
menu appears.
a
a. THUMBNAIL MENU button
130
3
Select THUMBNAIL from the thumbnail menu. Switch
the thumbnail display by selecting one of the following
items:
ALL CLIP:
Display all clips.
SAME FORMAT CLIPS:
Displays clips of the current system format.
SELECTED CLIPS:
Display randomly selected clips.
MARKED CLIPS:
Display clips with shot marks attached.
TEXT MEMO CLIPS:
Display clips with text memo data attached.
SLOT CLIPS:
Display clips recorded in the P2 card inserted
in the specified slot.
When this item is selected, “SLOT1” to
“SLOT5” are displayed as a sub-menu. Select
the desired slot to display the clips.
SETUP: Please refer to [Setting the Thumbnail Display
Mode] (page 142) for information about this
item.
EXIT:
Close the sub-menu.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Switching the Thumbnail Display
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 131 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Changing thumbnails
It is possible to replace thumbnails with images that include
previously attached text memos while images are recorded
or played back.
1
2
3
5
Select THUMBNAIL TEXT MEMO CLIPS to display
thumbnails of the clips with text memos.
Place the pointer on the clip of the thumbnail that you
intend to change, and then press SET button. Move the
pointer to the text memo display on the lower row.
Select the thumbnail that you intend to replace, place
the pointer on it, and then select OPERATION EXCH.
THUMBNAIL on the thumbnail menu.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
4
Add text memos to images that you intend to change.
Refer to [Text Memo Function] (page 47) for the method
to add text memos.
Press SET button. When the YES/NO confirmation
window is displayed, select YES by using the cursor
button and the SET button. The menu closes and the
thumbnail for the clip is replaced.
Note
Display clip properties by selecting PROPERTY CLIP
PROPERTY on the thumbnail menu to confirm the position
of the thumbnail (the number of frames from the top of the
clip). Since thumbnails come generally from the top of the
clip, “0” is displayed.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Switching the Thumbnail Display
131
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 132 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Shot Mark
A shot mark can be added to a clip thumbnail to distinguish this clip from the others.
1
2
3
4
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip
to which you want to attach a shot mark.
Press the SHOT MARKER button.
A shot mark will be attached to the clip thumbnail under
the pointer.
To delete a shot mark, reposition the pointer over the
clip and press the SHOT MARKER button.
a
Notes
A shot mark can be attached during recording. Please
refer to [Shot Mark Function] (page 48) for more
information.
When adding a shot mark to (or deleting the shot mark
from) a clip recorded across multiple P2 cards, do this with
all these P2 cards inserted into P2 card slots.
a. SHOT MARKER button
Text Memo
During recording or playback, you can add text memos to clips. Text memos can be used to play back clips at some point or
break clips into chunks and copy the necessary portions.
Adding a text memo
Text memos can be added in one of the following ways.
Press the TEXT MEMO button during recording or
playback of a clip. A text memo is added to the position
where the button is pressed.
Press the TEXT MEMO button when the thumbnail screen
is displayed. A text memo is added to the beginning of the
clip.
Note
One clip can have up to 100 text and voice memos in
combination. Note that the unit is not capable of adding or
showing voice memos.
a
a. TEXT MEMO button
132
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Shot Mark
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 133 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Playing back a clip at the position where a text memo is recorded
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select
THUMBNAIL TEXT MEMO CLIPS from the thumbnail
menu.
The clip thumbnails with text memos attached are
displayed in the upper section of the LCD monitor. The
lower section of the LCD monitor shows information
about the text memo on the clip selected by the pointer.
Move the pointer over the clip that contains the desired
text memo to playback and press the SET button.
The pointer moves to the lower part of the LCD monitor.
4
a
b
c
a. Thumbnail display
b. Shows the total number of text memos attached to the
clip.
c. Shows the still image that the text memo is related to.
5
6
With the pointer located in the lower part, move the
pointer to the desired text memo number using the
cursor right and left buttons (YZ). Then, press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playback will start from the time code position of the text
memo where the pointer is located.
If the STOP button is pressed during playback or the
playback has finished at the end of the clip, then the
thumbnail screen appears again with the pointer
replaced with the text memo where the playback
started.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
d
d. The pointer moves down.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select EXIT or
press the EXIT button to return the pointer to the upper
part of the thumbnail screen.
Note
For AVC-Intra format clips which cannot be played back, the
clip thumbnails with text memos may not be displayed. In
this case, a gray section will be displayed instead.
Deleting a text memo
1
2
3
Select the desired text memo by carrying out steps 1-3
for [Playing back a clip at the position where a text
memo is recorded] (page 133).
Move the pointer to the desired text memo, and then
press the SET button.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select
OPERATION DELETE from the thumbnail menu.
YES and NO appear to confirm deletion. Use the cursor
buttons and the SET button to select YES.
The text memo is deleted.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Text Memo
133
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 134 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Using a text memo to break a clip and copy the necessary portion
1
2
3
4
Select a desired text memo in a clip by carrying out
steps 1-3 for [Playing back a clip at the position where a
text memo is recorded] (page 133).
Move the pointer to the desired text memo, and then
press the SET button. You can select more than one text
memo.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select
OPERATION COPY.
Use the cursor buttons and SET buttons to select the
destination slot. Then, select YES to start copying the
clip. The portion between the selected text memo and
the next one is copied. If no text memo is found after the
selected one, then all part after the selected text memo
is copied. If multiple text memos are selected, the
selected sections are copied.
5
When the clip is being copied, the unit indicates the
progress of the copy process and cancellation status. To
discontinue the copy process, press the SET button.
Then, a YES/NO confirmation screen is displayed. Use
the cursor buttons and SET button to select YES.
Note
When copying between text memos, the copied section may
be automatically adjusted depending on the unit frame
number of the employed recording methods.
If the section to be copied is smaller than the unit frame
number, the copy cannot be performed. For more about
recording methods and unit frame numbers, refer to the
table on page 44.
Deleting Clips
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
4
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons
and the SET button to select YES.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip
you want to delete.
Press the SET button to select the clip.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select
OPERATION DELETE from the thumbnail menu.
5
The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue frames) are
deleted by this operation.
Note
Pressing the SET button stops the deletion operation in the
middle.
134
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Deleting Clips
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 135 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Restoring Clips
Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden
powering-down during recording, or removal of the P2 card
being accessed.
Note
Only those clips with yellow defective clip indicators can be
restored. Delete the clips with red defective clip indicators. If
the clip cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.
During restoration of the clips, however, the defective-clip
indicator may change from yellow to red, resulting in inability
to restore the clips.
1
2
3
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip
you want to restore (defective clips are indicated by
defective clip indicators).
Press the SET button to select the clip.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button, and select
OPERATION REPAIR CLIP from the thumbnail
menu.
The confirmation window appears. Use the cursor
buttons and the SET button to select YES.
Reconnection of Incomplete Clips
Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded on
multiple P2 cards (connected clips) are separately copied to
different cards. Reconnection function generates one clip
(the original, connected clip) from incomplete clips.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Use the cursor and SET button to select incomplete
clips to reconnect.
Usually, thumbnails of incomplete clips (clips with
marker) are displayed in line.
3
4
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select
OPERATION RE-CONNECTION from the thumbnail
menu.
The confirmation window appears. Use the cursor
buttons and SET button to select YES.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
4
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Note
indication stays illuminated until all the incomplete clips
that comprise the original clip are reconnected.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Restoring Clips
135
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 136 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Copying Clips
Selected clips can be copied to the P2 card in the desired
slot or SD memory card.
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the
desired clip and press the SET button.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select
OPERATION COPY from the thumbnail menu.
Select slot 1-5 or SD memory card as the destination.
Notes
Do not turn off the power or remove a P2 card while data
is being copied. Doing so may cause the P2 card to fail. If
you should accidentally perform one of the above
operations, defective clips will be generated. Delete them,
and then copy them again.
When clips are copied to P2 cards, all the information on
the clips is copied. However, when they are copied to the
SD memory card*, video and sound information is not
copied, only thumbnails, clip metadata, icons, voice
memo, text memo, proxy, and real-time metadata.
When there is insufficient recording capacity on the
destination, the message “LACK OF REC CAPACITY!” is
displayed, and copying will not proceed. When clips to be
copied include some with defects, the message “CANNOT
ACCESS!” is displayed, and copying will not proceed. If
selected clips include any that are already recorded on the
destination P2 card, copying will not proceed.
To stop copying, press the SET button. Clips currently
being copied to the destination will be deleted.
When identical clips exist on the destination card, the
“OVERWRITE?” is displayed. Select “YES” or “NO”.
* Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see <Cautions in using
SD memory cards> (page 23).
4
136
The confirmation window appears. Use the cursor
buttons and SET button to select YES.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Copying Clips
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 137 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting of Clip Meta Data
Information such as the name of person who shot the video, the name of the reporter, the shooting location, or a text memo
can be read from the SD memory card, and can be recorded as Clip Meta Data.
Reading Clip Meta Data (metadata upload)
1
2
Insert the SD memory card that contains the Clip Meta
Data (metadata upload file).
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Note
3
4
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and Select META
DATA LOAD from the thumbnail menu, and press the
SET button.
Names of metadata upload files stored on the SD
memory card are displayed*. Select the desired files
using the cursor buttons, and choose YES. Upload
starts.
Uploaded metadata is retained even if the power is
turned off.
For more information on confirmation of uploaded data,
see [Checking and modifying read metadata]
(page 138).
* Press the cursor button (Z) to display the full name of the
file, up to 100 characters, at the cursor position. Press the
cursor button (Y) to return to the original state.
Clip Meta Data items
Clip Meta Data includes the following items: Underlined
items can be set by reading the metadata upload file on the
SD memory card. Other items are set automatically during
shooting. Using the latest update version of P2 Viewer,
metadata upload files can be written to SD memory cards
using a PC. Download the latest update version of P2
Viewer from the following URL and install it to your PC:
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
The file which was edited by except P2 Viewer is displayed
as “UNKNOWN DATA!”, and may not be read.
GLOBAL CLIP ID:
Displays the global clip ID, which indicates the
shooting status of the clip.
USER CLIP NAME:
Displays the clip name specified by the user.*1
VIDEO:
Displays [FRAME RATE] (frame rate of the
clip), [PULL DOWN], and [ASPECT RATIO].
AUDIO:
[SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency of
recorded sound) and [BITS PER SAMPLE]
(digitized bit[s] of recorded sound).
ACCESS:
Displays [CREATOR] (person who recorded
the clip), [CREATION DATE] (date when the
clip was recorded), [LAST UPDATE DATE]
(date of the latest update of the clip), and
[LAST UPDATE PERSON] (person who made
the latest update of the clip).
DEVICE:
Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the
device manufacturer), [SERIAL NO.] (serial
number of the device) and [MODEL NAME]
(model name of the device).
SHOOT:
Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the person
who shot the video), [START DATE] (start
date of shooting), [END DATE] (end date of
shooting), and [LOCATION] ALTITUDE/
LONGITUDE/LATITUDE/SOURCE/PLACE
NAME (altitude, longitude, latitude, and
source of the information and name of the
location).
SCENARIO:
Displays [PROGRAM NAME], [SCENE NO],
and [TAKE NO].
NEWS:
Displays [REPORTER] (name of the reporter),
[PURPOSE] (purpose of shooting), and
[OBJECT] (object of shooting).
Displays [NO.] (the number of the text memo),
MEMO*2:
[OFFSET] (location of the frame with added
text memo in relation to the beginning of the
clip), [PERSON] (person who recorded the
text memo added to the clip), and [TEXT]
(contents of the text memo).
THUMBNAIL:
Displays the location of the frame (frame
offset) and the size (height and width) of the
image selected as the thumbnail image.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
Press the THUMBNAIL button while pressing MODE
CHECK button when a thumbnail is displayed to move
to step 4.
Note
*1 The USER CLIP NAME recording method is selectable. For
details, refer to [Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording
method] (page 139).
*2 Be sure to enter [TEXT] when entering MEMO. It is not possible
to record only [PERSON] or [OFFSET].
Note
This unit only displays printable ASCII characters.
Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see <Cautions in
using SD memory cards> (page 23).
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Setting of Clip Meta Data
137
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 138 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Checking and modifying read metadata
The unit allows you to check details of metadata read from
SD memory cards.
1
2
4
While viewing the settings for the metadata, use the
cursor buttons to move the pointer to the desired option.
Then, press the SET button. A soft keyboard screen is
displayed, allowing you to modify the setting.
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select META
DATA PROPERTY from the thumbnail menu. Then,
the screen like this is displayed:
To set whether or not the uploaded metadata is
recorded
Set “ON”/“OFF” in META DATA RECORD from the
thumbnail menu. The factory setting is “OFF”.
3
138
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the item
you wish to check, then press the SET button.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Setting of Clip Meta Data
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 139 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording
method
Select META DATA USER CLIP NAME from the
thumbnail menu to select the recording method. Two options
are available: TYPE1 and TYPE2.
TYPE1 (Factory setting)
USER CLIP NAME to be
recorded
If clip metadata has been read in
Uploaded data
If no clip metadata has been read
Same as GLOBAL CLIP ID
in or if the setting for recording
(UMID data)
clip metadata has been turned off
Note
When a P2 card with a memory capacity of 8 GB or more is
used in unit and a one-time continuous recording exceeds
the prescribed duration (DVCPRO HD and the AVCIntra100: about 5 minutes; AVC-Intra50: about 10 minutes)
or when a one-time recording extends over more than one
P2 card, the recording concerned will automatically be
undertaken as a separate clip. At this time, each clip will be
provided with its own COUNT value.
Example of recording (DVCPRO HD) a clip on one P2 card:
Recording duration = Approx. 7 min
TYPE2
Clip 1
COUNT value = 0001
Clip 2
COUNT value = 0002
Approx. 5 min
Approx. 2 min
Uploaded data + COUNT
value*
If no clip metadata has been read
in or if the setting for recording
Same as CLIP NAME
clip metadata has been turned off
* The COUNT value is indicated as a four-digit number.
The COUNT value is incremented each time a new clip is
captured if clip metadata has been read in and TYPE2 has
been selected as the recording method.
The COUNT value can be reset using the following
procedure.
Select META DATA PROPERTY from the thumbnail
menu, then select USER CLIP NAME to display the menu
shown below. Select “COUNT RESET” with the cursor and
press the SET button to reset the COUNT value to 1.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
USER CLIP NAME to be
recorded
If clip metadata has been read in
Recording pause
Recording start
Example of recording a clip on two P2 cards:
Recording pause
Recording start
Clip 1
COUNT value = 0003
Clip 2
COUNT value = 0004
1st card
2nd card
If the clip thumbnails are displayed as shown in the example
above or their properties are indicated using a P2 device,
the thumbnail and COUNT value of clip 1 will be displayed.
Clear the uploaded metadata
Select META DATA INITIALIZE from the thumbnail menu,
and press the SET button. Select YES when the
confirmation screen is displayed.
Notes
Japanese or Chinese characters indicated in English or
other characters that cannot be indicated in English will
not display properly; they will be indicated as .
The letters which can be input with the unit are only the
alphanumeric. The unit cannot input Japanese and
Chinese.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Setting of Clip Meta Data
139
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 140 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting of Proxy (optional)
By attaching the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional)
either to the optional slot or slot 5, it is possible to specify the
proxy recording setting.
The video encoder card is not recognized when inserted if
the power for the unit is turned on. Insert the video encoder
card after turning off the power for the unit.
Select OPERATION DEVICE SETUP PROXY from the
thumbnail menu to specify the setting.
For the method of installation and the settings of the video
encoder card, refer to the operation manual of the video
encoder card.
When “PROXY CARD ERROR” is indicated in the
viewfinder, either check the video encoder card or set the
unit so that proxy recording is not performed.
Notes
To use the proxy function in 24PN (Native) mode, the
FPGA version of the video encoder card firmware must be
updated to [B102] or higher. For the method to confirm the
FPGA version of the video encoder card firmware, refer to
[Video Encoder Card Status Display (optional)]
(page 146). For instructions on updating, refer to the P2
support page on the following website.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
Formatting a P2 Card
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select
OPERATION FORMAT from the thumbnail menu.
The following screen appears. Select the slot number
for the P2 card you want to format, then press the SET
button.
Select EXIT if formatting is not required.
4
140
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons
and the SET button to select YES.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Setting of Proxy (optional)
The selected P2 card is formatted.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 141 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Formatting SD memory cards
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail
screen. With an SD memory card inserted into the unit,
perform the following operation:
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select
OPERATION FORMAT from the thumbnail menu.
The following screen appears. Select “SD CARD”, then
press the SET button.
Select “EXIT” if formatting is not required.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
3
4
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons
and the SET button to select YES.
The SD memory card is formatted.
Note
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the menu
screen. For more information, see [Handling SD memory
cards] (page 92).
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Formatting SD memory cards
141
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 142 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode
The thumbnail display mode can be customized to suit your
preferences.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select
THUMBNAIL SETUP from the thumbnail menu.
The following screen appears.
ALL HIDE:
ON:
All indicators are not displayed.
OFF:
Indication/No indication will be set depending
on the following menu. The factory settings
are as follows.
MARKER IND.:
Switches the shot mark marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
TEXT MEMO IND.:
Switches the text memo marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
WIDE IND.:
Switches the wide marker between indication
and no indication (ON/OFF). The factory
setting is ON (indication).
PROXY IND.:
Switches the proxy marker between indication
and no indication (ON/OFF). The factory
setting is ON (indication).
DATA DISPLAY:
The time display field of the clip offers a
choice of Time Code (TC), User Bits (UB),
Shooting Time (TIME), Shooting Date (DATE),
Shooting Date and Time (DATE/TIME) or
USER CLIP NAME. The factory setting is
Time Code.
142
DATE FORMAT:
You can specify the display order for the
shooting date as either Year/Month/Day (Y-MD), Month/Day/Year (M-D-Y) or Day/Month/
Year (D-M-Y).
The factory setting is Month/Day/Year.
This setting is reflected in the recording date
shown in the clip property and the shooting
date shown when DATE is selected under the
item DATA DISPLAY.
THUMBNAIL SIZE:
For the size of thumbnails displayed on one
screen, either LARGE (3 2 thumbnails
displayed) or NORMAL (4 3 thumbnails
displayed) can be selected. The factory
default value is NORMAL.
PLAYBACK RESUME:
Selecting a position to restart playback after
stopping playback on the thumbnails screen
using the STOP button.
ON:
Playback starts from the stop position.
OFF:
Playback starts from the beginning of the clip
indicated by the pointer.
Note that if the pointer is moved after stopping
playback, the playback will restart from the
beginning of the clip indicated by the pointer
regardless of this setting. Also, attempting to
playback from the end of all the available clips
will cause the screen to flash momentarily,
indicating that the there are no more clips
which can be played back.
THUMBNAIL INIT:
Return the above thumbnail display settings to
default. Move the cursor to this option, and
press the SET button. Select YES when the
confirmation screen is displayed.
EXIT:
Returns to the previous menu.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 143 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Properties
The clip’s properties and the P2 card’s status are displayed.
It is possible to edit and rewrite recorded clip metadata while clip properties are displayed.
Clip Property
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY CLIP
PROPERTY. The following screen appears.
4. Clip Information
Displays detailed information about the clip.
3
1
2
5
4
1. Clip Number
2. Thumbnail
3. Clip Information
Indicates the indicators added to the clip and the
number of text and voice memos added to the clip.
The
mark appears if the clip is recorded on a writeprotected P2 card.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
CLIP NAME:
Display clip names.
START TC:
The time code value at the start of the
recording.
START UB:
The user bit value at the start of the recording.
DATE: The date of the recording.
TIME:
The time at the start of the recording.
DURATION:
The time length of the clip.
V_FORMAT:
The recording format for the clip.
FRAME RATE:
The frame rate for the playback.
REC RATE:
The recording frame rate is displayed. (Only
displayed for clips recorded using native
recording with the VFR function.)
5. Clip Meta Data
Displays more detailed data about the clip. Use the
cursor buttons to move the pointer, and press the SET
button to check the detailed content. For more
information on displayed metadata, see [Setting of Clip
Meta Data] (page 137).
Note
The unit is not capable of recording or playing back
voice memos.
Modification of recorded clip metadata
1
Display the window for detailed clip metadata that you
intend to modify in the clip properties window.
2
Place the cursor on the item to be modified using the
cursor button. The metadata that can be modified are
shown like [CREATOR] in the following figure.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Properties
143
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 144 ページ 2008年10月15日
3
水曜日
Press the SET button.
The input window (soft keyboard) for modifying
metadata is displayed. Use the keyboard to modify the
metadata.
午後6時38分
4
Press OK on the keyboard to write the modified
metadata on the clip and return to the metadata window.
Notes
Deleting only the respective items of LOCATION
(recording location data) in SHOOT is not possible. By
setting ALTITUDE to empty, other LONGITUDE/
LATITUDE items are collectively deleted.
The metadata for a clip with the
incomplete clip
indicator cannot be modified. For the clips recorded on
multiple P2 cards, modify the metadata while all P2 cards
are inserted.
Any MEMO with 100 characters or more cannot be
modified.
The keyboard operation is the same as [Checking and
modifying read metadata] (page 138).
P2 Card Status Display
P2 Card Status Display Settings
Select PROPERTY CARD STATUS from the thumbnail
menu to set the desired indication mode (remaining free
space or used memory capacity) for the P2 card status
display.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select
PROPERTY PROPERTY SETUP P2 CARD CAP
from the thumbnail menu.
The following screen appears. Select the P2 card status
display settings from the P2 CARD CAP menu option.
REMAIN:
Show remaining free space on the P2 card as
the P2 card status display. (Factory setting)
USED:
Show used memory capacity on the P2 card
as the P2 card status display.
144
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Properties
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 145 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Contents of P2 Card Status Display Settings
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY CARD STATUS. The following screen appears.
When “REMAIN” is selected:
1
When “USED” is selected:
2
1
2
3
3
4
4
1. Write-protect Mark
The
mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
2. P2 Card Status (remaining free space)
1. Write-protect Mark
The
mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
2. P2 Card Status (used memory capacity)
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is
indicated by a bar graph and percentage. The bar graph
indicator moves to the left as the remaining free space
decreases.
The following indications may appear, depending on the
card status:
FORMAT ERROR!:
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
NOT SUPPORTED!:
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.
NO CARD!:
P2 cards are not inserted.
The used memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated
by a bar graph and a percentage figure. The bar graph
indicator moves to the right as the used memory
capacity increases.
The following indications may appear, depending on the
card status:
FORMAT ERROR!:
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
NOT SUPPORTED!:
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.
NO CARD!:
P2 cards are not inserted.
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2 card
for data you want to access and press the SET button to
display detailed information about the P2 card to check
individual information such as the serial number and the
user ID.
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2 card
for data you want to access and press the SET button to
display detailed information about the P2 card to check
individual information such as the serial number and the
user ID.
3. P2 Card Remaining Capacity/Total Capacity
Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total
capacity in minutes. The total of the remaining memory
capacity for each P2 card that is displayed may not
match the actual total remaining memory capacity for
the P2 cards because only the figure in minute is
displayed.
Note that the indicated capacity will vary according to
the frame rate in native recording with VFR operation.
4. Total remaining free space for the slot
Displays the total remaining free space for all 5 slots.
Please note that the remaining capacity of a writeprotected P2 card is not included in the total remaining
capacity.
5. Warning symbol
When the following P2 card is detected, the
symbol
is displayed.
RUN DOWN CARD:
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card has
been exceeded.
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:
The directory structure on the P2 card is not supported.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
5
5
3. P2 Card used memory capacity/Total Capacity
Displays the used memory capacity on a P2 card and
the total capacity, in minutes. Because fractions are
truncated, the figure shown for used memory capacity
on a P2 card may differ from the figure for total capacity.
The used memory capacity of a write-protected P2 card
is displayed as 100%.
Note that the indicated capacity will vary according to
the frame rate in native recording with VFR operation.
4. Total used memory capacity for all slots
Displays the total used memory capacity for all 5 slots.
5. Warning symbol
When the following P2 card is detected, the
symbol
is displayed.
RUN DOWN CARD:
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card has
been exceeded.
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:
The directory structure on the P2 card is not supported.
The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card detailed
information indication in [2. P2 Card Status (used
memory capacity)].
The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card detailed
information indication in [2. P2 Card Status (remaining
free space)].
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Properties
145
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 146 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
SD memory card Status Display
The status display enables a confirmation of the SD memory
card formatted condition, available memory capacity etc.
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY DEVICES
SD CARD.
If the format is compatible with SD standards, the message
“SD STANDARD: SUPPORTED” is displayed.
If the format is not compatible with SD standards, the
message “SD STANDARD: NOT SUPPORTED” is
displayed. If this is the case, writing or reading will not be
successful. Format the card with the unit. For more
information on formatting SD memory cards, see [Formatting
SD memory cards] (page 141).
Note
The indicated remaining memory capacity on the SD
memory card (PROXY REM) can be an index of remaining
memory capacity for the Proxy but may differ from the actual
remaining capacity. For SD or SDHC cards with Class
indications, the recording time may be reduced significantly
compared with the actual capacity when images of short
recording time are recorded repeatedly. If the remaining
memory capacity exceeds 999 min, “999 min” is displayed.
The remaining capacity is displayed only when set to record
the Proxy record on the SD memory card. For the setting
method, refer to the operation manual of the video encoder
card (AJ-YAX800G, optional).
Video Encoder Card Status Display (optional)
Attaching the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional),
select PROPERTY DEVICES PROXY from the
thumbnail menu.
The slot in which the video encoder card is inserted, and
version information is displayed.
146
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Properties
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 147 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Connection with external device
Connection with external devices using the
USB 2.0 port
Connection with a PC in the USB DEVICE mode
By connecting the unit with an external PC using USB 2.0, the P2 card inserted to the unit can be used as a mass storage
device.
Procedures for establishing a connection with a
PC
1
Notes
Connect the USB cable to the USB 2.0 port.
Notes
The USB 2.0 cable is not included with the unit.
Please use a commercially available USB 2.0 cable
(with shield).
Although the unit supports USB cables up to 5 meters
long, cables up to 3-meters long are recommended.
During a USB connection, the USB LED on the side
panel stays illuminated. Also, “USB DEVICE” is
displayed in the system information/warning area in the
viewfinder.
When the connection is not correctly established, both
of these indications blink.
Connection with external device
A USB driver must be installed on the PC.
The unit is only applicable to USB 2.0. Use a PC that
supports USB 2.0.
Only one unit at a time must be connected to the PC
via USB.
The P2 card must not be removed when it is
connected via USB.
While a USB connection is established, the P2 card’s
access LED should not be lit except when access is
being carried out.
When a USB device is active, recording, playback, or
navigation through clip thumbnails is disabled.
a
a. USB 2.0 port (DEVICE)
2
Navigate the menu to open the <SYSTEM MODE>
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page. Then, set the
PC MODE SELECT menu option to “USB DEV.” and the
PC MODE option to “ON”.
b











b. USB LED


   
     


             
Note
The function of the menu option PC MODE may be
assigned to a desired user button by using any one of
the menu options USER MAIN SW, USER1 SW,
USER2 SW, MARKER SEL or TEXT MEMO SW.
These options can be found in the <USER SW> screen
on the CAM OPERATION page.
3
There are two ways to terminate the USB mode, as
follows:
Turn the POWER switch of the unit [OFF].
Set the PC MODE item to “OFF” from the menu
operations.
When you establish the USB connection for the first time,
install the supplied P2 software on the PC. Refer to the
Installation Manual for the details.
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
147
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 148 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
USB HOST mode
The unit can be connected to a hard disk drive that supports
USB 2.0 to store data from cards on it, view thumbnails for
stored clips, and write data back to P2 cards.
Switching to the USB HOST mode
1
2
By navigating the menu, set the PC MODE SELECT
menu option on the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the
SYSTEM SETTING page to “USB HOST”, then the PC
MODE option to “ON”. This will place the unit in USB
HOST mode.
When the unit is in USB HOST mode, the viewfinder
indicates “USB HOST” and the USB LED on the side
panel stays illuminated. If the hard disk drive is not
properly connected, then the LED blinks.
When a user button is assigned the PC MODE on/off
switching capability, you can press that user button to
switch between the normal and USB HOST modes.
For information about how to assign functions to the
user buttons, see [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] (page 59).
Press the THUMBNAIL button to go to the thumbnail
screen. Check to see that the screen indicates “USB
HOST” in the lower right corner. When a hard disk drive
is connected, the HDD indication in the upper right
corner stays illuminated. However, if this indicator
illuminates red, it means that the hard disk drive cannot
be copied. Confirm the hard disk drive type.
For information about the HDD indication, see
[Thumbnail Screen] (page 127).
a
a. USB HOST display
Note
In USB HOST mode, clips on P2 cards can be played back
but video from the camera or an external device cannot be
recorded.
Clips written to a hard disk must be written back to a P2 card
before it can be played back. For information about how to
write clips back to P2 cards, see [Writing data back to P2
cards] (page 151).
To return to the normal mode from the USB HOST mode, set
PC MODE to “OFF” or press a user button which has been
assigned the PC MODE on/off function while the thumbnail
screen is closed.
Using the USB HOST mode
Usable hard disk drives
Hard disk drives connectable via USB 2.0
P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G, optional)
Notes
While the USB HOST mode supports USB bus power
(5 V, 0.5 A), some hard disk drives may not activate. If this
is the case, power must be supplied in a different way.
Do not connect multiple hard disk drives through a hub
even if the power is turned off. Also, avoid connecting
other devices together with a hard disk drive through a
hub.
The unit does not support a hard disk drive of 2 TB or
more.
148
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 149 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
1. PARTITION
Viewing hard disk drive information
You can view the information on the hard disk drive
connected via USB 2.0 with the following steps.
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST. For more information,
see [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 148).
2
3
This section indicates the type of the hard disk drive.
The available functions depend on the type of hard disk
drive.
HDD type
Available functions
A special format that
allows high-speed
writing and writing back
on a card-by-card basis.
A drive formatted with
the unit uses this format.
Thumbnail viewing,
writing and writing back
on a card basis, writing
back on a clip basis, and
formatting
P2STORE
P2 STORE (AJPCS060G). No writing
can be performed.
Thumbnail viewing,
writing back on a card
basis, and writing back
on a clip basis
FAT
For a hard disk drive
with the first primary
partition formatted in
FAT16 or FAT32, as
seen on PC, etc., which
requires a CONTENTS
directory at its root.
Thumbnail viewing,
reading on a clip basis,
and formatting
* Once formatted, the
hard disk drive can be
treated as a TYPE S
HDD.
OTHER
Hard disk drives not
described above.
* They are hard disk
drives that have no
CONTENTS directory
or use the NTFS and
any other file system
instead of FAT16 or
FAT32.
Formatting
* Once formatted, they
can be treated as a
TYPE S HDD.
Connect the hard disk drive to the unit via USB 2.0.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail
screen.
4
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select HDD
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu. The screen
provides the information about the hard disk drive.
For TYPE S or P2 STORE
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Connection with external device
Feature
TYPE S
2. VENDOR
6
This section indicates the vendor for the hard disk drive.
EXIT button 
‚ Press the SET button.
3. MODEL
This section indicates the model of the hard disk drive.
4. SIZE
This section indicates the total storage on the hard disk
drive.
5. USED
This section indicates the used space on the hard disk
drive (in GB) and the number of P2 cards in use.
10
6. REMAIN
11
12
This section indicates the remaining free space on the
hard disk drive in GB.
For the FAT
7. NO.
This section indicates the partition number (one P2 card
is used as a unit) on the hard disk drive.
Note
1
2
3
The screen indicates up to 10 partitions. When the
number of partitions exceeds 10, scroll down the
indication with the cursor button (V) to view the hidden
partitions.
4
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
149
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 150 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
8. MODEL
午後6時38分
11. VERIFY
This section indicates the model of the P2 card that
originally contained data on the partition.
This section indicates the verification setting and results
at the time the data on the partition was recorded.
ON/FINISHED:
Verification was performed and the results agreed.
ON/FAILED:
Verification was performed and the results did not
agree.
OFF:
No verification was performed.
- - -:
No verification information is available.
Note
Press the cursor button (Z) to switch to the PARTITION
NAME. Press the [Y] button to return to the original
model name display.
Notes
Even for a FAT-type hard disk drive, the 1001st or
later clips are not shown.
For a FAT-formatted hard disk drive, the information
about only the first partition is shown.
For a P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G) that has an invalid
partition, that partition information is shown in gray.
12. NAME
Enter the PARTITION NAME from the soft keyboard by
selecting CHANGE PARTITION NAME in the
OPERATION menu while the thumbnail of the hard disk
drive is displayed. (Max. 20 characters)
This section indicates the PARTITION NAME.
Formatting a hard disk drive
1
2
3
4
5
6
Switch the mode to USB HOST.
For more information, see [Switching to the USB HOST
mode] (page 148).
Connect the hard disk drive via USB.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail
screen.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select HDD
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu. The display
provides a screen that shows the information about the
hard disk drive.
From the menu, select OPERATION FORMAT (HDD)
and select YES using the cursor buttons and SET
button. Then, the confirmation message is displayed
again. Select YES.
The unit starts formatting the hard disk drive. Once
formatted, the hard disk drive can be treated as a
TYPE S HDD.
Note
Formatting a hard disk drive erases all contents of it.
Note that you cannot erase the contents of certain
partitions by specifying them.
9. DATE/TIME
This section indicates the date and time the data on the
partition was recorded.
10. SERIAL
This section indicates the serial number of the P2 card
that originally contained the data on the partition.
150
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 151 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Writing data on a hard disk drive
1
2
3
4
5
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
A hard disk drive that has not been formatted with the
unit must be formatted as directed in [Formatting a hard
disk drive] (page 150).
Insert a P2 card.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail
screen.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select HDD
EXPORT from the thumbnail menu. Then, specify the
slot that contains the P2 card bearing the data to be
written to the hard disk drive.
Select YES to start writing.
When the data is being written, a progress bar is
displayed. To discontinue writing, press the SET button
and select YES on the cancel confirmation screen.
Notes
To disable verification at the time of writing, select
HDD SETUP from the thumbnail menu and set the
option VERIFY to OFF. This speeds up writing without
verifying data writing.
Select ALL SLOT to write data collectively onto all P2
cards currently inserted in the unit to the hard disk
drive.
7
When the writing is completed, the message “COPY
COMPLETED!” is displayed.
Notes
For a TYPE S hard disk drive, data can be written on a
card basis. The data on up to 23 P2 cards can be stored
on the hard disk drive. The data set on each P2 card is
recognized as a separate drive by the PC.
If data on a P2 card that contains a defective clip must be
written to a hard disk drive, then we recommend restoring
that clip before copying the data.
When the process is discontinued during verification, the
data on the P2 card has been written to the hard disk
drive.
You can select clips on the hard disk drive to be written back
to P2 cards.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Switch the mode to USB HOST. For more information,
see [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 148).
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
Insert the target P2 card in a slot.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select HDD
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu. Move to the
appropriate partition and select it with the SET button.
From among the thumbnails, select the clips to be
written to the P2 card.
Connection with external device
6
Switch the mode to USB HOST. For more information,
see [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 148).
Writing data back to P2 cards
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select
OPERATION IMPORT SELECTED CLIPS. Then,
specify the slot that contains the target P2 card.
Select YES to start writing data back to the P2 card.
When the writing is completed, the message “COPY
COMPLETED!” is displayed.
Notes
When only selected files are written, no verification is
performed.
Import data in clip units from cards with a different model
number as data cannot be imported by the partition
between such cards.
For a TYPE S or P2 STORE hard disk drive, you can write
data back to a P2 card with the same model number on a
card basis.
The target P2 cards must be preformatted.
1
2
3
4
5
Switch the mode to USB HOST. For more information,
see [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 148).
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
Insert the target P2 cards in slots.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select HDD
EXPLORE. Then, move to the appropriate partition
and select it with the SET button.
From the thumbnail menu, select OPERATION IMPORT ALL. Then, specify the slots that contain the
empty target P2 cards.
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
151
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 152 ページ 2008年10月15日
6
水曜日
午後6時38分
Select YES to start writing data to the cards.
<For your information>
To disable verification during writing, select HDD SETUP from the thumbnail menu and set the option
VERIFY to OFF. This speeds up writing without verifying
data writing.
7
When the writing is completed, the message “COPY
COMPLETED!” is displayed.
Note
If a clip is written back to a P2 card different from the original
card that contained that clip, then the clip may be
incomplete. If this is the case, reconnect the clip. For more
information, see [Reconnection of Incomplete Clips]
(page 135).
Direction for using a hard disk drive
A hard disk drive (including the P2 STORE (AJPCS060G)) must be used under the following conditions:
– It must meet the operating requirements (e.g.
temperature).
– It must not be placed in an instable place or a place
exposed to vibrations.
Some hard disk drives do not operate properly.
Some hard disk drives with the SATA (Serial ATA)
interface or the PATA (Parallel ATA) interface connected
by a USB conversion cable may not be recognized.
When copying data, a hard disk drive must have sufficient
free space.
Do not remove the cable or the target P2 card or turn off
the unit or hard disk drive during formatting or copying.
Doing so requires the unit and the hard disk drive to be
restarted.
Since hard disk drives are high precision devices, there is
a high possibility that they may become incapable of
reading/writing data depending on the conditions of use.
Take note that we will not be liable for loss of data
caused by failed hard disk drives or any other
problem as well as direct or indirect damages
resulting from the loss of data.
We do not guarantee that hard disk drives will operate
properly with the unit or that the data on them will be
properly retained if data copied to them from the unit has
been replaced with other data using a PC.
By using the drive mount converter distributed on the
following URL, the hard disk drive can be mounted in the
designated folder when connected.
When the drive letter used to denote the hard disc drive is
the same as one already assigned to a network drive, the
partition may not be displayed. When this problem occurs,
use the drive mount converter to mount the hard disk drive
in a designated folder. The partition will then be displayed.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
152
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 153 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Maintenance and Inspections
Inspections Before Shooting
Make sure you check that the system is operating normally before embarking on a shoot. We recommend using a color video
monitor to check the image.
Preparing for Inspections
1
2
3
Mount a charged battery pack.
Turn the POWER switch [ON] and check that 5 or more
“BATT” indication marks appear.
If fewer than 5 “BATT” indication marks appear,
replace the battery with a fully-charged battery.
3
2
Maintenance and Inspections
1
Insert a P2 card into the card slot and close the slide
cover.
Confirm that the P2 card access LED for the inserted
card slot lights up in orange. If P2 cards are inserted into
multiple card slots, only the P2 card access LED for the
first-inserted P2 card lights up in orange. Then, the other
P2 card access LEDs light up in green when P2 cards
are inserted.
If the access LED for the P2 card slot in which a P2 card
is inserted keeps blinking in green, or if there is no
display, recording is not possible on that particular P2
card.
Inspecting the Camera Unit
1
2
3
4
Set the zoom to electric zoom mode and check the
zoom operation.
Check that the image changes to telephoto and wide
angle.
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the
zoom operation.
Turn the manual zoom lever to check that the image
changes to telephoto and wide angle.
Set the iris to automatic adjustment mode and aim the
lens at objects with different degrees of brightness, to
check that the automatic iris adjustment operates
normally.
Set the iris to manual adjustment mode and turn the iris
ring, to check the manual iris adjustment.
5
While holding down the instant iris automatic adjustment
button, aim the lens at objects with different degrees of
brightness, to check that the instant iris automatic
adjustment operates properly.
Note
There are also lens which have no instant iris automatic
adjustment mode.
6
Return the iris to automatic adjustment mode and
change the GAIN switch setting to [L], [M], and [H], to
check the following items:
The iris is adjusted for objects with the same
brightness according to the switch setting.
The gain value displayed on the viewfinder screen
changes according to the switch setting.
7
When a lens with an extender is mounted, set the
extender to the operating position to check that the
extender operates properly.
Maintenance and Inspections: Inspections Before Shooting
153
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 154 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Inspecting the Memory Recording Functions
Make sure you successively carry out the inspections from
[1. Inspecting the P2 Card Recording] to [4. Inspecting the
Earphone and Speaker].
1. Inspecting the P2 Card Recording
1
2
3
4
Check on the display inside the viewfinder that the
remaining P2 card recording capacity is sufficient.
Please refer to [P2 Card Remaining Free Space/
capacity Indication] (page 84) for information about P2
card remaining recording capacity.
6
7
8
1
2
3
Set the TCG switch to [R-RUN].
Set the DISPLAY switch to [TC].
Press the camera’s REC START button to check the
following items:
The P2 access LED blinks in orange.
The REC lamp inside the viewfinder lights up.
System warnings do not appear inside the viewfinder.
5
2. Inspecting the Audio Level Automatic
Adjustment
Press the camera’s REC START button again.
This step confirms that the P2 access LED is on and
showing orange, and the REC lamp in the viewfinder is
turned off.
Press the LIGHT button to check that the screen
brightness in the display window increases.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to check that the clip that
has just been shot is played back from the beginning.
Check that recording and playback operate properly.
When multiple P2 cards are inserted into the P2 card
slots, press the user button to which the SLOT SEL
function has been assigned in order to select the P2
card used for recording.
Repeat the operations in steps 4 to 5 and 7 to check that
recording and playback operate properly.
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to
[AUTO].
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [FRONT].
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN jack at an
appropriate sound source. Then, check that the level
displays for both CH1 and CH2 change according to the
sound level.
3. Inspecting the Audio Level Manual Adjustment
1
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [FRONT].
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to
[MAN].
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls.
Check that the level display increases when the controls
are turned to the right.
4. Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker
1
2
3
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the speaker
volume changes.
Connect an earphone to the PHONES jack.
Check that the speaker is turned off and the microphone
sound can be heard from the earphone.
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the earphone
volume changes.
5. Inspection for Using an External Microphone
1
2
3
Connect an external microphone to the AUDIO IN CH1
and CH2 connectors.
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [REAR].
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switches on the rear
panel to [MIC] or [+48V], depending on the power
supply type of the external microphone.
MIC:
+48V:
4
154
Maintenance and Inspections: Inspections Before Shooting
For a microphone with internal power supply.
For a microphone with external power supply.
Aim the microphone at a sound source. Then check that
the audio level meter in the display window and the
audio level display inside the viewfinder change
according to the sound level.
The channels can also be checked separately by
connecting a single microphone to each channel.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 155 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
6. Inspection of the clock, time code, and user
bits
1
2
3
4
5
Set the user bits as required.
Please refer to [Setting of the user bits] (page 65) for the
setting procedures.
6
7
Set the time code.
Please refer to [Setting the Time Code] (page 68) for the
setting procedures.
Set the TCG switch to [R-RUN].
Set the TCG switch to [F-RUN].
Check that the counter display number changes
regardless of recording status.
Set the DISPLAY switch to [UB].
Each time the HOLD button is pressed, make sure that
the displayed value changes in the following sequence:
VTCG DATE TIME No display (time zone) TCG; and also verify that the displayed value is correct.
If DATE, TIME, or time zone is not correct, refer to
[Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and Time] (page 67)
for guidance on setting the correct values.
Note
Press the REC START button.
Check that the counter display number changes as
recording progresses.
Note that date and time data set for DATE, TIME, and
time zone is recorded in clips, and affects the playback
sequence, etc. at the time of thumbnail manipulations.
Maintenance and Inspections
Press the REC START button again.
Check that recording stops and the counter display
number stops changing.
Maintenance
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder
Do not use thinner or other solvents to remove dirt.
Wipe the lens with a commercially available lens cleaner.
Do not wipe the mirror. If dirt or rubbish is sticking on the
mirror, remove it with a commercially available air blower.
Phenomenon Inherent to CCD Cameras
Smears
Smears may appear when shooting an object with very high
brightness.
This phenomenon becomes more obvious as the electronic
shutter speed becomes faster.
White defects
When the frame rate is set low during operation under VFR,
tiny defects may be seen in the video. White defects become
more noticeable in high-temperature operating conditions.
Replacing the Backup Battery
The camera is shipped from the factory with a backup
battery already mounted.
When the battery runs out, the “BACKUP BATT EMPTY”
display appears on the viewfinder screen for 5 seconds after
the POWER switch is turned [ON].
The internal clock stops operating when the battery runs out.
Also, the TCG time code value returns to “00:00:00:00”, and
the time code backup is disabled. The battery must be
replaced.
Please consult your distributor for replacement with a new
battery (CR2032).
The backup battery is visible when the panel on the LCD
monitor side is removed (right side when viewed from the
front).
Note
Please contact the store where you purchased the camera
when replacing the battery.
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance
155
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 156 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Connector Signals
DC IN
1
GND
2
NC
3
NC
4
+12 V
Panasonic part number K1AA104H0038
Maker part number
HA16RX-4P (SW1)
(Hirose Denki)
4
1
2
Ensure that the polarities are used correctly for a power
supply from an external source.
1
GND
2
L CH IN (H)
3
L CH IN (C)
4
R CH IN (H)
5
R CH IN (C)
Panasonic part number K1AB105B0002
Maker part number
NC5FBH
(NEUTRIK)
PUSH
5
1
4
AUDIO IN
1
GND
2
AUDIO IN (H)
3
AUDIO IN (C)
3
2
Panasonic part number K1AB103A0011
Maker part number
HA16PRM-3SG
(Hirose Denki)
PUSH
2
1
3
AUDIO OUT
156
1
GND
2
L CH OUT (H)
3
L CH OUT (C)
4
R CH OUT (H)
5
R CH OUT (C)
Panasonic part number K1AA105H0016
Maker part number
Panasonic part number K1AY104J0001
1
GND
2
R TALLY
(Open collector)
3
REC START SW
Connector at the cable side
4
+12 V OUT
(Max. 1.5 A)
Maker part number
Maker part number
HR10A-7R-4SC(73)
(Hirose Denki)
HR10A-7P-4P(73)
(Hirose Denki)
3
Note
FRONT MIC IN
DC OUT
HA16RD-5P(76)
(Hirose Denki)
1
5
2
4
3
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance
4
1
3
2
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 157 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
REMOTE
Panasonic part number K1AY110JA001
1
CAM DATA (H)
Data from the camera to the remote control (H)
2
CAM DATA (C)
Data from the camera to the remote control (C)
3
CAM CONT (H)
Control signals from the remote control to the camera (H)
4
CAM CONT (C)
Control signals from the remote control to the camera (C)
Connector at the cable side
5
RC-ON
Identification signals of the remote control
Low: ON
Maker part number
6
RC VIDEO OUT
Video signals output to the remote control
7
RC VIDEO GND
GND of the video signals to the remote control
8
NC
Not used
9
UNREG 12 V
DC +12 V power supply (AJ-RC10G: Max. 0.75 A)
10 GND
Maker part number
HR10A-10R-10SC(71)
(Hirose Denki)
HR10A-10P-10P(73)
(Hirose Denki)
8
7
1
10
2
9
3
6
GND
4
5
VF
Panasonic part number K1AB120H0001
1
UNREG-12 V
DC +12 V power supply (AJ-HVF21G: About 0.35 A)
2
UNREG-12 V
DC +12 V power supply
3
A9.0 V
DC +9 V power supply (not used)
4
VF-PB-GND
GND for the viewfinder PB signals
5
VF-PR-GND
GND for the viewfinder PR signals
1
2
3 4
6
VF-Y
Viewfinder Y signals output
6
7
8
9 10
7
VF-Y-GND
GND for the viewfinder Y signals
11
12
13
14
15
8
VF-CLK
Serial data clock pulse signals
16 17
18
19
20
9
VF-WR
Pulse signals for reading serial-parallel conversion data
Serial data signals for serial-parallel conversion
11 UNREG-GND
GND
12 ZEBRA-SW
On/off of the zebra signals
13 PEAKING
Control of the peaking (not used)
14 SPARE
Standby (not used)
15 VF-PR
Viewfinder PR signal output
16 VF-PB
Viewfinder PB signal output
17 MARKER-SW
On/off of the marker (not used)
18 FRONT-VR
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL adjustment (not used)
19 VR-GND
GND for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (not used)
20 UNREG-GND
GND
HR12-14RA-20SC
(Hirose Denki)
5
Maintenance and Inspections
10 VF-DATA
Maker part number
Caution
Total amount of current from the respective connectors for DC OUT, REMOTE, VF,
and LENS should not exceed 2.5 A.
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance
157
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 158 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
LENS
Panasonic part number K1AY112JA001
1
RET-SW
On/off of the return video
RETURN ON:
GND
RETURN OFF:
OPEN
2
REC-START/
STOP
Control for recording start/stop
Maker part number
HR10A-10R-12SC(71)
(Hirose Denki)
9
+5 V
1
10
8
0V
7
6
START STOP START
3
GND
GND
4
IRIS-AUTO
On/off of the forced iris servo
SERVO ON:
+5 V±0.5 V
SERVO OFF:
OPEN
5
IRIS-CONT
Control output for the lens iris
F2.8: –6.2 V, F16: +3.4 V, CLOSE: +2.5 V
6
UNREG-12 V
+12 V power supply for the lens (Max. 1.5 A)
7
IRIS-POSI
Iris position signals
+3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8)
8
IRIS-G-MAX
IRIS REMOTE/LOCAL (AUTO) signals
REMOTE:
+5 V±0.5 V
LOCAL (AUTO):
GND
9
EXT-POSI
On/off of the built-in extender
EXTENDER ON: GND
EXTENDER OFF: OPEN
10 ZOOM-POSI
Zoom position signals
11 FOCUS-POSI
Focus position signal
12 SPARE
Standby (not used)
GPS
158
2
11
12
3
4
5
Panasonic part number K1AY106J0001
1
GPS TXA
Transmission data from the GPS unit to the camera
2
GPS RXA
Transmission data from the camera to the GPS unit
3
GPS VBAT
Backup power supply connector for the GPS unit
(DC +3.3 V)
4
REC START SW
Control signals of recording start/stop
5
GPS VCC
Power supply connector for the GPS unit (DC +3.3 V)
6
GPS GND
GND
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance
Maker part number
HR10A-7R-6SC(73)
(Hirose Denki)
6
1
5
2
4
3
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 159 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Unislot Interface
Panasonic part number K1GB25A00010
1
CH-1 SHIELD
GND
2
CH-1 HOT
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH1 HOT
3
CH-1 COLD
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH1 COLD
4
GND
GND
5
+12 V UNREG
Power supply to the wireless receiver
6
RX ON
Power supply remote output to the wireless receiver
7
RF WARN
RF warning input from the wireless receiver
8
RM5
Not used
9
RM4
Not used
10
SPARE 1
Not used
11
SPARE 2
Not used
12
EXT CLK
Not used
13
CLK SHIELD
Not used
14
CH-2 SHIELD
GND
CH-2 HOT
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH2 HOT
16
CH-2 COLD
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH2 COLD
17
+5.6 V
Power supply to the wireless receiver
18
VIDEO OUT
Not used
19
VIDEO RET
Not used
20
VIDEO EN
Not used
21
RM 1 (RM CLK)
Not used
22
RM 2 (RM DATA)
Not used
23
RM 3 (RM WR)
Not used
24
RM +5 V
Not used
25
RM GND
Not used
13
25
HDBB-25S(05)
(Hirose Denki)
1
14
Maintenance and Inspections
15
Maker part number
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance
159
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 160 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Warning System
Warning Description Tables
If a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on, or during operation, this will be indicated by the WARNING
lamp, lamps inside the viewfinder and a warning tone.
Note
The WARNING lamp has the highest priority, followed by the tally lamp, and then the warning tone. When multiple errors
occur simultaneously a higher priority indication will be triggered. The [WIRELESS-RF], however, may not be indicated,
depending on the menu setting.
1.
System Errors
4.
Display window
indication
The error code lights up.
WARNING lamp
Blinks 4 times per second.
Tally lamp
Blinks 4 times per second.
Viewfinder
The “SYSTEM ERROR” indication and
the error code light up.
Warning tone
Beeps continuously.
Warning description
An error in the reference signal or the
communication.
Recording/playback
operation
The operation stops.
Countermeasures
Please confirm [Error Codes] (page 163)
and consult your distributor.
2.
Card removal error
Display window
indication
Error code “E-30” blinks.
WARNING lamp
Blinks 4 times per second.
Tally lamp
Blinks 4 times per second.
Viewfinder
The “TURN POWER OFF” indicator lights
up.
Warning tone
Warning description
Recording/playback
operation
Countermeasures
3.
All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA
capacity start blinking.
WARNING lamp
This lamp will illuminate continuously until
an operation is made after recording.
Tally lamp
This lamp will flash 4 times every second
until an operation is made after recording.
Viewfinder
The “END” indicator blinks.
When a write protected P2 card has been
inserted, the “WP” indicator lights up.
Warning tone
This tone will sound continuously until an
operation is made after recording.
Warning description
The P2 cards are recorded to maximum
capacity.
Recording/playback
operation
The recording stops.
Countermeasures
Delete the clips in the P2 card or insert a
new P2 card.
5.
Image Sequence Error (24P, 30P, 25P)
Display window
indication
“E-40” appears in the time code display
field.
WARNING lamp
Blinks 4 times per second.
Continues to beep.
Tally lamp
The P2 card being accessed has been
removed, resulting in an error in the
internal memory of the unit.
Blinks 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Viewfinder
The “REC WARNING” indicator lights up.
Warning tone
Beeps 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Warning description
There are abnormal conditions in the
image sequence of the 24P, 30P, or 25P
mode.
Recording/playback
operation
Images can be recorded and played
back, but some frames may be dropped
or the sequences of TC and UB may shift.
Countermeasures
Confirm the recording/playback operation
after turning off the power supply once
and then turning it on again. If the error is
not corrected after executing this
procedure, contact the dealer.
Cannot be performed.
Turn off the power to the unit. If there is
an error in a clip on the removed P2 card,
repair the clip.
Battery Empty
Display window
indication
All 7 bar indicators for battery remaining
capacity start blinking.
WARNING lamp
Lights up.
Tally lamp
Blinks once per second.
Viewfinder
The BATT LED lights up.
Warning tone
Beeps continuously.
Warning description
The battery has run out.
Recording/playback
operation
The operation stops.
Countermeasures
Replace the battery.
160
P2 Card Fully Recorded
Display window
indication
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 161 ページ 2008年10月15日
6.
水曜日
午後6時38分
Recording Error
Display window
indication
9.
“00:00:00:11” appears in the time code
display field. Even after recording is
stopped, this display continues to blink
until the next operation is performed.
P2 Card Nearly Full
Display window
indication
One of the bars for remaining MEDIA
capacity starts blinking.
WARNING lamp
Blinks once per second while recording
continues.
WARNING lamp
Blinks 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Tally lamp
Blinks once per second while recording
continues.
Tally lamp
Blinks 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Viewfinder
The P2 card remaining capacity indicator
blinks.
Viewfinder
The “REC WARNING” indicator lights up.
Warning tone
Warning tone
Beeps 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Beeps once per second while recording
continues.
Warning description
The total remaining capacity of all the P2
cards is 2 minutes or less.
Warning description
This indicates a failure either in the P2
card recording or the recording circuit.
This is displayed when attempting to
record clips where the total quantity
exceeds the upper limit (1000 pieces) for
a single P2 card.
Recording/playback
operation
Continues to operate.
Countermeasures
Replace the cards. If there is an empty
card slot, insert a new card.
The recording may stop or continue.
Countermeasures
Confirm the recording/playback operation
after turning off the power supply once
and then turning it on again.
If the recording cannot be performed
normally, change the P2 card.
7.
Display window
indication
If the error occurs during recording,
“00:00:00:11” appears in the time code
display field. The indication continues to
flash after recording is stopped and until
the next operation is performed. There is
no indication if the error occurs during
playback.
WARNING lamp
If the error occurs during recording, the
lamp flashes 4 times per second for a
period of about 3 seconds after recording
stops. The lamp does not light if the error
occurs during playback.
Tally lamp
If the error occurs during recording, the
lamp flashes 4 times per second for a
period of about 3 seconds after recording
stops. The lamp does not light if the error
occurs during playback.
Viewfinder
A flashing “CARD ERR ” appears. In
the actual indication the is replaced by
the slot number of the P2 card that
triggered the error.
Warning tone
If the error occurs during recording, the
tone sounds 4 times per second for a
period of about 3 seconds after recording
stops. The tone does not sound if the
error occurs during playback.
Warning description
An error has occurred while recording
data to or playing data from a P2 card.
Recording/playback
operation
Stop recording or playback.
Countermeasures
Replace the affected P2 card.
Low Wireless Signal Reception
Display window
indication
No display.
WARNING lamp
Blinks 4 times per second (during pause
and recording).
Tally lamp
Blinks 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Viewfinder
The “WIRELESS-RF” indicator lights up
while recording continues.
Warning tone
Beeps 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Warning description
This error indicates poor wireless audio
reception conditions.
Recording/playback
operation
Continues to operate without receiving
the wireless microphone signal.
Countermeasures
Check the microphone power supply and
the reception status of the wireless
receiver.
8.
10. P2 Card Error
Battery Nearly Empty
Display window
indication
One of the bars in the battery remaining
indicator starts blinking.
WARNING lamp
Blinks once per second.
Tally lamp
Blinks once per second.
Viewfinder
The “BATT” LED blinks.
Warning tone
Beeps 4 times per second.
Warning description
The battery is about to run out.
Recording/playback
operation
Continues to operate.
Countermeasures
Replace the battery as required.
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
Maintenance and Inspections
Recording/playback
operation
161
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 162 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
11. FAN STOP
Display window
indication
No display.
WARNING lamp
Blinks 4 times per second.
Tally lamp
No display.
Viewfinder
The “FAN STOP” indicator blinks while
recording continues.
Warning tone
It does not sound.
Warning description
The fan is at rest because something is
wrong with it.
Recording/playback
operation
The unit continues to operate. However,
when the unit operates with the fan
stopped, then the temperature inside
rises. While the unit continues to operate,
clips may not be recorded or played back
properly.
Countermeasures
Immediately stop using the unit and
consult your distributor.
12. PROXY CARD ERROR
Display window
indication
No display.
WARNING lamp
Flashes 4 times per second for a period
of about 3 seconds.
Tally lamp
Flashes 4 times per second for a period
of about 5 seconds.
Viewfinder
The “PROXY CARD ERROR” indicator
light up.
Warning tone
It does not sound.
Warning description
Proxy recording stops because of failure
on either the video encoder card or the
stream.
Recording/playback
operation
The unit continues to operate.
Countermeasures
Check the video encoder card or avoid
use of proxy recording.
162
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
午後6時38分
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 163 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Error Codes
The following error codes are displayed in the display window if an error occurs in the camera:
Confirm the type of warning and refer to the details in the [Warning Description Tables] (page 160) for countermeasures.
Code No.
Description
Type of warnings
E-11
Video initialization error
1. System Errors
E-27
Recording control error
1. System Errors
E-30
P2 card removal error
2. Card removal error
E-34
LCD microcontroller error
1. System Errors
E-38
P2 streaming microcontroller error
1. System Errors
E-39
Abnormal initialization of the AVC-Intra codec
1. System Errors
E-3F
Microprocessor error in the camera control circuit
1. System Errors
Image sequence error (in case of 24P, 30P and 25P), GENLOCK error
5. Image Sequence Error (24P, 30P, 25P)
E-63
Something is wrong with the system control microprocessor.
1. System Errors
Reference signal error.
1. System Errors
Recording error on a P2 card
6. Recording Error/10. P2 Card Error
E-6F
00:00:00:11
Card Warning Code
Code No.
Description
Recording
E-70
The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported. ([DIR NG CARD (Slot No.)] is
indicated on the viewfinder.)
Operation continues. However, back up data
on the P2 card as soon as possible, and
format the card before using it again.
E-71
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2
card has been exceeded. ([RUN DOWN
CARD (Slot No.)] is indicated on the
viewfinder.)
Operation continues. However, recording or
playback may not operate correctly. It is
recommended that you replace the P2 card
with another one.
Indication in display
window
A warning code blinks once
every 2 seconds on the time
code display section of the
display window.
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
Maintenance and Inspections
E-40
163
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 164 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail Operation and USB HOST MODE
Item
Thumbnails
Soft
keyboard
164
Message
Description
Measure
CANNOT ACCESS!
Data cannot be accessed because it is corrupted
or for other reasons.
Restore media and clips to normal state before
access.
WRITE
PROTECTED!
The P2 or SD card is write protected.
Insert write-enabled media.
CARD FULL!
The P2 or SD card is full.
Insert media with sufficient capacity.
NO CARD!
No P2 or SD card is inserted.
Insert compatible media.
NO FILE!
The designated file is not found.
Check the file.
CANNOT COPY!
Images cannot be copied.
Check the conditions for copying.
CANNOT DELETE !
Contents version mismatch prevents deletion.
Match devices and contents version.
UNKNOWN
CONTENTS
FORMAT!
Warning displayed to indicate contents version
mismatch.
Match devices and contents version.
CANNOT FORMAT!
P2 card problem prevents formatting.
Check P2 card.
CANNOT REPAIR!
Data cannot be repaired since content that
cannot be repaired is selected.
Check selected content.
CANNOT RECONNECT!
A clip that does not span multiple P2 cards
cannot be reconnected.
Check selected content.
INVALID VALUE!
Entered data was invalid.
Enter data in a valid range.
UNKNOWN DATA!
The metadata character code is invalid.
Use UTF-8 for the metadata character code. Use
the viewer to enter correct characters.
CANNOT REPAIR IN
SELECTION!
Some of the selected clip could not be repaired.
NO SD CARD!
No SD card is inserted.
Insert an SD card.
NO COPY TO SAME
CARD!
A clip cannot be copied to the card storing the
original clip.
Copy the selected clip to a card that does not
contain the original clip.
SAME CLIP IS
SELECTED!
The clip cannot be copied because a clip that has
already been copied and the original clip have
been selected.
Confirm the selected clip and release either the
source clip or the destination clip and then
execute the copy operation.
USER CLIP NAME
MODIFIED!
Characters in the clip name had to be deleted in
adding the counter value.
The user clip name plus the counter value can
only contain up to 100 bytes. Characters in the
clip name are automatically deleted when the
total exceeds 100 bytes.
TOO MANY CLIPS!
Too many clips are selected.
Reduce the number of selected clips.
LACK OF REC
CAPACITY!
There is not enough recording capacity left on the Insert a card with sufficient recording capacity.
card.
CANNOT CHANGE!
Any thumbnails that cannot be produced on the
AVC-Intra100 or AVC-Intra50 and displayed in
gray cannot be changed at the text memo
position.
Set SYSTEM MODE according to the clips.
MISSING CLIP!
A shot mark will be added to the clips recorded
on multiple P2 cards when all P2 cards are not
inserted yet.
Insert all P2 cards with recorded clips, and
confirm that the
incomplete clip indicators
disappear, and then add shot marks.
CANNOT CHANGE!
[PERSON] will be entered while the text memo is
not available.
Enter [TEXT] before entering [PERSON].
CANNOT SET!
INVALID VALUE!
The entered value is incorrect.
Change the value.
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 165 ページ 2008年10月15日
Item
Message
水曜日
午後6時38分
Description
Measure
HDD CAPACITY
FULL!
Not enough space left on the hard disk.
There is not enough space on the connected
hard disk. Use a new hard disk or formatted hard
disk.
TOO MANY
PARTITIONS!
There are too many partitions.
Hard disks can handle up to 23 partitions. Use a
new hard disk or formatted hard disk.
HDD
DISCONNECTED!
The unit is not connected to a hard disk.
Reconnect the USB cable. If the hard disk does
not operate normally, turn it off and turn it back on
again.
The hard disk cannot be initialized.
Connect another hard disk drive.
TOO MANY
TARGETS!
Multiple devices are connected.
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and turn it
back on again.
UNKNOWN DEVICE
CONNECTED!
The connected DVD drive is not compatible.
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and turn it
back on again.
An error occurred during hard disk access.
Check hard disk status and connection.
The destination target cannot be properly
recognized.
Reboot the hard disk or connect a different hard
disk.
CANNOT ACCESS
CARD!
An error occurred during P2 card access.
Check P2 card.
MISMATCH
COMPONENT!
Copying is not possible since the model number
of the destination card does not match that of the
source card.
Use a P2 card with the same model number or
import video in clip units.
P2 CARD IS
UNFORMATTED!
The P2 card is not formatted.
Use a formatted P2 card.
CARD IS EMPTY!
CANNOT COPY!
The P2 card selected for copying is empty.
Copying is not performed since the card is empty.
VERIFICATION
FAILED!
The compare check after copying failed.
Copy the data again.
CANNOT ACCESS
TARGET!
HDD
(USB HOST CANNOT
mode)
RECOGNIZE HDD!
PLEASE FORMAT P2 This warning indicates that data could not be
CARD!
imported from a hard disk to a P2 card because
the P2 card contained recorded data.
You cannot copy to a P2 card that contains data.
Format the card on a P2 device and copy again.
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
Maintenance and Inspections
CANNOT FORMAT!
165
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 166 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Menu
Menu Configuration
MENU
USER MENU
SYSTEM SETTING
MAIN MENU
PAINT
OPTION MENU
OPTION
RB GAIN CONTROL
RGB BLACK CONTROL
MATRIX
COLOR CORRECTION
LOW SETTING
MID SETTING
HIGH SETTING
ADDITIONAL DTL
SKIN TONE DTL
KNEE/LEVEL
GAMMA
CAMERA SETTING
VF
CAM OPERATION
Opening the Menus
CAMERA ID
SHUTTER SPEED
SHUTTER SELECT
USER SW
SW MODE
WHITE BALANCE MODE
LENS/IRIS
MAIN OPERATION
USER MENU:
Displayed when the MENU button is
pressed.
MAIN MENU:
Displayed when the MENU button is
pressed for at least 3 seconds.
OPTION MENU:
Displayed when the MENU button is
pressed while pressing the LIGHT
button.
FILE
SD CARD READ/WRITE
SD CARD R/W SELECT
CAC FILE CARD READ
LENS FILE
LENS FILE CARD R/W
SCENE
INITIALIZE
MAINTENANCE
USER MENU SELECT
[SELECT MODE]
SYSTEM SETTING
PAINT
VF
CAM OPE
MAIN OPE
FILE
MAINTENANCE
SYSTEM MODE
OPTION MODE
REC FUNCTION
OUTPUT SEL
HD SDI A・B OUT MARKER
MONI OUT MARKER
LCD MONITOR
GENLOCK
VF DISPLAY
VF MARKER
VF USER BOX
VF INDICATOR1
VF INDICATOR2
VF INDICATOR3
MODE CHECK IND
! LED
BATTERY/P2CARD
BATTERY SETTING1
BATTERY SETTING2
MIC/AUDIO 1
MIC/AUDIO 2
TC/UB
UMID SET/INFO
LENS ADJ
BLACK SHADING
WHITE SHADING
LENS FILE ADJ
CAC ADJ
DIAGNOSTIC1
DIAGNOSTIC2
HOURS METER
Notes
The items highlighted in grey cannot be selected by <USER MENU SELECT>.
The underlined items can only be selected by <USER MENU SELECT> as one whole page (with all sub-items). Individual
sub-items cannot be selected separately.
About Menu Description Tables
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
SCAN REVERSE OFF
ON
Remarks
This setting is for correcting an image
which has been inverted by a film-use
lens or anamorphic lens attached to
the unit.
S C U F R
a
166
b
Menu: Menu Configuration
c
a. The following letters indicate whether the modified menu data is
saved to or read out from the memory.
The – indicates that the data cannot be saved or read.
S = Can be saved and read as scene file data.
C = Can be saved or read using SD CARD READ/WRITE.
U = Can be saved and read as user data.
Please refer to [SCENE] (page 203) and [INITIALIZE]
(page 203).
F = Can be read using READ FACTORY DATA.
Please refer to [INITIALIZE] (page 203).
R = Can set whether or not to store changes using the RC DATA
SAVE menu option.
Please refer to [Connection of the remote control unit (AJRC10G)] (page 123).
b. This section shows the adjustable range of the set value, and
available options for this item.
c. About the settings available for this item.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 167 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
USER MENU:USER MENU is factory-set. The menu can be
configured to suit your preferences by
specifying each option according to your
purposes and frequency of use, through the
<USER MENU SELECT> screen, which is
accessible from the MAIN MENU page.
For more information, see [Selecting Options
for USER MENU] (page 169).
To display USER MENU, press the MENU
button.
a
MAIN MENU: Allows you to set all options on the settings
menu.
This menu has a category-by-category
structure, layered according to purposes and
frequency of use.
To display MAIN MENU, press the MENU
button for 3 seconds or longer.
c
b
a.
b.
c.
d.
LIGHT button
Jog dial button
MENU button
SHOT MARKER/MENU CANCEL button
Menu
SYSTEM SETTING:
This option is used to specify recording signal,
recording system, etc.
PAINT: This option is used to fine-adjust images while
monitoring the output waveform of the
camera, using the waveform monitor.
Normally, this adjustment requires assistance
from a video engineer.
This option may be performed by an external
remote control. However, it is valid when the
unit is used as a stand-alone device.
VF:
Used to select the information items to be
displayed in the viewfinder screen.
CAM OPERATION:
Used to change settings according to the
conditions for the subject.
MAIN OPERATION:
Used to specify recording-related items, such
as audio settings, time code, battery and P2
card remaining amounts.
FILE:
Used to specify file-related items such as SD
memory card reading/writing and lens file
settings.
MAINTENANCE:
Used to specify maintenance-related items.
USER MENU SELECT:
Used to edit USER MENU.
d
OPTION MENU:
Provides options which may be needed if
functions are added in the future.
To display OPTION MENU, hold down the
LIGHT button and press the MENU button.
Menu: Menu Configuration
167
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 168 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Setting Menu Options
The menu options are set with the MENU and jog dial
buttons.
The menu comprises main menu, sub-menus and options
menus.
The data specified through menu options are written and
saved in the internal memory of the unit.
This section describes how to set options in MAIN MENU.
The other menus can be configured in the same manner (the
method of displaying the menu screen depends on the
particular menu).
4
Turn the jog dial button to move the mark () to a
desired option. Then, press the jog dial button. The
value starts blinking.

 






Note
When the unit is in thumbnail mode, the viewfinder displays
“THUMBNAIL OPEN”, disabling navigation through the
menu.
1
Press the MENU button for 3 seconds or longer.
The MAIN MENU screen appears, together with its
options.
 








2
Turn the jog dial button to move the mark () to a
desired menu option. Then, press the jog dial button to
display the sub-menu screen.




 




3
Turn the jog dial button to move the mark () to a
desired menu option. Then, press the jog dial button to
display the options screen.




 



168
Menu: Menu Configuration
5
Turn the jog dial button to change the value.
To increase the value:
Turn the jog dial button clockwise, as seen from the front
of the camera.
To decrease the value:
Turn the jog dial button anti-clockwise, as seen from the
front of the camera.
Each turn of the dial switches the value by one step. A
quick turn changes the value rapidly; a slow turn makes
a fine adjustment.
To turn an option on or off:
To select “ON”, turn the jog dial button clockwise, as
seen from the front of the camera.
To select “OFF”, turn the jog dial button anti-clockwise,
as seen from the front of the camera.
To return the changed set value to the previous one:
To return the changed value to the previous one, press
the SHOT MARKER/MENU CANCEL button once while
the changed value is flashing and “PUSH CANCEL
BACK TO PREV” will appear. Press the SHOT
MARKER/MENU CANCEL button again to return the set
value to the value before the change.
Notes
The following menu items cannot be canceled using
the SHOT MARKER/MENU CANCEL button.
– Pages on the USER MENU SELECT screen
– Pages on the FILE screen
– CAMERA ID
– Part of the WHITE BALANCE MODE pages
– BATTERY SETTING1, 2
– UMID SET/INFO
In the 1080/23.98P and 1080/24P modes, the menu
displayed on the LCD monitor may blink. This is
normal, and does not indicate that a fault has
occurred.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 169 ページ 2008年10月15日
6
7
8
水曜日
午後6時38分
Press the jog dial button.
The value stops blinking and is accepted.
To change the settings for other options on the same
page, repeat steps 4 - 6.
When the settings are finalized, press the MENU button.
This terminates the menu option setting mode and
returns the unit to normal operation mode.
Selecting Options for USER MENU
Go to the USER MENU SELECT page from MAIN MENU.
Then, open relevant menu screens to select options to add
to USER MENU.
Only the selected options are displayed as options in USER
MENU.
For information about how to navigate this menu, see
[Setting Menu Options] (page 168).
Menu


 






Note
Options with [ ] are effective. The number of options that
can be added to USER MENU is 14 3=42 (3 pages of
options) for camera-related options, and 14 (1 page of
options) for memory-related options. Note, however, that the
number of options that can be added is reduced if menu
options not normally displayed in the selected mode are
added.
Menu: Menu Configuration
169
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 170 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Menu Description Tables
SYSTEM SETTING
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
SYSTEM MODE
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
SYSTEM MODE 1080-59.94i
1080-23.98PsF
1080-24PsF
1080-50i
Remarks
For setting the system frequency.
When this item is switched, turn off the
POWER switch on the unit and then
turn it on again.
Notes
When USB DEVICE mode is
selected, no change can be made to
this option.
When the remote control unit (AJRC10G) is connected, this item is
not displayed.
S C U F –
Used to set the codec mode and the
recording/shooting mode.
DVCPROHD:
Recording is performed using
DVCPRO HD codec.
AVC-I 100:
Recording is performed using
AVC-Intra100 codec.
AVC-I 50:
Recording is performed using
AVC-Intra50 codec.
REC FORMAT
DVCPROHD/60i
AVC-I 100/60i
AVC-I 100/30PN
AVC-I 100/24PN
AVC-I 50/60i
AVC-I 50/30PN
AVC-I 50/24PN
Used when SYSTEM MODE is set to
1080-59.94i.
When DVCPROHD/60i is selected, it is
possible to refine the shooting mode
selection by setting CAMERA MODE.
AVC-I 100/24PN
AVC-I 50/24PN
Used when SYSTEM MODE is set to
1080-23.98PsF or 1080-24PsF.
DVCPROHD/50i
AVC-I 100/50i
AVC-I 100/25PN
AVC-I 50/50i
AVC-I 50/25PN
Used when SYSTEM MODE is set to
1080-50i.
When DVCPROHD/50i is selected, it is
possible to refine the shooting mode
selection by setting CAMERA MODE.
S C U F R
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
CAMERA MODE (DVCPROHD/
60i of 108059.94i)
60i
30P
24P
24PA
(DVCPROHD/
50i of 1080-50i)
50i
25P
(Modes other
than the above)
24P
25P
Menu: Menu Description Tables
When using the DVCPRO HD recording
format in the 1080-60i or 1080-50i
modes, the pull-down method
(conventional camera mode) will be set.
S C U F R
VFR
OFF
ON
This is for setting the variable frame rate.
OFF: Operates with a fixed frame
number. Operates with a frame
rate set using REC FORMAT.
ON:
Operates with a variable frame
rate. Operates with a frame rate
set using FRAME RATE.
Note
When INTERVAL REC or LOOP REC is
set, this setting is set to “OFF”.
S C U F R
24P VFR RANGE 24FRAME
30FRAME
Select the upper limit of the frame rate
that can be changed during VFR.
This item is displayed only when “108023.98PsF” or “1080-24PsF” is selected
in SYSTEM MODE.
Note
Sequence of the HD SDI output signal
will be disturbed when this item is set to
“30FRAME” and FRAME RATE is set to
“24-30FRAME”, but this is not a
malfunction.
– – – F –
FRAME RATE
S C U F R
170
Remarks
(1080-59.94i,
1080-23.98PsF,
1080-24PsF)
1FRAME
:
24FRAME
:
30FRAME
(1080-50i)
1FRAME
:
25FRAME
This is for setting the shooting frame
number during VFR operation.
When the mode has been changed
using other settings and the frame rate
value set here exceeds the maximum
frame rate allowed by the set mode, the
maximum frame rate is changed to the
maximum frame rate of the set mode.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 171 ページ 2008年10月15日
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
USR SW F.RATE (1080-59.94i,
1080-23.98PsF,
1080-24PsF)
1FRAME
:
24FRAME
:
30FRAME
(1080-50i)
1FRAME
:
25FRAME
水曜日
午後6時38分
Remarks
When the FRATE function has been
assigned to a user button, the starting
frame rate under VFR operation is set.
When the mode has been changed
using other settings and the frame rate
value set here exceeds the maximum
frame rate allowed by the set mode, the
maximum frame rate is changed to the
maximum frame rate of the set mode.
OPTION MODE
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
ACCESS LED
OFF
SLOT SIDE
LCD SIDE
BOTH
Specify whether or not to enable the P2
card access LEDs.
OFF: Disables both LEDs above the
slots and on the side panel.
SLOT SIDE:
Enables the LED above the slots
and disables the LED on the side
panel.
LCD SIDE:
Enables the LED on the side
panel and disables the LED
above the slots.
BOTH: Enables both LEDs above the
slots and on the side panel.
HOLD
CLEAR
Select whether or not to hold the UMID
GPS position information while the
power is turned off, thereby keeping this
information as status data holding the
previous value until the power is turned
on again, which enables a new
measurement to start.
HOLD: Hold and save the data.
CLEAR: Clear the data when the power is
turned off, and save zero (NoInfo) from the next power-on
until a new measurement is
completed.
S C U F R
SCAN REVERSE ON
OFF
This setting is for correcting an image
which has been inverted by a film-use
lens or anamorphic lens attached to the
unit.
S C U F R
PC MODE SEL
USB HOST
USB DEV.
– – – F –
PC MODE
ON
OFF
Used to enable or disable the mode that
allows the unit to be connected to a PC
or an external hard disk drive via
USB 2.0.
ON:
Sets the unit to the mode
selected through the PC MODE
SELECT menu option.
OFF: Disables the PC MODE for
normal operation.
Note
Once the power is turned off, the option
is always set to “OFF” when the power is
turned on next time.
– C U F –
P.OFF GPS
DATA
Menu
This is for setting the operations mode of
this unit when PC MODE is set to “ON”
and an external device is connected to
the USB connector.
USB HOST:
Allows data transfer from the unit
to the USB-connected device.
USB DEV.:
Allows data transfer from the
USB-connected device to the
unit.
Note
When the PC MODE menu option is set
to “ON”, no change can be made to this
option.
Remarks
– C U F –
SDI METADATA ON
OFF
Used to specify whether or not to output
metadata (UMID) to HD SDI.
– C U F –
SAVE SW (AUD ON
OUT)
OFF
Select whether or not to forcibly disable
the audio output when the SAVE ON/
OFF switch is set to [ON].
ON:
Disable audio output.
OFF: Enable audio output.
– C U F –
SAVE SW (LCD) ON
OFF
– – – F –
Select whether or not to automatically
turn off the LCD monitor when the SAVE
ON/OFF switch is set to [ON].
ON:
Turn off LCD monitor.
OFF: Do not turn off LCD monitor.
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
171
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 172 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
REC FUNCTION
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
INTERVAL REC ON
MODE
ONE SHOT
OFF
Remarks
Sets INTERVAL REC function.
ON:
Uses internal memory to perform
interval recording.
ONE SHOT:
Performs “one-shot” recording
for the duration specified under
REC TIME, and then stops.
OFF: INTERVAL REC is not
performed.
Note
This item cannot be changed when “ON”
is selected in LOOP REC MODE.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
Select whether or not to enable PRE
RECORDING.
ON:
PRE RECORDING enabled.
OFF: PRE RECORDING disabled.
Note
Specify the PRE RECORDING time by
using the menu option PRE REC TIME.
PRE REC MODE ON
OFF
– C U F –
PRE REC TIME
1SEC
:
8SEC
Set PRE RECORDING.
1-8SEC:
Set the length of time that can be
retrospectively recorded before
the REC START button is
pressed.
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to enable LOOP
REC.
This setting can be used with PRE
RECORDING features.
ON:
Enable LOOP REC.
OFF: Disable LOOP REC.
Notes
After the power is turned off, this item
will default to “OFF” the next time the
power is turned on.
This item cannot be changed when
“ON” or “ONE SHOT” is selected in
INTERVAL REC MODE.
ALL
NORMAL
Select operating modes that allow
recording to start.
ALL: Allow recording to start during
stop, recording pause, and
playback.
NORMAL:
Allow recording to start during
stop and recording pause.
Note
Even if this is set to “ALL”, the operation
is “NORMAL”, when “ON” or “ONE
SHOT” is selected in INTERVAL REC
MODE.
– C U F –
INTERVAL REC ON
HOLD
OFF
Selects whether INTERVAL REC MODE
settings are retained or not when the
power is turned off once.
ON:
Retain
OFF: Do not retain. The INTERVAL
REC MODE is “OFF” whenever
the power is turned on again.
– C U F –
LOOP REC
MODE
– C U F –
REC TIME*
00s01f
:
59s29f
Set recording time for INTERVAL REC
(1 cut).
Note
However the settings can be made
frame by frame, and the numbers of the
cut-off unit frames for the shortest time
period and the set time on the actual
operation may vary with the recording
method. For details, refer to [Interval
Recording] (page 44).
– – – F –
REC START
– C U F –
PAUSE TIME*
00h00m00s01f
:
00h04m59s23f
:
23h59m59s29f
Specify pause time for INTERVAL REC.
Note
However the settings can be made
frame by frame, and the numbers of the
cut-off unit frames for the shortest time
period and the set time on the actual
operation may vary with the recording
method. For details, refer to [Interval
Recording] (page 44).
NONE
:
5day
Specify the time needed for INTERVAL
REC.
Select from “NONE” (continue until
operation is manually stopped) to
5 days.
NONE
00m00s01f
:
99m59s29f
OVER100min
Display total recorded time for
INTERVAL REC. The setting cannot be
changed using this option. Displays the
recording time (recording time needed
for the P2 card) calculated using REC
TIME, PAUSE TIME, and TAKE TOTAL
TIME.
Note
A value based on actual processing is
displayed.
– C U F –
TAKE TOTAL
TIME
– C U F –
Select the recording order of the slot
when the power is turned on.
HOLD: The recording order starts with
the card previously selected
when the power was turned off.
SLOT1: The recording order starts with
the card that is inserted in slot 1
when the power is turned on.
P.ON REC SLOT HOLD
SEL
SLOT1
– C U F –
TOTAL REC
TIME*
– – – – –
AUDIO REC
ON
OFF
Select whether or not sound will be
recorded during INTERVAL REC.
0SEC
:
10SEC
Set the delay after pressing REC START
to start recording in INTERVAL REC.
– C U F –
START DELAY
– C U F –
Note
Displayed REC TIME, PAUSE TIME and TOTAL REC TIME
are translated into either drop-frame or non-drop-frame
according to the mode of operation.
TAKE TOTAL TIME is actual time. Therefore, TOTAL REC
TIME may incorporate fractions, depending on the settings.
Example of drop-frame
– C U F –
* This variable range is the numerical values for 59.94 Hz. For
50 Hz, the frame rate is up to 24f. The frame rate is up to 23f in
24PN (Native) mode.
172
Remarks
Menu: Menu Description Tables
REC TIME
02s00f
PAUSE TIME
02s00f
TAKE TOTAL TIME
40min
TOTAL REC TIME
19m59s06f
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 173 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
OUTPUT SEL
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
SIGNAL
FORMAT
4:2:2
4:4:4
Remarks
Select the signal that is output from the
HD SDI A · B connectors.
4:2:2: YPBPR 4:2:2 format is selected.
4:4:4: RGB 4:4:4 format is selected.
LINK A will be output from the
HD SDI A connector, and LINK B
from the HD SDI B connector.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
MONITOR OUT
VBS
HD SDI
Select the output signal on the MON
OUT connector.
ON
OFF
This sets whether to perform telecine
conversion correction on the MON OUT,
RC OUT, and LCD OUT signals when
GAMMA MODE SEL is set to “FILMREC”.
ON:
Correction is performed.
OFF: Correction is not performed.
VF-OFF
LCD-OFF
ON
This sets whether to superimpose
characters on the video shown on the
LCD monitor and in the viewfinder.
Note, however, that the characters are
output to one of the MON OUT, VF OUT
and LCD OUT signals.
MEM
CAM
Select the image to display in the
viewfinder.
MEM: Display the playback image in
the playback mode. Display the
camera image at other times.
CAM: Always display the camera
image.
MONO
COLOR
Select the video signal that is output to
the viewfinder connector.
MONO: Output the Y signal alone to the
viewfinder connector.
COLOR: Output the Y, PB, and PR signals
to the viewfinder connector.
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to output clip
thumbnails displayed on the LCD
monitor to the MON OUT (VBS) signal
and the REMOTE connector.
ON:
Enable output.
OFF: Disable output.
Note
Even when the MON OUT OUTPUT SEL
switch is in the [CAM] position,
thumbnails are output when this option is
set to “ON”.
SQUEEZE
LT-BOX
For setting the mode of the down
converter output signals.
– C U F –
MONITOR
GAMMA
– C U F –
P-10LOG
ON
OFF
ON:
OFF:
P-10LOG format signal is output.
This is valid when GAMMA
MODE SEL is set to “FILMREC”, and SIGNAL FORMAT is
set to “4:4:4”.
Signal format set in GAMMA
MODE SEL is output.
Note
If you select “ON” in this item, 2D-CMS
will operate simultaneously as well.
– C U F –
VF/LCD CHAR
– C U F –
OUTPUT ITEM
VF MODE
Set the character contents
superimposed onto the output signals for
the HD SDI A · B connector and MON
OUT connector.
MENU ONLY:
Displays only when the menu
characters are superimposed.
No display appears when other
characters are superimposed.
TC:
Display the time code. (Displays
the menu when menu characters
are superimposed.)
Note that when 1080/23.98PsF
or 1080/24PsF has been
selected in the SYSTEM MODE
menu option, the frame digits will
not be updated correctly.
STATUS: Display the same characters
superimposed on the viewfinder
signal. (Displays the menu when
menu characters are
superimposed.)
– C U F –
VF SEL
– C U F –
THUMBNAIL
OUT
– C U F –
HD SDI A · B
CHAR
OFF
A
B
BOTH
Select whether to superimpose
characters on the HD SDI A · B
connector. (The character content output
from the HD SDI A · B and MON OUT
connectors is the same.)
OFF: The characters are not
superimposed.
A:
The characters are
superimposed on the HD SDI A
connector.
B:
The characters are
superimposed on the HD SDI B
connector.
BOTH: The characters are
superimposed on the HD SDI A
connector and the HD SDI B
connector.
Menu
– C U F –
MENU ONLY
TC
STATUS
Remarks
– C U F –
DOWNCON
MODE
– C U F –
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
173
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 174 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
HD SDI A · B OUT MARKER
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
MARKER SW
OFF
A
B
BOTH
Remarks
Switches the marker on and off.
OFF: The characters are not
superimposed.
A:
The characters are
superimposed on the HD SDI A
connector.
B:
The characters are
superimposed on the HD SDI B
connector.
BOTH: The characters are
superimposed on the HD SDI A
connector and the HD SDI B
connector.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
FRAME SIG
Switch the center mark.
OFF: Do not display center mark.
1:
+ (large)
2:
Hollow (large)
3:
+ (small)
4:
Hollow (small)
– C U F R
SAFETY MARK
OFF
1
2
Select the frame type for the safety zone.
OFF: Do not display frame.
1:
Box
4:3
13:9
14:9
VISTA
CNSCO
Set the frame marker.
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65.
The CNSCO ratio is 16:6.81.
ON
OFF
For setting whether to include the user
box in the signal from the HD SDI A · B
connector.
1
:
13
:
100
For setting the width of the user box.
1
:
13
:
100
For setting the height of the user box.
–50
:
+00
:
+50
For setting the horizontal position of the
user box center.
–50
:
+00
:
+50
For setting the vertical position of the
user box center.
– C U F R
USER BOX
– C U F R
USER BOX
WIDTH
– C U F R
CENTER MARK OFF
1
2
3
4
Remarks
– C U F R
USER BOX
HEIGHT
– C U F R
USER BOX H
POS
– C U F R
2:
Corner frame
– C U F R
– C U F R
SAFETY AREA
80%
:
90%
:
100%
For setting the size of the safety marker.
It is possible to set the size by units of
1% with a fixed ratio between of width
and height.
ON
OFF
Set the frame marker to “ON” or “OFF”.
– C U F R
FRAME MARK
– C U F R
174
USER BOX V
POS
Menu: Menu Description Tables
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 175 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
MONI OUT MARKER
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
CENTER MARK OFF
1
2
3
4
LCD MONITOR
Remarks
Switch the center mark.
OFF: Do not display center mark.
1:
+ (large)
2:
Hollow (large)
3:
+ (small)
4:
Hollow (small)
– C U F R
SAFETY MARK
OFF
1
2
Select the frame type for the safety zone.
OFF: Do not display frame.
1:
Box
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
BRIGHTNESS
–7
:
+0
:
+7
Adjust the LCD monitor brightness.
–7
:
+0
:
+7
Adjust the LCD monitor chroma level.
–7
:
+0
:
+7
Adjust the LCD monitor contrast.
NORMAL
HIGH
Adjust the backlight.
NORMAL:
Mode normally used
HIGH: This is brighter than NORMAL.
NORMAL
MIRROR
Select whether or not to change the LCD
monitor to mirror image.
NORMAL:
Do not change to mirror image.
MIRROR:
Change to mirror image.
– C U F –
COLOR LEVEL
– C U F –
CONTRAST
2:
Remarks
Corner frame
– C U F –
BACKLIGHT
– C U F R
80%
:
90%
:
100%
For setting the size of the safety marker.
It is possible to set the size by units of
1% with a fixed ratio between of width
and height.
ON
OFF
Set the frame marker to “ON” or “OFF”.
4:3
13:9
14:9
VISTA
CNSCO
Set the frame marker.
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65.
The CNSCO ratio is 16:6.81.
ON
OFF
For setting whether to include the user
box in the signal from the MON OUT
connector.
1
:
13
:
100
For setting the width of the user box.
1
:
13
:
100
For setting the height of the user box.
–50
:
+00
:
+50
For setting the horizontal position of the
user box center.
–50
:
+00
:
+50
For setting the vertical position of the
user box center.
– C U F –
SELF SHOOT
– C U F R
FRAME MARK
– C U F R
FRAME SIG
Menu
SAFETY AREA
– C U F –
– C U F R
USER BOX
– C U F R
USER BOX
WIDTH
– C U F R
USER BOX
HEIGHT
– C U F R
USER BOX H
POS
– C U F R
USER BOX V
POS
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
175
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 176 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
GENLOCK
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
GENLOCK
Remarks
INT
EXT
Switch the camera synchronizing signal.
INT:
Synchronize with the internal
reference signal regardless of
the reference signal input to the
GENLOCK IN connector.
EXT: Synchronize with the reference
signal input to the GENLOCK IN
connector.
HD SDI
COMPOSIT
For selecting the output signals that lock
phases to the signals that are input in the
GENLOCK IN connector. Note, however,
that in 1080/23.98PsF mode and 1080/
24PsF mode, the phase is locked to HD
SDI even if “COMPOSIT” has been
selected.
HD SDI:
For locking the HD SDI output
signals to the GENLOCK input.
For the down converter output
signals, the start position of the
video delays by about 90 lines.
COMPOSIT:
For locking the down converter
output signals to the GENLOCK
input.
For the HD SDI output signals,
the start position of the video
gains by about 90 lines.
–100
:
+000
:
+100
Perform coarse phase adjustment for
horizontal hold when configuring a
system.
–100
:
+000
:
+100
Perform fine phase adjustment for
horizontal hold when configuring a
system.
– C U F R
GL PHASE
– C U F R
H PHASE
COARSE
– – – – –
H PHASE FINE
– – – – –
176
Menu: Menu Description Tables
午後6時38分
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 177 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
PAINT
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
RB GAIN CONTROL
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
R GAIN AWB
PRE*
RGB BLACK CONTROL
Remarks
–200
:
+000
:
+200
For setting the Rch gain when the
WHITE BAL switch is in the [PRST]
position.
MASTER PED*
–200
:
+000
:
+200
For setting the Bch gain when the
WHITE BAL switch is in the [PRST]
position.
R PEDESTAL*
For setting the Rch gain when the
WHITE BAL switch is in the [A] position.
G PEDESTAL*
For setting the Bch gain when the
WHITE BAL switch is in the [A] position.
B PEDESTAL*
For setting the Rch gain when the
WHITE BAL switch is in the [B] position.
PEDESTAL
OFFSET*
S C U F R
B GAIN AWB
PRE*
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
–200
:
+000
:
+200
For setting the level of the master
pedestal.
–100
:
+000
:
+100
For setting the pedestal level of the Rch.
–100
:
+000
:
+100
For setting the pedestal level of the Gch.
–100
:
+000
:
+100
For setting the pedestal level of the Bch.
ON
OFF
For setting the pedestal levels of the
Rch, the Gch and the Bch when the auto
black balance is adjusted.
ON:
To retain the values set in the
respective items of R
PEDESTAL, G PEDESTAL, and
B PEDESTAL
OFF: The pedestal levels of the Rch,
the Gch and the Bch are set to
“0”.
–100
:
+000
:
+100
For adjusting the flare level of the Rch.
Adjustment values in this item are added
to the flare adjustment value that is
adjusted on <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.
–100
:
+000
:
+100
For adjusting the flare level of the Gch.
Adjustment values in this item are added
to the flare adjustment value that is
adjusted on <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.
–100
:
+000
:
+100
For adjusting the flare level of the Bch.
Adjustment values in this item are added
to the flare adjustment value that is
adjusted on <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.
S C U F R
S C U F R
S C U F R
S C U F R
S C U F R
B GAIN AWB A* –200
:
+000
:
+200
S C U F R
S C U F R
R GAIN AWB B* –200
:
+000
:
+200
S C U F R
B GAIN AWB B* –200
:
+000
:
+200
For setting the Bch gain when the
WHITE BAL switch is in the [B] position.
S C U F R
S C U F –
ON
OFF
For setting the values of the Rch gain
and the Bch gain when the auto white
balance is executed as the WHITE BAL
switch is in the [A] position.
ON:
To retain the values set in the
items of R GAIN AWB A and B
GAIN AWB A
OFF: The values of the Rch gain and
the Bch gain is set to “0”.
R FLARE*
S C U F R
G FLARE*
S C U F R
AWB B GAIN
OFFSET*
Menu
R GAIN AWB A* –200
:
+000
:
+200
AWB A GAIN
OFFSET*
Remarks
ON
OFF
For setting the values of the Rch gain
and the Bch gain when the auto white
balance is executed as the WHITE BAL
switch is in the [B] position.
ON:
To retain the values set in the
items of R GAIN AWB B and B
GAIN AWB B
OFF: The values of the Rch gain and
the Bch gain is set to “0”.
S C U F R
B FLARE*
S C U F R
* If the remote control unit is connected, settings made from the
menu are disabled. (The set value is displayed.)
S C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
177
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 178 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
MATRIX
COLOR CORRECTION
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
„MATRIX
TABLE
Remarks
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
for the linear matrix.
–63
:
+31
:
+63
For performing the linear matrix
adjustment. (red/green)
–63
:
–04
:
+63
For performing the linear matrix
adjustment. (red/blue)
–63
:
–01
:
+63
For performing the linear matrix
adjustment. (green/red)
–63
:
+04
:
+63
For performing the linear matrix
adjustment. (green/blue)
–63
:
+01
:
+63
For performing the linear matrix
adjustment. (blue/red)
–63
:
–01
:
+63
For performing the linear matrix
adjustment. (blue/green)
OFF
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
when the GAIN switch is in the [L]
position.
OFF
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
when the GAIN switch is in the [M]
position.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
R
(SAT)
S C U F R
MATRIX R-G
S C U F R
„M MATRIX
TABLE
S C U F –
„H MATRIX
TABLE
OFF
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
when the GAIN switch is in the [H]
position.
S C U F –
Notes
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>
screen. The items without „ are the setting items for
PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 201) for
more information.
In the preset mode, the linear matrix data of MATRIX
TABLE B are all set to “+00”.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the color saturation
correction between magenta and blue.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the color saturation
correction of blue.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the color saturation
correction between blue and cyan.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the color saturation
correction of cyan.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the color saturation
correction between cyan and green.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the color saturation
correction of green.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the color saturation
correction between green and yellow.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the color saturation
correction of yellow.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the color saturation
correction between yellow and red.
S C U F R
Cy-G
(SAT)
S C U F R
G
(SAT)
S C U F R
G-Yl
(SAT)
S C U F R
Yl
(SAT)
S C U F R
Yl-R
(SAT)
S C U F R
178
For performing the color saturation
correction of magenta.
S C U F R
Cy
(SAT)
S C U F R
„L MATRIX
TABLE
–63
:
+00
:
+63
S C U F R
B-Cy
(SAT)
S C U F R
MATRIX B-G
For performing the color saturation
correction between red and magenta.
S C U F R
B
(SAT)
S C U F R
MATRIX B-R
–63
:
+00
:
+63
S C U F R
Mg-B
(SAT)
S C U F R
MATRIX G-B
For performing the color saturation
correction of red.
S C U F R
Mg
(SAT)
S C U F R
MATRIX G-R
–63
:
+00
:
+63
S C U F R
R-Mg
(SAT)
S C U F R
MATRIX R-B
Remarks
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 179 ページ 2008年10月15日
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
R
(PHASE)
水曜日
午後6時38分
Remarks
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction for
red.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction
between red and magenta.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction for
magenta.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction
between magenta and blue.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction for
blue.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction
between blue and cyan.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction for
cyan.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction
between cyan and green.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction for
green.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction
between green and yellow.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction for
yellow.
–63
:
+00
:
+63
For performing the hue correction
between yellow and red.
Notes
ON
OFF
For switching on/off of the 12-axis
independent color correction of the
position selected with the GAIN switch
([L], [M], [H]).
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>
screen. The items without „ are the setting items for
PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 201) for
more information.
S C U F R
R-Mg
(PHASE)
LOW SETTING
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
„MASTER GAIN –3dB
:
0dB
:
30dB
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details
of dark sections are compressed.
If the numerical value is larger, details of
bright sections are also compressed.
For setting the master gamma. (0.01
step)
S C U F R
For setting the gamma curve for the dark
portion.
–8 to –1: The dark portion is compressed.
OFF: Standard state
+1 to +8: The dark portion is extended.
1
2
3
For setting the upper limit of
compression/expansion.
1:
Approximately 20%
2:
Approximately 30%
3:
Approximately 40%
OFF
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
for the linear matrix.
ON
OFF
For switching on/off of the 12-axis
independent color correction.
S C U F R
S C U F R
„COLOR
CORRECT
S C U F R
S C U F R
„COLOR
CORRECT
0.30
:
0.45
:
0.75
BLACK GAMMA –8
:
OFF
:
+8
„MATRIX
TABLE
S C U F R
Yl-R
(PHASE)
For performing the horizontal detail
frequency selection.
S C U F R
S C U F R
Yl
(PHASE)
00
:
18
:
31
S C U F R
B.GAMMA
RANGE
S C U F R
G-Yl
(PHASE)
For performing the noise elimination
level setting for detail.
Menu
S C U F R
G
(PHASE)
00
:
04
:
60
S C U F R
MASTER
GAMMA
S C U F R
Cy-G
(PHASE)
For performing the vertical detail
correction level setting.
LEVEL DEPEND. 0
1
:
5
S C U F R
Cy
(PHASE)
00
:
15
:
31
S C U F R
H.DTL FREQ.
S C U F R
B-Cy
(PHASE)
For performing the horizontal detail
correction level setting.
S C U F R
DTL CORING
S C U F R
B
(PHASE)
00
:
10
:
63
S C U F R
V.DTL LEVEL
S C U F R
Mg-B
(PHASE)
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6,
9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30 dB.
S C U F R
H.DTL LEVEL
S C U F R
Mg
(PHASE)
Remarks
S C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
179
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 180 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
When shooting with the MASTER GAIN set to “–3dB”,
coloring phenomena may occur in portions of the video
with high brightness.
The coloring phenomena can be reduced by switching the
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch to [CAM/AUTO KNEE
OFF], setting the MANUAL KNEE menu option of the
<KNEE/LEVEL> screen to “ON”, and then changing the
following menu options.
– When “HD”, “SD”, “FILMLIKE1”, “FILMLIKE2” or
“FILMLIKE3” has been selected in the GAMMA MODE
SEL menu option of the <GAMMA> screen, reduce the
value in the KNEE MASTER SLOPE menu option of the
<KNEE/LEVEL> screen.
– When “FILM-REC” has been selected in the GAMMA
MODE SEL menu option of the <GAMMA> screen,
reduce the value in the F-REC DYNAMIC LVL menu
option of the <GAMMA> screen.
– When “VIDEO-REC” has been selected in the GAMMA
MODE SEL menu option of the <GAMMA> screen,
reduce the value in the V-REC KNEE SLOPE menu
option of the <GAMMA> screen.
午後6時38分
MID SETTING
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
„MASTER GAIN –3dB
:
3dB
:
30dB
Remarks
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6,
9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30 dB.
S C U F –
H.DTL LEVEL
00
:
08
:
63
For performing the horizontal detail
correction level setting.
00
:
12
:
31
For performing the vertical detail
correction level setting.
00
:
12
:
60
For performing the noise elimination
level setting for detail.
00
:
18
:
31
For performing the horizontal detail
frequency selection.
S C U F –
V.DTL LEVEL
S C U F –
DTL CORING
S C U F –
H.DTL FREQ.
S C U F –
LEVEL DEPEND. 0
1
:
5
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details
of dark sections are compressed.
If the numerical value is larger, details of
bright sections are also compressed.
S C U F –
MASTER
GAMMA
0.30
:
0.45
:
0.75
For setting the master gamma. (0.01
step)
S C U F –
BLACK GAMMA –8
:
OFF
:
+8
For setting the gamma curve for the dark
portion.
–8 to –1:
The dark portion is compressed.
OFF: Standard state
+1 to +8:
The dark portion is extended.
S C U F –
B.GAMMA
RANGE
1
2
3
For setting the upper limit of
compression/expansion.
1:
Approximately 20%
2:
Approximately 30%
3:
Approximately 40%
OFF
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
for the linear matrix.
ON
OFF
For switching on/off of the 12-axis
independent color correction.
S C U F R
„MATRIX
TABLE
S C U F –
„COLOR
CORRECT
S C U F –
180
Menu: Menu Description Tables
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 181 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
HIGH SETTING
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
„MASTER GAIN –3dB
:
6dB
:
30dB
ADDITIONAL DTL
Remarks
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6,
9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30 dB.
DTL GAIN(+)
00
:
06
:
63
For performing the horizontal detail
correction level setting.
DTL GAIN(–)
00
:
10
:
31
For performing the vertical detail
correction level setting.
DTL CLIP
For performing the noise elimination
level setting for detail.
00
:
18
:
31
For performing the horizontal detail
frequency selection.
Adjust the detail level toward +
(upwards).
–31
:
+00
:
+31
Adjust the detail level toward the –
(downwards).
00
:
63
For setting the level for clipping the detail
signals.
(R+G)/2
(G+B)/2
2G+R+B /4
(3G+R)/4
R
G
For setting the proportion of the RGB
signal components that provide the
detail.
–31
:
+00
:
+31
For revising the master detail level.
S C U F R
DTL SOURCE
S C U F R
MASTER DTL
S C U F –
LEVEL DEPEND. 0
:
3
:
5
–31
:
+00
:
+31
Menu
00
:
12
:
60
S C U F –
H.DTL FREQ.
For changing the detail level of the high
brightness portion.
S C U F R
S C U F –
DTL CORING
OFF
1
:
5
S C U F R
S C U F –
V.DTL LEVEL
KNEE APE LVL
Remarks
S C U F R
S C U F –
H.DTL LEVEL
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details
of dark sections are compressed.
If the numerical value is larger, details of
bright sections are also compressed.
S C U F R
S C U F –
MASTER
GAMMA
0.30
:
0.45
:
0.75
For setting the master gamma. (0.01
step)
S C U F –
BLACK GAMMA –8
:
OFF
:
+8
For setting the gamma curve for the dark
portion.
–8 to –1:
The dark portion is compressed.
OFF: Standard state
+1 to +8:
The dark portion is extended.
S C U F –
B.GAMMA
RANGE
1
2
3
For setting the upper limit of
compression/expansion.
1:
Approximately 20%
2:
Approximately 30%
3:
Approximately 40%
OFF
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
for the linear matrix.
ON
OFF
For switching on/off of the 12-axis
independent color correction.
S C U F R
„MATRIX
TABLE
S C U F –
„COLOR
CORRECT
S C U F –
Note
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>
screen. The items without „ are the setting items for PAINT
MENU LEVEL R/W.
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 201) for
more information.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
181
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 182 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
SKIN TONE DTL
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
„SKIN TONE
DTL
OFF
A
B
AB
Remarks
For selecting the skin color table for
enabling the skin tone detail.
The skin color table is provided in the
DETECT TABLE item.
By enabling the skin tone detail, it is
possible to shoot human skin more
accurately.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
Y MAX
ON
OFF
For the setting to display the zebra
pattern in the skin tone area displayed in
the viewfinder screen.
The zebra pattern is displayed when this
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN
TONE DTL> screen is opened.
The zebra pattern indicates the area
which is selected in the SKIN TONE DTL
item.
S C U F R
„ZEBRA HD
SDI A
ON
OFF
For setting to include the skin tone zebra
in the HD SDI A signal.
The zebra pattern is displayed when this
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN
TONE DTL> screen is opened.
The zebra pattern indicates the area
which is selected in the SKIN TONE DTL
item.
S C U F R
„ZEBRA HD
SDI B
000
:
190
:
255
For setting the maximum value of
brightness for enabling the skin tone.
000
:
010
:
255
For setting the minimum value of
brightness for enabling the skin tone.
000
:
035
:
255
For setting the center position on the Iaxis (for setting an area that enables skin
tone).
000
:
055
:
255
For setting the area width for enabling
the skin tone on the I-axis of which the
center is the I CENTER.
00
:
10
:
90
For setting the area width for enabling
the skin tone on the Q-axis of which the
center is the I CENTER.
–180
:
+000
:
+179
For setting phases of the area for
enabling skin tone as setting the
standard to the Q-axis.
S C U F R
Y MIN
S C U F R
„ZEBRA VF
Remarks
S C U F R
I CENTER
S C U F R
I WIDTH
S C U F R
Q WIDTH
S C U F R
ON
OFF
For setting to include the skin tone zebra
in the HD SDI B signal.
The zebra pattern is displayed when this
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN
TONE DTL> screen is opened.
The zebra pattern indicates the area
which is selected in the SKIN TONE DTL
item.
Q PHASE
S C U F R
Y
R-Y
S C U F R
„ZEBRA MONI ON
OFF
For setting to include the skin tone zebra
in the MON OUT signal.
The zebra pattern is displayed when this
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN
TONE DTL> screen is opened.
The zebra pattern indicates the area
which is selected in the SKIN TONE DTL
item.
Q-WIDTH
I-WIDTH
I-CENTER
– direction
Q-PHASE
B-Y
DETECT TABLE A
B
For selecting the skin color table for
subjects to which the skin tone table
applies.
S C U F R
For fetching the color information of “A”
or “B”, which is selected in the DETECT
TABLE item, near the center marker.
When this function is executed, data
from I CENTER to Q PHASE are fetched
automatically.
The fetched data will be the table data of
“A” or “B”, which is selected in the
DETECT TABLE item.
It is impossible to obtain color
information of both “A” and “B” at the
same time.
SKIN TONE GET
– – – – –
0
:
16
:
31
For setting the effect level of the skin
tone detail.
S C U F R
182
Y-MIN
0
S C U F R
SKIN DTL
EFFECT
Y-MAX
+ direction
Menu: Menu Description Tables
= SKIN TONE AREA
Note
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>
screen. The items without „ are the setting items for PAINT
MENU LEVEL R/W.
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 201) for
more information.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 183 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
KNEE/LEVEL
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
MASTER PED
Remarks
–200
:
+000
:
+200
Set the master pedestal.
ON
OFF
Set the mode when the AUTO KNEE
switch is [OFF]. The KNEE MASTER
POINT/KNEE MASTER SLOPE set
value is enabled when this setting is
“ON”.
S C U F R
„MANUAL
KNEE
Notes
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>
screen. The items without „ are the setting items for
PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 201) for
more information.
When “FILM-REC” or “VIDEO-REC” is selected in the
GAMMA MODE SEL menu option on the <GAMMA>
screen, the KNEE MASTER SLOPE and KNEE MASTER
POINT menu option settings are disabled.
S C U F R
KNEE MASTER 70.0%
POINT
:
93.0%
:
107.0%
For setting the knee point position in
increments of 0.5% steps.
S C U F R
For setting the inclination of the knee.
Menu
KNEE MASTER 00
SLOPE
:
85
:
99
S C U F R
„WHITE CLIP
ON
OFF
Set the WHITE CLIP feature to “ON” or
“OFF”. The WHITE CLIP LVL set value is
enabled when this setting is “ON”.
S C U F R
WHITE CLIP LVL 90%
:
109%
Set WHITE CLIP level.
S C U F R
A.KNEE POINT
80%
:
93%
:
107%
Set the AUTO KNEE point position in 1%
steps. This setting is enabled when the
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch is
set to [CAM/AUTO KNEE ON].
100
:
107
:
109
Set the AUTO KNEE level.
1
:
4
:
8
Set the AUTO KNEE response speed.
The smaller the setting value, the faster
the response speed.
S C U F R
A.KNEE LVL
S C U F R
A.KNEE
RESPONSE
S C U F R
CHROMA LEVEL OFF
–99%
:
+00%
:
+40%
For setting the chroma level of the PR
signals and the PB signals.
If this is set to “OFF”, the color elements
of video signals are eliminated.
S C U F R
DRS EFFECT
DEPTH
1
2
3
Set the compression level of the highbrightness component of DRS. If the
numerical value is larger, the
compression level of the high-brightness
component increases.
S C U F R
„HI-COLOR SW ON
OFF
For switching the mode on/off which
enables the dynamic color range to be
expanded.
S C U F R
HI-COLOR LVL
1
:
32
For selecting the level of the dynamic
color range when in the mode which
allows expansion of the dynamic color
range.
S C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
183
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 184 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
AUTO KNEE is not performed when AJ-RC10G is
connected, but the LED of the AJ-RC10G button is lit by
pressing the A.KNEE ON button.
GAMMA
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
MASTER
GAMMA
午後6時38分
Remarks
0.30
:
0.45
:
0.75
Set the master gamma in 0.01 steps.
–15
:
+00
:
+15
Set the Rch gamma.
–15
:
+00
:
+15
Set the Bch gamma.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
F-REC
DYNAMIC LVL
S C U F R
R GAMMA
HD
SD
FILMLIKE1
FILMLIKE2
FILMLIKE3
FILM-REC
VIDEO-REC
For setting the dynamic range when
GAMMA MODE SEL has been set to
“FILM-REC”.
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been
set to “FILM-REC”, this setting cannot be
changed.
00%
:
30%
For setting the amount of black stretch
when GAMMA MODE SEL has been set
to “FILM-REC”.
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been
set to “FILM-REC”, this setting cannot be
changed.
150%
200%
250%
300%
350%
400%
450%
500%
For setting the amount of knee-slope
when GAMMA MODE SEL has been set
to “VIDEO-REC”.
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been
set to “VIDEO-REC”, this setting cannot
be changed.
30%
:
107%
For setting knee point when GAMMA
MODE SEL has been set to “VIDEOREC”.
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been
set to “VIDEO-REC”, this setting cannot
be changed.
S C U F R
S C U F R
GAMMA MODE
SEL
200%
300%
400%
500%
600%
S C U F R
F-REC BLACK
STR LVL
S C U F R
B GAMMA
Remarks
For selecting the gamma mode.
HD:
Video gamma characteristics for
HD (High Definition)
SD:
The gain in the dark section is
higher than the HD gamma.
FILMLIKE1:
In this setting gradations in
highlit areas can be expressed
better than the HD gamma.
FILMLIKE2:
In this setting gradations in
highlit areas can be expressed
better than when FILMLIKE1 is
selected.
FILMLIKE3:
In this setting gradations in
highlit areas can be expressed
better than when FILMLIKE2 is
selected.
FILM-REC:
The cinema gamma
characteristics for film
applications.
VIDEO-REC:
The cinema gamma
characteristics for video
applications.
V-REC KNEE
SLOPE
S C U F R
V-REC KNEE
POINT
S C U F R
„CAMERA SETTING
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
DETAIL
Remarks
ON
OFF
For switching on/off of the detail signals.
ON
OFF
For switching on/off of the gamma
correction.
ON
OFF
Switch the test signal on or off.
ON
OFF
Set the flare correction to on or off.
ON
OFF
For switching on/off of the aperture
correction.
S C U F R
GAMMA
S C U F R
S C U F R
TEST SAW
S C U F R
FILMLIKE1
FLARE
S C U F R
FILM-REC
FILMLIKE3
SD
Video level
VIDEO-REC
S C U F R
FILMLIKE2
Note
All items in CAMERA SETTING are setting targets of the
item PAINT MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W
SELECT> screen.
HD
Luminance
When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is used for
FILMLIKE3, the following settings are recommended.
MANUAL KNEE:
“ON”
KNEE MASTER POINT: “85.0%”
KNEE MASTER SLOPE: “50”
AUTO KNEE is not performed when the GAMMA MODE
SEL menu option is set to “FILM-REC” or “VIDEO-REC”.
184
H-F COMPE.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 185 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
VF
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
VF DISPLAY
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
STATUS MODE
NORMAL
FILM-REC
Remarks
For selecting the status display mode of
the viewfinder.
NORMAL:
Normal status display
FILM-REC:
Status display for FILM REC
Note
Setting STATUS MODE to “FILM-REC”
disables the DISP CONDITION and
DISP MODE settings.
– C U F R
DISP
CONDITION
NORMAL
HOLD
– C U F R
DISP MODE
1
2
3
Set the DISP MODE.
Switch the camera’s Warning/Message
indication. Please refer to [Display
Modes and Setting Changes/adjustment
Result Messages] (page 86) for more
information.
– C U F R
VF OUT
Y
NAM
R
G
B
For selecting the video signals to display
in the viewfinder screen.
Y:
Brightness signal
NAM: Output signal with the highest
level among R, G, and B signals.
R:
Rch signal
G:
Gch signal
B:
Bch signal
00
:
05
:
10
For setting the detail level of the
viewfinder screen.
The details of the signals for the
viewfinder are further enhanced. If “0” is
selected, then the detail is the same as
that for the main line.
0%
:
85%
:
109%
Set the ZEBRA2 detection level (IRE
value).
OFF
SPOT
ON
Set the ZEBRA2 to “ON”, “OFF”, or
“SPOT”.
– C U F R
ZEBRA2
– C U F R
Set the camera incoming light volume at
which to display “LOW LIGHT”.
LOW LIGHT LVL OFF
10%
15%
20%
25%
30%
35%
– C U F R
For the setting to display the menu in the
viewfinder screen when the remote
control unit is connected to the unit.
RC MENU DISP. ON
OFF
– C U F R
Adjust the brightness of markers and
characters displayed on the viewfinder.
MARKER/CHAR 50%
60%
LVL
70%
80%
90%
100%
– C U F R
SYNCHRO
SCAN DISP.
Set the units for the SYNCHRO SCAN
mode display.
sec:
Display using time.
deg: Display using opening angle of
the shutter.
sec
deg
– C U F R
– C U F R
VF DTL
ZEBRA2
DETECT
Remarks
Menu
NORMAL:
Display status constantly.
HOLD: Display status only when the
MODE CHECK switch is
pressed.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
ZEBRA Pattern Display
Video Level
109%
ON
ZEBRA 2
OFF
SPOT
– C U F R
VF DTL CORING 00
:
15
For setting the noise elimination level for
detail in the viewfinder signal.
– C U F R
VF H.DTL FREQ. 1
:
4
:
6
For selecting the horizontal detail
frequency in the viewfinder signal.
ZEBRA 2
DETECT
S C U F R
ZEBRA1
DETECT
0%
:
70%
:
109%
Set the ZEBRA1 detection level (IRE
value).
ZEBRA 1
DETECT
– C U F R
0%
Menu: Menu Description Tables
185
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 186 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
VF MARKER
VF USER BOX
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
TABLE
A
B
Remarks
Select the VF MARKER setting table.
First, select table “A” or “B”, then set the
items below for each table.
– C U F R
CENTER MARK OFF
1
2
3
4
Switch the center mark.
OFF: Do not display center mark.
1:
+ (large)
2:
Hollow (large)
3:
+ (small)
4:
Hollow (small)
– C U F R
SAFETY MARK
OFF
1
2
午後6時38分
Select the frame type for the safety zone.
OFF: Do not display frame.
1:
Box
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
USER BOX
ON
OFF
For setting whether the user box is
displayed in the viewfinder or not.
1
:
13
:
100
For setting the width of the user box.
1
:
13
:
100
For setting the height of the user box.
–50
:
+00
:
+50
For setting the horizontal position of the
user box center.
–50
:
+00
:
+50
For setting the vertical position of the
user box center.
– C U F R
USER BOX
WIDTH
– C U F R
USER BOX
HEIGHT
– C U F R
USER BOX H
POS
2:
Remarks
Corner frame
– C U F R
USER BOX V
POS
– C U F R
SAFETY AREA
80%
:
90%
:
100%
For setting the size of the safety marker.
It is possible to set the size by units of
1% with a fixed ratio between of width
and height.
ON
OFF
Set the frame marker to “ON” or “OFF”.
– C U F R
FRAME MARK
– C U F R
FRAME SIG
4:3
13:9
14:9
VISTA
CNSCO
Set the frame marker.
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65. (1.85:1)
The CNSCO ratio is 16:6.81 (2.35:1).
0
:
15
Set the level outside the frame marker.
Note that the level does not change on
the LCD monitor.
0:
Equivalent to signal off.
(Blanking status)
15:
Same brightness as center area.
– C U F R
FRAME LVL
– C U F R
Note
The safety zone marker, the safety zone area, and the frame
marker are not displayed on the LCD monitor if “LT-BOX” is
selected in DOWNCON MODE.
186
Menu: Menu Description Tables
– C U F R
The user box can be displayed in any position as a
boxtype cursor.
Note
The user box is not displayed on the LCD monitor if “LTBOX” is selected in DOWNCON MODE.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 187 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
VF INDICATOR1
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
EXTENDER
VF INDICATOR2
Remarks
ON
OFF
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the
extender display.
CAC
ON
OFF
Set the shutter speed indication to “ON”
or “OFF”.
GAMMA MODE
ON
OFF
Set the filter No. indication to “ON” or
“OFF”.
DRS
ON
OFF
Set the AWB PRST/A/B indication to
“ON” or “OFF”.
P-10LOG
ON
OFF
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the
indication of the currently selected gain.
VF GAMMA
OFF
IRIS
OFF: Disable the iris value indication.
IRIS: Enable the iris value indication.
The display of the iris value and the
display of the iris override are
interlinked. When the iris override is
changed, it is forcibly displayed for
3 seconds.
MONITOR
GAMMA
– C U F R
SHUTTER
ON
OFF
Select whether the gamma mode is to be
displayed or not.
ON
OFF
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the
dynamic range stretcher function display.
ON
OFF
For selecting whether to display if P10LOG is operating or not.
ON
OFF
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the
viewfinder gamma display.
ON
OFF
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the
monitor gamma display.
– C U F R
– C U F R
IRIS
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the CAC
function display.
– C U F R
– C U F R
GAIN
ON
OFF
– C U F R
– C U F R
WHITE
Remarks
– C U F R
– C U F R
FILTER
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
– C U F R
Menu
– C U F R
– C U F R
BAR
OFF
For setting to record the camera ID.
BAR: The camera ID is recorded when
the color bar signals are
recorded.
OFF: The camera ID is not recorded.
UPPER R
UPPER L
LOWER R
LOWER L
For setting the position to display the
camera ID.
UPPER R:
Upper right.
UPPER L:
Upper left.
LOWER R:
Lower right.
LOWER L:
Lower left.
ON
OFF
For selecting an option to display year/
month/day and hour/minute/second
simultaneously when the camera ID is
displayed.
ON
OFF
Set the zoom position indication to “ON”
or “OFF”.
ON
OFF
Set the color temperature indication to
“ON” or “OFF”.
SYSTEM MODE ON
OFF
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the
system mode and REC mode display.
CAMERA ID
– C U F R
ID POSITION
– C U F R
DATE/TIME
– C U F R
ZOOM LVL
– C U F R
COLOR TEMP
– C U F R
– C U F R
REC FORMAT
ON
OFF
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the
recording format display.
ON
OFF
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the frame
rate display.
– C U F R
FRAME RATE
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
187
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 188 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
VF INDICATOR3
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
P2CARD
REMAIN
Remarks
OFF
ONE-CARD
TOTAL
Select the indication mode for the P2
card’s remaining capacity.
OFF: Disable the remaining capacity
indication.
ONE-CARD:
Display the remaining capacity
of the P2 card currently used for
recording.
TOTAL: Display the total remaining
capacity of all P2 cards in slots.
ON
OFF
Set the battery voltage indication to “ON”
or “OFF”.
ON
OFF
Set the audio lever meter indication to
“ON” or “OFF”.
ON
OFF
Select whether the time code is to be
displayed or not on the color bar.
OFF
TCG
TCR
TCG/TCR
Select the time code to display.
OFF: Disable the time code display.
TCG: Display the time code generator
value in recording mode.
TCR: Display the time code reader
value in playback mode.
TCG/TCR:
Display the time code generator
value in recording mode, and the
time code reader value in
playback mode.
OFF
ALWAYS
NORMAL
Select the method of displaying system
information and warnings.
OFF: Display no warnings other than
“TURN POWER OFF” and
“SYSTEM ERROR”.
ALWAYS:
Always display warnings.
NORMAL:
Display warnings for 3 seconds
only when problems occur.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
SAVE LED
SAVE
P2CARD
Set the SAVE lamp function.
SAVE: The lamp lights up when the
SAVE ON/OFF switch is set to
[ON] and the output system
assigned in [OPTION MODE]
(page 171) is in the save mode.
P2CARD:
The lamp blinks in synch with the
warning message when the P2
card’s remaining recording
capacity is getting low.
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to enable “REC”
indication in the viewfinder and on the
LCD monitor during recording.
ON:
REC indication enabled.
OFF: REC indication not enabled.
Note
This option is useful when unit is used
independently.
ON
OFF
When a video encoder card (AJYAX800G, optional) is attached, proxy
recording information is displayed when
recording starts.
ON:
Display indicating whether proxy
recording is to be performed on
the P2 card only, or on both the
P2 card and the SD memory
card.
OFF: Proxy recording information is
not displayed.
– C U F R
BATTERY
– C U F R
REC STATUS
– C U F R
AUDIO LVL
– C U F R
TC ON COLOR
BAR
– C U F R
TC
– C U F R
– C U F R
SYSTEM INFO
PROXY REC
– C U F R
– C U F R
188
Remarks
Menu: Menu Description Tables
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 189 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
MODE CHECK IND
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
STATUS
!LED
Remarks
ON
OFF
For the setting to display the status
screen when the MODE CHECK button
is pressed.
GAIN (0dB)
ON
OFF
For the setting to indicate causes for
turning on the
lamp on the viewfinder
is displayed when the MODE CHECK
button is pressed.
The causes for turning on the
lamp
are displayed with
.
SHUTTER
– C U F R
!LED
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the GAIN is set to a
value other than “0 dB”.
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the electronic shutter
is activated.
WHITE PRESET ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the WHITE BAL
switch is set to the [PRST] position.
– C U F R
– C U F R
– C U F R
FUNCTION
For the setting to display the FUNCTION
screen when the MODE CHECK button
is pressed.
ON
OFF
For the setting to display the AUDIO
screen when the MODE CHECK button
is pressed.
ON
OFF
For the setting to display the CAC screen
when the MODE CHECK button is
pressed.
ON
OFF
For selecting whether to display the
functions assigned to the user switches,
or if some of the switch operations are
locked or not when in MODE CHECK.
ON
OFF
For the setting to display the status
screen immediately after turning on the
power of the unit.
Note
Even if it is set to “ON” in this item, the
status screen is not displayed
immediately after turning on the power of
the unit when the STATUS item is set to
“OFF”.
– C U F R
EXTENDER
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the lens extender is
activated.
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the BLACK GAMMA
is activated.
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the color correction
table for the linear matrix is selected.
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the 12-axis
independent color correction is selected.
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the filter combination
is anyone other than 3200 K and
CLEAR.
– C U F R
B.GAMMA
– C U F R
CAC
– C U F R
MATRIX
– C U F R
USER SW
STATUS
– C U F R
P.ON IND
Menu
ON
OFF
– C U F R
AUDIO
Remarks
– C U F R
COLOR
CORRECTION
– C U F R
FILTER
– C U F R
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
189
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 190 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
CAM OPERATION
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
CAMERA ID
SHUTTER SPEED
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
Remarks
Setting 1 for the CAMERA ID recorded
on color bars. Up to 10 characters are
allowed for this setting.
ID1
– C U F –
Setting 2 for the CAMERA ID recorded
on color bars. Up to 10 characters are
allowed for this setting.
ID2
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
SYNCHRO
SCAN
ON
OFF
Allocate SYNCHRO SCAN as a shutter
speed selectable by the shutter switch.
ON
OFF
Allocate SYNCHRO SCAN2 as a shutter
speed selectable by the shutter switch.
When SYNCHRO SCAN2 has been
allocated, the speed will only be
displayed in seconds.
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION1 SEL in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION2 SEL in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION3 SEL in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION4 SEL in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION5 SEL in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION6 SEL in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
– C U F –
SYNCHRO
SCAN2
– C U F –
Setting 3 for the CAMERA ID recorded
on color bars. Up to 10 characters are
allowed for this setting.
ID3
– C U F –
POSITION1
– C U F –
Note
This setting is canceled when READ FACTORY DATA is
selected.
Remarks
– C U F –
POSITION2
– C U F –
POSITION3
– C U F –
POSITION4
– C U F –
POSITION5
– C U F –
POSITION6
– C U F –
190
Menu: Menu Description Tables
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 191 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
SHUTTER SELECT
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
POSITION1 SEL
For 59.94 Hz 1/60
1/100
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
For 50 Hz
Remarks
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION1.
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION3.
1/50
1/60
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
– C U F –
For 59.94 Hz 1/60
1/100
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
– C U F –
For 59.94 Hz 1/60
1/100
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
For 50 Hz
– C U F –
POSITION2 SEL
For 50 Hz
POSITION3 SEL
Remarks
Menu
1/50
1/60
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
1/50
1/60
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION2.
POSITION4 SEL
For 59.94 Hz 1/60
1/100
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
For 50 Hz
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION4.
1/50
1/60
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
191
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 192 ページ 2008年10月15日
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
POSITION5 SEL
For 59.94 Hz 1/60
1/100
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
For 50 Hz
水曜日
Remarks
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION5.
午後6時38分
USER SW
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
USER MAIN SW INH
I.OVR
S.BLK
B.GAMMA
Y GET
DRS
ASSIST
C.TEMP
VFR
FRATE
VF GAM
AUDIO CH1
AUDIO CH2
REC SW
RET SW
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
PC MODE
1/50
1/60
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
For 59.94 Hz 1/60
1/100
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
For 50 Hz
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION6.
1/50
1/60
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
– C U F –
Note
By setting the shutter speed on the time axis (1/60, 1/100, 1/
120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000), the frame rate can be
varied while keeping the exposure constant.
This is equivalent to Ramping (compensating for changes in
frame rate using shutter angle) in a conventional film
camera.
INH
I.OVR
S.BLK
B.GAMMA
Y GET
DRS
ASSIST
C.TEMP
VFR
FRATE
VF GAM
AUDIO CH1
AUDIO CH2
REC SW
RET SW
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
PC MODE
Allocate the USER 1 button. For
descriptions of the functions, see
[Assigning Functions to User Buttons]
(page 59).
INH
I.OVR
S.BLK
B.GAMMA
Y GET
DRS
ASSIST
C.TEMP
VFR
FRATE
VF GAM
AUDIO CH1
AUDIO CH2
REC SW
RET SW
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
PC MODE
Allocate the USER 2 button. For
descriptions of the functions, see
[Assigning Functions to User Buttons]
(page 59).
INH
Y GET
ASSIST
VF GAM
VF MARK
REC SW
RET SW
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
PC MODE
Allocate the MARKER SELECT button.
For descriptions of the functions, see
[Assigning Functions to User Buttons]
(page 59).
– C U F R
USER2 SW
– C U F R
MARKER SEL
(USER3 SW)
– C U F R
TEXT MEMO SW INH
(USER4 SW)
Y GET
ASSIST
VF GAM
REC SW
RET SW
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
PC MODE
TEXT MEMO
– C U F R
192
Allocate the USER MAIN button. For
descriptions of the functions, see
[Assigning Functions to User Buttons]
(page 59).
– C U F R
USER1 SW
– C U F –
POSITION6 SEL
Remarks
Menu: Menu Description Tables
Allocate the TEXT MEMO button. For
descriptions of the functions, see
[Assigning Functions to User Buttons]
(page 59).
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 193 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
SW MODE
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
RET SW
R.REVIEW
CAM RET
Remarks
SMPTE
FULL BARS
SPLIT
For selecting the color bar to be used.
SMPTE: Color bar complied with the
SMPTE standards
FULL BARS:
Full color bar
SPLIT: SPLIT color bar for SNG
(Satellite News Gathering)
R.REVIEW
PLAY
For specifying what the unit does when
the REC check button on the remote
control unit is pressed.
R.REVIEW:
The unit performs rec review.
PLAY: The unit performs playback.
– C U F R
RC CHECK SW
– C U F R
SIDE SW LOCK OFF
ON
For selecting whether to disable the
switches (GAIN, OUTPUT and AWB
switches) on the side of the unit.
When this setting is changed from “OFF”
to “ON”, the set states of the switches
are preserved. While this setting is “ON”,
the switches remain disabled.
OFF: Switches are not disabled.
ON:
Switches are disabled.
– C U F R
– C U F R
S.BLK LVL
COLOR BARS
Remarks
Menu
For setting the function when the user
button on the unit, to which the RET
button of the lens or the RET SW
function is allocated, is pressed.
R.REVIEW:
Rec review function
It is possible to check a last few
seconds of the records taken.
CAM RET:
Return video function
It is possible to confirm the
return video signals (analog
HD Y signals) supplied to the
GENLOCK IN connector on the
unit by using the viewfinder.
Notes
When video signals in a format
different from that for the video mode
of the unit, return video is not properly
displayed.
When the GENLOCK item (the
<GENLOCK> screen on the SYSTEM
SETTING page) is set to “INT”, the
return video image may be displayed
as slightly shaking horizontally.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
OFF
–10
–20
–30
For setting the super black level.
– C U F R
AUTO KNEE SW ON
OFF
DRS
For selecting on/off of the AUTO KNEE
function and DRS function.
When it is set to “OFF”, the AUTO KNEE
may not function even if the AUTO
KNEE switch is turned on.
When the DRS is selected and the
AUTO KNEE switch is positioned to
[ON], the DRS function turns on.
S C U F R
SHD.ABB SW
CTL
ON
OFF
For the setting to adjust the black
shading automatically when the AUTO
W/B BAL switch is held to the [ABB] side
for 8 seconds or more.
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
193
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 194 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
WHITE BALANCE MODE
AWB B TEMP
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
FILTER INH
ON
OFF
Remarks
For selecting independently whether
memory data for white balance (Ach,
Bch) is retained or not for the respective
CC filters.
ON:
Regardless of the CC filter, data
for the memories (2 memories)
for Ach and Bch is retained.
OFF: The memory data (8 memories)
for Ach and Bch is retained for
the respective CC filters.
– C U F R
SHOCKLESS
AWB
OFF
FAST
NORMAL
SLOW1
SLOW2
SLOW3
For setting the length of time for
transiting to the switched position of
white balance, when the position of the
WHITE BAL switch is changed.
OFF: To transit instantly
FAST: About 1 second
NORMAL:
About 2 seconds
SLOW1:
About 3 seconds
SLOW2:
About 10 seconds
SLOW3:
About 20 seconds
– C U F R
AWB AREA
25%
50%
90%
For switching the detection area for
executing the automatic adjustment of
white balance.
25%: An area near the screen center
equivalent to 25% of the screen
is detected.
50%: An area near the screen center
equivalent to 50% of the screen
is detected.
90%: An area equivalent to 90% of the
screen is detected.
– C U F R
TEMP PRE SEL VAR
3.2K/5.6K
SW
For changing the detection area on
which automatic white balance
adjustment is performed.
VAR:
From 2300K to 9900K is
selectable.
3.2K/5.6K:
The detection area is fixed to
3200K or 5600K.
– – – F –
COLOR TEMP
PRE
2300K
:
3200K
:
9900K
For setting the color temperature when
the WHITE BAL switch is set to the
[PRST] position.
Since the range of color temperatures
that can be set will vary with the CC
filter position, a numerical value
cannot be changed even if the color
temperature is changed when a high
color temperature is set.
2300K
:
3200K
:
9900K
For setting the color temperature when
the WHITE BAL switch is set to the [A]
position.
If the automatic adjustment of white
balance is executed in the [A] position,
the color temperature at that time is
memorized in the position of the WHITE
BAL switch [A].
– – – F –
AWB A TEMP
– – – F –
194
Menu: Menu Description Tables
2300K
:
3200K
:
9900K
Remarks
For setting the color temperature when
the WHITE BAL switch is set to the [B]
position.
If the automatic adjustment of white
balance is executed in the [B] position,
the color temperature at that time is
memorized in the position of the WHITE
BAL switch [B].
– – – F –
LENS/IRIS
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
A.IRIS LEVEL
Remarks
000
:
045
:
100
Set the target value for auto iris.
000
:
030
:
100
Determine the peak-to-standard ratio for
the auto iris.
A larger value sets the auto iris to
respond to the peak in the iris detection
window, while a smaller value sets it to
respond to the average value in the
window.
– C U F R
A.IRIS PEAK/
AVE
– C U F R
A.IRIS WINDOW NORM1
NORM2
CENTR
Select the auto iris detection window.
NORM1:
The window closer to the center
of the screen.
NORM2:
The window closer to bottom of
the screen.
CENTR:
The spot window in the center of
the screen.
– C U F R
IRIS GAIN
CAM
LENS
Select which unit controls IRIS GAIN.
Note
Lenses with an extender, such as 2,
0.8 sold before FUJINON DIGI
POWER, perform iris compensation
while enabling the extender. Therefore, if
this setting is switched to “CAM”, the
camera’s iris control will not operate
properly.
01
:
10
:
20
Set the adjustable value for IRIS GAIN.
This setting is effective when “CAM” is
selected for IRIS GAIN.
– C U F R
IRIS GAIN
VALUE
– C U F R
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 195 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
MAIN OPERATION
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
BATTERY/P2CARD
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
BATTERY
SELECT
Remarks
Select the battery to use. Remaining
capacity detection is also performed
according to the selected battery.
The variable range is changed by the
item settings selected on the [BATTERY
SETTING1] (page 196) and [BATTERY
SETTING2] (page 197) menus.
The initial value for “TYPE A” is set to
“DIONIC90” while the same for “TYPE B”
is set to “HYTRON140”.
When BP-GL65 or BP-GL95, a battery
made of Sony, is used, set this to “BPL65/95”.
AC_ADPT
PROPAC14
TRIMPAC14
HYTRON50
HYTRON140
DIONIC90
DIONIC160
NP-L7
ENDURA7
ENDURA10
ENDURA-D
PAG L95
BP-L65/95
NiCd14
TYPE A
TYPE B
Set the remaining capacity detection
type when a battery is connected to the
DC IN connector. Remaining capacity
detection is also performed according to
the selected battery type.
The variable range is changed by the
item settings selected on the [BATTERY
SETTING1] (page 196) and [BATTERY
SETTING2] (page 197) menus.
Analog voltage is displayed on the
viewfinder screen.
When BP-GL65 or BP-GL95, a battery
made of Sony, is used, set this to “BPL65/95”.
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to set the alarm to
beep when the battery level is low.
ON
OFF
If set to “ON”, the warning tone and
indication can be canceled by pressing
the MODE CHECK button when BATT
NEAR END ALARM is triggered.
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to set the alarm to
beep when the battery is empty.
70%
100%
Set the display of the remaining battery
level indicator bar in the display window
when a battery with this function is used.
70%:
Indicate FULL at 70% capacity.
100%: Indicate FULL at 100% capacity.
– C U F –
EXT DC IN
SELECT
CARD NEAR
END ALARM
Remarks
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to set the alarm to
beep when the space remaining on the
P2 card is small.
2min
3min
Set the time at which to indicate that
there is little space remaining on the P2
card.
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to set the alarm to
beep when the P2 card is full.
– C U F –
CARD NEAR
END TIME
– C U F –
CARD END
ALARM
– C U F –
CARD REMAIN/ 3min/„
„
5min/„
Set the length of time for one segment
(„) of the P2 card’s remaining capacity
indicator bars.
3min/„: One segment represents
3 minutes.
5min/„: One segment represents
5 minutes.
Menu
PROPAC14
TRIMPAC14
HYTRON50
HYTRON140
DIONIC90
DIONIC160
NP-L7
ENDURA7
ENDURA10
ENDURA-D
PAG L95
BP-L65/95
NiCd14
TYPE A
TYPE B
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
– C U F –
– C U F –
BATT NEAR
END ALARM
– C U F –
BATT NEAR
END CANCEL
– C U F –
BATT END
ALARM
– C U F –
BATT REMAIN
FULL
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
195
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 196 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
BATTERY SETTING1
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
PROPAC14
•
Remarks
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
DIONIC90
•
Remarks
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
11.0
:
13.8
:
15.0
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
11.0
:
13.6
:
15.0
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
– C U F –
– C U F –
TRIMPAC14
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
DIONIC160
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
11.0
:
13.6
:
15.0
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
11.0
:
13.2
:
15.0
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
– C U F –
– C U F –
HYTRON50
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
NP-L7
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
11.0
:
13.5
:
15.0
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
11.0
:
13.2
:
15.0
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
– C U F –
– C U F –
HYTRON140
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
ENDURA7
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
11.0
:
13.5
:
15.0
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
11.0
:
13.2
:
15.0
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
– C U F –
196
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
Menu: Menu Description Tables
– C U F –
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 197 ページ 2008年10月15日
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
ENDURA10
•
AUTO
MANUAL
11.0
:
13.2
:
15.0
水曜日
午後6時38分
Remarks
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
BATTERY SETTING2
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
NiCd14
•
•
AUTO
MANUAL
11.0
:
13.8
:
15.0
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V
steps.
END
11.0
:
13.4
:
15.0
Set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.
– C U F –
TYPE A
•
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
FULL
Set the voltage to display the FULL
indication in 0.1 V steps.
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
12.0
:
15.1
:
17.0
NEAR END
11.0
:
13.6
:
15.0
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V
steps.
END
11.0
:
12.9
:
15.0
Set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.
– C U F –
PAG L95
•
AUTO
MANUAL
11.0
:
13.5
:
15.0
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
– C U F –
BP-GL65/95
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:
Set voltage manually.
11.0
:
13.5
:
15.0
When “MANUAL” is selected in the
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage
in 0.1 V steps.
Menu
11.0
:
13.2
:
15.0
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
NEAR END
– C U F –
ENDURA-D
Remarks
– C U F –
TYPE B
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
:
Enable selection.
•:
Disable selection.
FULL
12.0
:
15.5
:
17.0
Set the voltage to display the FULL
indication in 0.1 V steps.
NEAR END
11.0
:
13.5
:
15.0
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V
steps.
END
11.0
:
13.1
:
15.0
Set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.
– C U F –
The remaining battery level is indicated in percentage
when a battery with this function is installed on the unit.
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
197
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 198 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
MIC/AUDIO1
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
FRONT VR CH1 OFF
FRONT
W.L.
REAR
ALL
Remarks
Select whether or not to enable the
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control for the
signal selected as the input signal to
AUDIO IN CH1.
OFF: Disabled for any input selected.
Recording level does not change
by turning the volume control.
FRONT: Only enabled when [FRONT] is
selected.
W.L.: Only enabled when [W.L.]
(wireless) is selected.
REAR: Only enabled when [REAR] is
selected.
ALL: Enabled for any input selected.
– C U F –
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
MIC LOWCUT
CH4
Select whether or not to enable the
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control for the
signal selected as an input signal to
AUDIO IN CH2.
OFF: Disabled for any input selected.
Recording level does not change
by turning the volume control.
FRONT: Only enabled when [FRONT] is
selected.
W.L.: Only enabled when [W.L.]
(wireless) is selected.
REAR: Only enabled when [REAR] is
selected.
ALL: Enabled for any input selected.
OFF
FRONT
W.L.
REAR
Select the microphone low cut filter for
input CH4.
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is
disabled for any input.
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled when the front
microphone is selected.
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the wireless
microphone is selected.
REAR: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the rear
microphone is selected.
ON
OFF
Select the limiter.
The limiter is enabled when AUDIO
SELECT CH1 switch is set to [MAN].
ON
OFF
Select the limiter.
The limiter is enabled when AUDIO
SELECT CH2 switch is set to [MAN].
ON
OFF
Select the level setting method.
For more information, see [CH3 and
CH4 Recording Levels] (page 62)
ON
OFF
Select the level setting method.
For more information, see [CH3 and
CH4 Recording Levels] (page 62)
OFF
NORMAL
ALWAYS
CHSEL
Select the test signal.
OFF: Disable test tone output.
NORMAL:
Test tone signals are output to all
of CH1 - CH4 when the
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector
switch has been switched to
[BARS] and CH1 of the AUDIO
IN switch has been switched to
[FRONT].
ALWAYS:
Test tone signals are always
output to all of CH1 - CH4 when
the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE
selector switch has been
switched to [BARS].
CHSEL: Output test tone to the channels
where the AUDIO IN switch CH1
or CH2 is set to [FRONT] when
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector
switch is set to [BARS]. The test
tone is not output to CH3 and
CH4.
– C U F –
LIMITER CH1
FRONT VR CH2 OFF
FRONT
W.L.
REAR
ALL
– C U F –
LIMITER CH2
– C U F –
AUTO LEVEL
CH3
– C U F –
AUTO LEVEL
CH4
– C U F –
MIC LOWCUT
CH1
OFF
FRONT
W.L.
REAR
Select the microphone low cut filter for
input CH1.
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is
disabled for any input.
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled when the front
microphone is selected.
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the wireless
microphone is selected.
REAR: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the rear
microphone is selected.
OFF
FRONT
W.L.
REAR
Select the microphone low cut filter for
input CH2.
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is
disabled for any input.
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled when the front
microphone is selected.
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the wireless
microphone is selected.
REAR: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the rear
microphone is selected.
– C U F –
TEST TONE
– C U F –
MIC LOWCUT
CH2
– C U F –
MIC LOWCUT
CH3
OFF
FRONT
W.L.
REAR
Select the microphone low cut filter for
input CH3.
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is
disabled for any input.
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled when the front
microphone is selected.
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the wireless
microphone is selected.
REAR: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the rear
microphone is selected.
– C U F –
198
Menu: Menu Description Tables
Remarks
– C U F –
Note
The frequency characteristics when the microphone low cut
filter is applied are 200 Hz to 10 kHz.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 199 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
MIC/AUDIO2
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
FRONT MIC
POWER
TC/UB
Remarks
ON
OFF
Select the phantom power supply for the
front microphone.
ON
OFF
Select the phantom power supply for the
rear microphone.
When “OFF” is selected, no phantom
power is supplied even if the LINE/MIC/
+48V selector switch is set to [+48V].
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
TC MODE
DF
NDF
Set the time code mode.
DF:
Drop frame.
NDF: Non drop frame.
Note
When the unit operates at 50 Hz or in
24P or 24PA mode, the non-drop frame
is always used.
USER
TIME
DATE
EXT
TCG
FRM RATE
REGEN
Select the user bits mode.
USER: Select UB value set in the LCD
section.
TIME: Select local time (hours,
minutes, seconds).
DATE: Select local date and time (2 last
digits of year, month, date, time).
EXT: The user bits input to the TC IN
connector are recorded.
If reading fails, USER value is
retained.
TCG: TCG value enters UB.
FRM RATE:
Select the shooting information
(e.g. frame rate) for the camera.
For more information, see
[Frame rate information
recorded in user bits] (page 66).
When clips recorded in native
mode are played back, the frame
rate information recorded in
users bits in the VAUX area is
output.
REGEN: Read out value stored in the
card and record value
continuously.
– C U F –
REAR MIC
POWER
STEREO
MIX
When the MONITOR select switch is set
to [ST] (stereo), select the signal format
for the monitor output.
–40dB
–50dB
Select the front microphone input level.
REAR MIC CH1 –50dB
LVL
–60dB
Select the rear microphone input level.
MONITOR
SELECT
– C U F –
UB MODE
– C U F –
– C U F –
FRONT MIC
LEVEL
– C U F –
Select the rear microphone input level.
– C U F –
REAR LINE IN
LVL
0dB
+4dB
–3dB
Select the rear line input level.
– C U F –
AUDIO OUT LVL 0dB
+4dB
–3dB
Select the audio output level.
– C U F –
HEADROOM
18dB
20dB
Set the headroom (standard level).
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to enable the
alarm to trigger for poor wireless receiver
reception.
SINGLE
DUAL
Select the type of wireless receiver.
SINGLE:
Select a single channel wireless
receiver.
DUAL: Select a 2-channel wireless
receiver.
– C U F –
WIRELESS
WARN
Menu
– C U F –
REAR MIC CH2 –50dB
LVL
–60dB
Remarks
– C U F –
– C U F –
WIRELESS
TYPE
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
199
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 200 ページ 2008年10月15日
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
VITC UB MODE USER/EXT
TIME
DATE
TCG
FRM RATE
REGEN
水曜日
Remarks
Select the user bits mode for VAUX TC
(VITC).
USER/EXT:
If UB MODE is set to “EXT”, the
EXT value is recorded. If not,
USER value set by UB is
recorded.
TIME: Select local time (hours,
minutes, seconds).
DATE: Select local date and time (2 last
digits of year, month, date, time).
TCG: TCG value enters UB.
FRM RATE:
Select camera shooting
information (frame rate, etc.).
For more information, see
[Frame rate information
recorded in user bits] (page 66).
REGEN: Read out value stored in card
and record value continuously.
Note
When the unit operates in 24P, 24PA,
and Native mode, the “FRM RATE” is
fixed.
午後6時38分
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
TC DISP SEL
Select the display format for the time
code frame digits. (For 1080-59.94i only)
For details, refer to [Recording time code
and user bits] (page 64).
30F:
Display time code frame digits in
30 frames.
24F:
Convert time code frame digits
into 24 frames for display.
0
1
2
3
For setting to correct the time code
according to the delay of video signals.
0:
Do not correct.
1:
To delay the time code to be
input according to the timing of
the video images.
2:
To forward the time code to be
output according to the timing of
the video images.
3:
To delay the time code to be
input and forward the time code
to be output, respectively,
according to the timing of the
video images.
For details, refer to [Externally Locking
the Time Code] (page 69).
ON
OFF
For selecting whether the time code is
regenerated to the value on the P2 card
or not, when subsequent recording starts
after setting the RET SW item on the
<SW MODE> screen to “R.REVIEW”
and pressing the RET button on the lens
or the user button on the unit on which
the RET SW function is assigned.
ON:
The time code is regenerated.
OFF: The time code is not
regenerated.
– C U F –
TC VIDEO
SYNCHRO
– C U F –
TCG SET HOLD ON
OFF
On/off switching for the feature that
always starts recording (when the power
is turned on again) the TCG value that
was set before the power is turned off.
– C U F –
REC REVIEW
REGEN
– C U F –
FIRST REC TC
PRESET
REGEN
For selecting whether the time code is
regenerated to the value on the P2 card
when first recording after switching on
the power, inserting the P2 card or
changing the P2 card that is the
recording target.
PRESET:
Use the unit’s internal time code.
REGEN: For clips recorded on the
recording-target P2 card,
regenerate the time code as the
time code of the clip that has the
most recent date and time.
Notes
Set the date and time accurately. For
guidance on setting, see [Setting the
Internal Clock’s Date and Time]
(page 67).
During operation in either 24P or 24PA
mode, regeneration of the value of the
card recorded in drop-frame is not
permitted.
– C U F –
UMID SET/INFO
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
COUNTRY
– C U F –
P.OFF LCD
DISPLAY
– C U F –
TC OUT
TCG
TCG/TCR
Select the time code to be output to the
time code output connector.
TCG: Always output time code
generator value.
TCG/TCR:
Output time code generator
value in recording mode, and
time code reader value in
playback mode.
– C U F –
200
Menu: Menu Description Tables
Remarks
Input the user’s country. “NO-INFO” is
displayed until the input completes.
– C U F –
USER
For selecting whether to allow the time
code of the LCD monitor to be set and
the counter to be displayed when the
power is off.
ON:
It is possible to set the time code
and display the counter when
the power is off.
OFF: Power-down LCD monitor while
camera power is turned off.
Setting and indication disabled.
NO-INFO
ORGANIZATION NO-INFO
– C U F –
ON
OFF
Remarks
30F
24F
NO-INFO
Input the user’s organization or company
name. “NO-INFO” is displayed until the
input completes.
Input the user name. “NO-INFO” is
displayed until the input completes.
– C U F –
DEVICE NODE
Indicate the product ID number.
– – – – –
Note
Please refer to [Setting UMID Information] (page 74) for the
UMID information setting.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 201 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
FILE
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
SD CARD READ/WRITE
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
R.SELECT
1
:
8
SD CARD R/W SELECT
Remarks
Select the file number to read out.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
SYSTEM MODE ON
R/W
OFF
– – – F –
Read out the data from the SD memory
card.
READ
– – – – –
W.SELECT
1
:
8
Write the unit’s menu data to the SD
memory card.
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the
settings on the USER MENU SELECT
page when reading out or writing to the
SD memory card.
SYSTEM MENU ON
OFF
R/W
Select whether or not to include the set
values on all screens except the
<SYSTEM MODE> screen on the
SYSTEM SETTING page and the set
values on the OPTION MENU page
when reading out or writing to the SD
memory card.
USER MENU
SELECT R/W
– – – F –
Read out the title of the data recorded on
the SD memory card.
– – – – –
TITLE1 - 8
Up to 8 letters can be set for the title
name.
– – – – –
– – – F –
PAINT MENU
LEVEL R/W
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the
adjusted values on the PAINT page
when reading out or writing to the SD
memory card.
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the set
values on the PAINT MENU page when
reading out or writing to the SD memory
card.
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the set
values on the VF page when reading out
or writing to the SD memory card.
Note
For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the
respective items for SD CARD READ/WRITE are executed,
since it does not access an SD memory card. Set PC MODE
to “OFF” and then execute the operation again.
Menu
Format the SD memory card.
– – – – –
TITLE READ
Select whether or not to include the
CAMERA ID when reading out or writing
to the SD memory card.
– – – F –
– – – – –
CARD CONFIG
Select whether or not to include the
settings for the options on the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen when reading out or
writing to the SD memory card.
– – – F –
ID READ/WRITE ON
OFF
Select the file number to write in.
– – – F –
WRITE
Remarks
– – – F –
PAINT MENU
SW(„) R/W
– – – F –
VF MENU R/W
– – – F –
CAM OPE MENU ON
R/W
OFF
Select whether or not to include the set
values on the CAM OPERATION page
when reading out or writing to the SD
memory card.
– – – F –
MAIN OPE
MENU R/W
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the set
values on the MAIN OPERATION page
when reading out or writing to the SD
memory card.
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the set
values on the MAINTENANCE page
when reading out or writing to the SD
memory card.
– – – F –
MAINTE MENU
R/W
– – – F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
201
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 202 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
CAC FILE CARD READ
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
CARD FILE
SELECT
01
:
32
Remarks
For selecting the number of the
chromatic aberration correction file on
the SD memory card that will be read or
deleted.
– – – F –
For reading CAC file from the SD
memory card. When selected, the
following FILE READ screen appears.
READ
– – – – –
For deleting a CAC file from the SD
memory card.
DELETE
– – – – –
FILE READ screen
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
For displaying the name of a CAC file set
using READ from the <CAC FILE CARD
READ> screen.
TITLE
YES
For storing a CAC file read from the SD
memory card to the internal memory of
the unit.
NO (CANCEL)
For canceling storage of a CAC file read
from the SD memory card to the internal
memory of the unit.
MEM STORE
NO.
EMPTY
01
:
32
EMPTY:
For searching through the
internal memory of the unit in
numerical order when storing
data and only stores data in free
locations.
01 - 32:
For storing data at selected
number. When a CAC file
already exists at the selected
number, it is overwritten.
TITLE SCROLL
01
:
25
For scrolling through the CAC files in the
internal memory of the unit. Select this
option using the cursor. Press the jog
dial button, and then turn the jog dial
button to scroll through the CAC files.
For reading the name of a CAC file on
the SD memory card.
TITLE READ
– – – – –
TITLE SCROLL
01
:
25
For scrolling through the CAC files on
the SD memory card. Select this option
using the cursor. Press the jog dial
button, and then turn the jog dial button
to scroll through the CAC files.
– – – – –
01: - 32:
For displaying up to 32 file names, each
up to 27 characters in length.
– – – – –
01: - 32:
202
Menu: Menu Description Tables
Remarks
For displaying up to 32 file names, each
up to 27 characters in length.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 203 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
LENS FILE
SCENE
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
FILE NO.
01
:
64
Remarks
Select the lens file number.
Read out the cinematograph setting.
READ
CINEMATOGRAPH
Read the lens file data.
READ USER
DATA
Write the lens file data.
SCENE SEL
– – – – –
Read out the data from the user area in
the memory.
– – – – –
WRITE
– – – – –
For resetting the all data of the lens file.
RESET ALL
– – – – –
TITLE SCROLL
Remarks
– – – – –
– – – F –
READ
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
01
:
59
Scrolls through the lens files.
01
:
16
– – – F –
Read the scene file.
READ
– – – – –
Write the scene file.
WRITE
– – – – –
Select the scene file.
– – – – –
Up to 12 letters can be set for the title
name.
TITLE
– – – – –
Reset the scene file values to the initial
values.
RESET
– – – – –
TITLE SCROLL
– – – – –
01
:
12
Scrolls through the scene files.
Menu
For displaying up to 64 file names.
01 - 64
– – – – –
LENS FILE CARD R/W
Create the scene file title.
TITLE
– – – – –
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
CARD FILE
SELECT
1(01-08)
2(09-16)
3(17-24)
4(25-32)
5(33-40)
6(41-48)
7(49-56)
8(57-64)
Remarks
For selecting the number of the lens file
in the SD memory card.
For displaying up to 16 file names.
– – – – –
Note
For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the READ
USER DATA item is executed, since it does not access an
SD memory card. Set PC MODE to “OFF” and then execute
the operation again.
– – – F –
READ
01: - 16:
For reading the lens file data from the SD
memory card.
INITIALIZE
– – – – –
WRITE
For writing the lens file data into the SD
memory card.
– – – – –
TITLE READ
For reading the title of the lens file in the
SD memory card.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
READ FACTORY
DATA
– – – – –
TITLE1 - 8
For setting a title consisting of not more
than 12 characters.
– – – – –
Note
For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the
respective items of LENS FILE CARD R/W are executed,
since it does not access an SD memory card. Set PC MODE
to “OFF” and then execute the operation again.
Remarks
The menu (MAIN MENU, OPTION
MENU) values are all reset to factory
settings.
Note
The settings for the following are not
reset to the factory-set values.
Scene file
User data
Lens file
Black shading data
– – – – –
WRITE USER
DATA
Save the user preference menu data in
the camera’s internal memory.
– – – – –
Note
For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the READ
FACTORY DATA item is executed, since it does not access
an SD memory card. Set PC MODE to “OFF” and then
execute the operation again.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
203
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 204 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
MAINTENANCE
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
LENS ADJ
LENS FILE ADJ
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
F2.8 ADJ
Remarks
ON
OFF
The iris is only set to F2.8 when this item
set to “ON”. (Adjustment to F2.8 will be
executed on the lens)
ON
OFF
The iris is only set to F16 when this item
set to “ON”. (Adjustment to F16 will be
executed on the lens)
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
RB GAIN CTRL
RESET
ON
OFF
Remarks
ON:
– – – – –
F16 ADJ
OFF:
– – – – –
BLACK SHADING
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
CORRECT
Remarks
ON
OFF
On/off switching for digital black shading
compensation.
–
Execute digital black shading
compensation.
– – – F –
–200
:
+000
:
+200
For compensating Rch sensitivity of the
lens used.
–200
:
+000
:
+200
For compensating Bch sensitivity of the
lens used.
000
:
100
For adjusting the flare level of Rch.
LENS G FLARE 000
:
100
For adjusting the flare level of Gch.
LENS R GAIN
OFFSET
– C U F R
DETECTION
(DIG)
– – – F –
LENS B GAIN
OFFSET
– – – – –
The gains of Rch and Bch
adjusted in <RB GAIN
CONTROL> screen are reset.
Furthermore, the flare levels of
Rch, Gch and Bch that are
adjusted on <RGB BLACK
CONTROL> screen are reset.
The gains of Rch and Bch
adjusted in <RB GAIN
CONTROL> screen are enabled.
Furthermore, the flare levels of
Rch, Gch and Bch that are
adjusted on <RGB BLACK
CONTROL> screen are enabled.
WHITE SHADING
– – – F –
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
CORRECT
Remarks
ON
OFF
On/off switching for white shading
compensation.
–255
:
+000
:
+255
For executing the white shading
compensation manually.
The sawteeth-shaped waveform and the
parabola waveform of the respective
RGB channels are adjusted in the
horizontal direction and the vertical
direction.
– C U F R
R H SAW
R H PARA
R V SAW
R V PARA
G H SAW
G H PARA
G V SAW
G V PARA
B H SAW
B H PARA
B V SAW
B V PARA
– – – F –
204
Menu: Menu Description Tables
LENS R FLARE
– – – F –
– – – F –
LENS B FLARE
000
:
100
For adjusting the flare level of Bch.
– – – F –
Data adjusted on the <LENS FILE ADJ> screen can be
stored on an SD memory card as a lens file.
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 205 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
CAC ADJ
CHAR FPGA
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
CAC CONTROL ON
OFF
Remarks
ON:
OFF:
Enable chromatic aberration
correction
Disable chromatic aberration
correction
Remarks
Displays the version of the program for
the HD signal I/O control FPGA.
– – – – –
DC FPGA
Displays the version of the program for
the SD signal I/O control FPGA.
– – – – –
– – U F R
CAC FILE
DELETE
–
Deletes the CAC file stored in the
internal memory of the unit, and selected
using CAC FILE NO.
– – – – –
CAC FILE NO.
01
:
32
Selects a CAC file when manual
correction is in use. Also, selects CAC
file for deletion when deleting CAC files
using CAC FILE DELETE.
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
SYSCON SOFT
01
:
25
– – – – –
P2CS OS
For displaying up to 32 file names, each
up to 27 characters in length.
P2CS AP
For displaying up to 32 file names, each
up to 27 characters in length.
SH4CTRL FPGA
– – – – –
– – – – –
03:
For displaying up to 32 file names, each
up to 27 characters in length.
PRCCTRL FPGA
For displaying up to 32 file names, each
up to 27 characters in length.
SYSIF FPGA
For displaying up to 32 file names, each
up to 27 characters in length.
AVC-I SOFT
For displaying up to 32 file names, each
up to 27 characters in length.
AVC-I FPGA
For displaying up to 32 file names, each
up to 27 characters in length.
– – – – –
For displaying up to 32 file names, each
up to 27 characters in length.
08:
– – – – –
DIAGNOSTIC1
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
Display the FPGA program version of
the AVC-I board.
Remarks
Display total hours the camera power
has been turned on.
– – – – –
P.ON TIMES
CAMSOFT MAIN
Display the control software version of
the AVC-I board.
HOURS METER
OPERATION
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
Display the program version for the
serial interface FPGA.
– – – – –
– – – – –
07:
Displays the version of the program for
the PRE RECORDING control FPGA.
– – – – –
– – – – –
06:
Display the program version for the
streaming control FPGA.
– – – – –
– – – – –
05:
Display the application version for the
streaming controller.
– – – – –
– – – – –
04:
Display the OS version for the streaming
controller.
– – – – –
– – – – –
02:
Display the software version for the LCD
microprocessor.
– – – – –
– – – F –
01:
Display the software version for the
system control microprocessor.
Menu
Scrolls through CAC files. Select this
option using the cursor. Press the jog
dial button, and then turn the jog dial
button to scroll through the CAC files.
Remarks
– – – – –
LCD SOFT
– – – F –
TITLE SCROLL
DIAGNOSTIC2
Remarks
Display total number of times the
POWER switch has been turned on.
– – – – –
Displays the version of the main software
for the camera microprocessor.
– – – – –
CAM TABLE
Displays the version of the camera block
settings table.
– – – – –
PULSE FPGA
Displays the version of the program for
driving the CCD.
– – – – –
UCIF FPGA
Displays the version of the program for
the microprocessor interface FPGA.
– – – – –
FM FPGA
Displays the version of the program for
the frame memory control FPGA.
– – – – –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
205
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 206 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
OPTION MENU
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
OPTION
AREA SETTING
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
ENG SECURITY ON
OFF
Remarks
Select whether or not to prohibit opening
the menu screen.
ON:
Menu screen cannot be opened.
Please consult your distributor to
release the setting.
OFF: Menu screen can be opened.
– – – – –
FRAME RATE
UB
FRM RATE
MENU
For setting the user bits to record when
the video system is set to 24P or 24PA.
For details, refer to [Recording time code
and user bits] (page 64).
FRM RATE:
For recording the shooting
information (frame rate etc.) of
the camera.
MENU: This follows the settings in the
UB MODE item and the VITC UB
MODE item of <TC/UB> screen.
However, the camera shooting
information is always recorded
when recording in native mode.
DELAYED
THROUGH
Select whether or not to delay audio,
headphone and speaker outputs.
DELAYED:
Delay audio output in
synchronization with video
output.
THROUGH:
Output audio input without delay.
This setting prevents echo effect
between the sound source and
audio output when the sound
source is near the unit.
OFF
AUTO
For setting the operation mode of the fan
OFF: The fan always stops.
AUTO: The fan will run automatically
when the temperature in the unit
increases.
Note
Once the power is turned off, this will
always be set to “AUTO” whenever the
power is turned on. If the unit is operated
as the fan stops, the temperature in the
unit will increase, and data may not
record or play back properly. Use the unit
after setting this item to “AUTO” for
normal operation.
ON
OFF
For setting if the frame rate can be
changed or not during VFR recording.
ON:
Frame rate can be changed.
OFF: Frame rate cannot be changed.
Note
Audio while recording VFR will not be
recorded onto the P2 card regardless of
the frame rate setting when this is set to
“ON”.
– C – – –
FAN MODE
– – – – –
RATE SET AT
REC
– C U F –
206
AREA SELECT
Menu: Menu Description Tables
Remarks
NTSC
NTSC (J)
PAL
NTSC: Selects an NTSC area outside
Japan.
NTSC (J):
Selects Japan.
PAL: Selects a PAL area.
–
For changing the area setting selected
using AREA SELECT. For more details
about settings used in different areas,
refer to [Color TV Standard Settings
(Settings for frame frequency)]
(page 14).
– – – – –
„AREA SET
– C – – –
AUDIO OUT
DELAY
Items/
Adjustable
Data Saved
Range
– – – – –
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 207 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Updating the firmware
incorporated into the unit
The firmware can be updated using either of the following two methods.
1.
Checking the current version of firmware and performing the update using the dedicated tool
(P2_Status_Logger)
PASS (P2 Asset Support System) is only available to customers who have completed customer registration with
Panasonic.
Log in to PASS and use the dedicated tool (P2_Status_Logger) to check the version information of the firmware on the
unit and download links to pages containing the necessary firmware.
For further information about downloading and using P2_Status_Logger, log in to PASS and refer to the relevant pages.
Besides access to PASS, completing customer registration has a number of other benefits. For further details, refer to the
PASS (P2 Asset Support System) website (http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e/).
2.
Notes
The update is completed by loading the downloaded file onto the unit via an SD memory card. For further details about the
updating methods, refer to the following website.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
Be sure to use a compatible SD memory card. The unit is compatible with SD memory cards based on the SD and SDHC
standards. Also, be sure to format the memory card using the unit before use.
Updating the firmware incorporated into the unit
Updating the firmware incorporated into the unit
Checking the current version of the firmware using the unit and performing the update
From the MAINTENANCE menu page, check the current version of firmware on the unit using the <DIAGNOSTIC1> and
<DIAGNOSTIC2> screens. Then, access the website listed below for the latest firmware-related information and
download firmware as required.
207
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 208 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Specifications
General
Power supply:
DC 12 V (11.0 V to 17.0 V)
Power consumption:
42 W (Main unit only)
indicates safety information.
Operating temperature:
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Storage temperature:
–20 °C to 60 °C (–4 °F to 140 °F)
Operating humidity:
10% to maximum 85% (relative humidity)
Maximum continuous operation:
Approximately 120 minutes (using an Anton/Bauer
DIONIC90 battery)
Dimensions (W H D):
137 mm 209 mm 318 mm
(5-3/16 inches 8-1/2 inches 12-1/2 inches)
(excluding handle and wireless option cover)
Weight:
Approx. 4.9 kg (10.8 lb)
(main unit only, excluding VF mount)
Camera Unit
Pickup devices:
2/3-inch, 2,200,000 pixels, IT-type CCD 3
Image pickup scheme:
RGB 3CCD
Total pixels:
2010 (H) 1120 (V)
Valid pixels:
1920 (H) 1080 (V)
CC Filter:
A: 3200 K
B: 4300 K
C: 5600 K
D: 1/2 ND
ND Filter:
1: CLEAR
2: 1/4 ND
3: 1/16 ND
4: 1/64 ND
Quantizing:
14-bit
Horizontal drive frequency:
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz/23.98 Hz)
74.25 MHz (50 Hz/24 Hz)
Sampling frequencies:
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz/23.98 Hz)
74.25 MHz (50 Hz/24 Hz)
Digital signal processing:
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz/23.98 Hz)
74.25 MHz (50 Hz/24 Hz)
Programmable gain:
–3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB,
21 dB, 24 dB, 27 dB or 30 dB
VFR function:
1 to 30FRAME
(1080-59.94i/1080-23.98PsF/1080-24PsF)
1 to 25FRAME (1080-50i)
208
Specifications
Shutter speeds:
180.0 deg, 172.8 deg, 144.0 deg,
120.0 deg, 90.0 deg, 45.0 deg,
1/50 s (50 Hz), 1/60 s, 1/100 s (59.94 Hz), 1/120 s,
1/250 s, 1/500 s, 1/1000 s, 1/2000 s, HALF
Synchro-scan shutter:
1/61.7 s to 1/7200 s
(1080/59.94i)
1/30.9 s to 1/3600 s
(1080/29.97P)
1/24.7 s to 1/2880 s
(1080/23.98P (PA), 1080/24P)
1/51.4 s to 1/6000 s
(1080/50i)
1/25.7 s to 1/3000 s
(1080/25P)
Lens mount:
2/3-inch bayonet type
Color separation optical system:
Optical prism (F1.4)
Sensitivity:
F10 (2000 lx, 3200 K, 89.9% reflection, 1080/59.94i)
Minimum object illuminance:
0.042 lx (F1.4 at +30 dB and VFR=1 frame)
2.48 lx (F1.4 at +30 dB)
Video S/N:
54 dB (standard)
Horizontal resolution:
1000 TV lines or more
Registration error:
0.03% or less (all areas, excluding lens distortion)
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 209 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
General Recording
Record media:
P2 card
Recording formats:
Selectable from AVC-Intra100, AVC-Intra50,
DVCPRO HD
Recording video signals:
1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 1080/29.97P, 1080/23.98P,
1080/24P, 1080/25P
Recording audio signals:
48 kHz, 16-bit, 4ch
Recording/playback time:
AVC-Intra100/DVCPRO HD:
8 GB 1: approx. 8 min
16 GB 1: approx. 16 min
32 GB 1: approx. 32 min
AVC-Intra50: 8 GB 1: approx. 16 min
16 GB 1: approx. 32 min
32 GB 1: approx. 64 min
Note
For the latest information on P2 cards not available in
the operating Instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk
at the following Web sites.
Sampling frequency:
Y:
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)
74.2500 MHz (50 Hz)
37.0879 MHz (59.94 Hz)
PB/PR:
37.1250 MHz (50 Hz)
Quantizing:
AVC-Intra100/AVC-Intra50: 10 bits
DVCPRO HD: 8 bits
Video compression schemes:
AVC-Intra100/AVC-Intra50:
MPEG4 AVC/H.264 Intra Profile
DVCPRO HD: DV-Based Compression
(SMPTE370M)
Audio Characteristics
Frequency response:
20 Hz to 20 kHz ±1.0 dB (at standard level)
Dynamic range:
Minimum 85 dB (1 kHz, AWTD)
Distortion factor:
0.1% or less (1 kHz, standard level)
Headroom:
20 dB/18 dB selectable with menu
Specifications
This recording time represents one shot continuously
recorded on a P2 card. The recording time may be shorter,
depending on the number of shots recorded.
Digital Video System
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
Specifications
209
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 210 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Input/output Unit
GENLOCK IN:
BNC 1, 1.0 VP-P, 75 Ω
(This is available as the return video input connector.)
MON OUT:
BNC 1
(It can be switched among HD SDI/VBS.)
HD SDI:
0.8 VP-P, 75 Ω
(Compliant with the SMPTE292M/
299M standards)
VBS:
1.0 VP-P, 75 Ω
HD SDI A:
BNC 1
HD SDI:
0.8 VP-P, 75 Ω
(Compliant with the SMPTE292M/
299M/372M/352M standards)
Dual Link with HD SDI B supported
HD SDI B:
BNC 1
HD SDI:
0.8 VP-P, 75 Ω
(Compliant with the SMPTE292M/
299M/372M/352M standards)
Dual Link with HD SDI A supported
TC IN:
BNC 1, 0.5 VP-P to 8 VP-P, 10 kΩ
TC OUT:
BNC 1, 2.0±0.5 VP-P, low impedance
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2:
XLR 2, 3 pins
LINE, MIC, and +48 V switch-selectable
LINE:
+4 dBu
(–3 dBu/0 dBu/+4 dBu selectable
with menu)
MIC:
–60 dBu (–60 dBu/–50 dBu
selectable with menu)
MIC +48 V:
Compatible with +48 V phantom
power supply
–60 dBu (–60 dBu/–50 dBu
selectable with menu)
Accessories
Shoulder Strap
Front Audio Level control knob
Control knob mounting screw 1
CD-ROM
Weight and dimensions when shown are approximately.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
210
Specifications
MIC IN:
XLR 1, 5 pins
+48 V phantom (on/off selectable with menu)
–40 dBu (–50 dBu/–40 dBu selectable with menu)
WIRELESS IN:
25 pin, D-SUB, –40 dBu
AUDIO OUT CH1/CH2:
XLR 1, 5 pins, +4 dBu
(–3 dBu/0 dBu/+4 dBu selectable with menu)
Balanced low-impedance output
Headphones:
Stereo mini jack 2
DC IN:
XLR 1, 4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V)
DC OUT:
4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V)
Maximum rated current: 1.5 A
LENS:
12 pins
EVF:
20 pins
REMOTE:
10 pins (connector for AJ-RC10G)
GPS:
6 pins (connector for AJ-GPS910G)
USB 2.0 (HOST):
Type-A connector, 4-pin, in accordance with USB
Ver. 2.0
USB 2.0 (DEVICE):
Type-B connector, 4-pin, in accordance with USB
Ver. 2.0
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 211 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Software information for this product
1 Customer advisory: This product includes software licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) and GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL); customers have the right to download, modify, and redistribute source code for
this software.
Descriptions of the GPL and LGPL are stored on the installation CD included with this camera-recorder. See the folder
named \LDOC. (The description is the original (written in English)). To download the relevant source code, visit
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/.
Please note that we cannot answer any questions you may have about the content, etc. of any source code you may
obtain from the above Web site.
2 This product includes software licensed under the MIT License. A description of the MIT is stored on the installation CD
included with this camera-recorder. See the folder named \LDOC. (The description is the original (written in English)).
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to
(i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a
consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to
provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained
from MPEG LA, LLC.
See http://www.mpegla.com.
Unislot is a trademark of Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd.
Other names of companies and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies.
211
AJ-HPX3700G-VQT1V68_eng.book 212 ページ 2008年10月15日
水曜日
午後6時38分
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment
and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic
products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection
points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential
negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality,
your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
Cd
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the
Directive for the chemical involved.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising